EPSON WF-M5899 Monochrome Multi Function Printer User Guide

User Guide for EPSON models including: WF-M5899 Monochrome Multi Function Printer, WF-M5899, Monochrome Multi Function Printer, Multi Function Printer, Function Printer, Printer

User's Guide - WF-M5899

CPD-63499 R0

WF-M5899 User Guide

Epson Business InkJet Printers | IPSi Scan

File Info : application/pdf, 415 Pages, 8.70MB

Epson-WF-M5899-User-Guide

WF-M5899 User's Guide

Contents
WF-M5899 User's Guide............................................................................................................................ 17
Product Basics .......................................................................................................................................... 18 Installing or Using Optional Parts ....................................................................................................... 18 Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts .............................................................................. 19 Installing the Optional Paper Cassette Units ................................................................................. 19 Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - Windows................................................................... 25 Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - PostScript Printer Software - Windows..................... 27 Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - Mac .......................................................................... 29 Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - PostScript Printer Software - Mac............................. 30 Product Parts Locations ..................................................................................................................... 31 Product Parts - Front ..................................................................................................................... 32 Product Parts - Inside .................................................................................................................... 34 Product Parts - Back...................................................................................................................... 36 Using the Control Panel ..................................................................................................................... 37 Control Panel Buttons and Lights .................................................................................................. 37 Status Icon Information ............................................................................................................. 38 Job/Status Screen..................................................................................................................... 40 Selecting the Date and Time ......................................................................................................... 40 Selecting Your Country or Region ................................................................................................. 41 Entering Characters on the LCD Screen ....................................................................................... 42 Using Presets ................................................................................................................................ 42 Changing LCD Screen Language.................................................................................................. 43 Adjusting Control Panel Sounds .................................................................................................... 43 Adjusting the Screen Brightness.................................................................................................... 44 Turning Off the Operation Time Out Setting .................................................................................. 44 Checking for Software Updates.......................................................................................................... 45 Using Power Saving Settings ............................................................................................................. 45 Changing the Sleep Timer Settings ............................................................................................... 46 Changing the Power Off Timer Settings ........................................................................................ 46 Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More ......................................................... 47
3

Setting Up Epson Connect Services.............................................................................................. 47 Using Epson Email Print ............................................................................................................... 49 Using Epson Remote Print ........................................................................................................... 49 Using Epson Scan to Cloud........................................................................................................... 50 Using the Epson Smart Panel Mobile App.......................................................................................... 51 Using AirPrint .................................................................................................................................... 51 Setting Up Printing on a Chromebook ................................................................................................ 52 Android Printing Using the Epson Print Enabler ................................................................................ 52 Using the Mopria Print Service .......................................................................................................... 53 Voice-activated Printing ..................................................................................................................... 54
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking........................................................................................................................ 55 Network Security Recommendations ................................................................................................. 55 Wi-Fi Infrastructure Mode Setup......................................................................................................... 56 Selecting Wireless Network Settings from the Control Panel ........................................................ 57 Wi-Fi Direct Mode Setup .................................................................................................................... 59 Connecting to a Mobile Device ...................................................................................................... 59 Modifying the Wi-Fi Direct Network Name or Password ................................................................ 60 Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)............................................................................................................. 62 Using WPS to Connect to a Network ............................................................................................. 62 Printing a Network Status Sheet......................................................................................................... 63 Printing a Network Connection Report ............................................................................................... 63 Network Connection Report Codes and Messages ....................................................................... 64 Changing or Updating Network Connections ..................................................................................... 70 Changing a USB Connection to a Wi-Fi Connection...................................................................... 70 Changing a Wi-Fi Connection to a Wired Network Connection...................................................... 70 Connecting to a New Wi-Fi Router ................................................................................................ 71 Disabling Wi-Fi Features ............................................................................................................... 71
Enabling PCL or PostScript Printing ....................................................................................................... 73 Installing the PCL Driver - Windows .................................................................................................. 73 Installing the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows ............................................................... 75 Installing the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac ....................................................................... 75 Selecting PDL (Page Description Language) Settings ....................................................................... 76 PDL Print Configuration Options.................................................................................................... 76
4

Selecting Printer Language and Interface Settings ............................................................................ 79 Printing Language and Interface Options ...................................................................................... 79
Printing a PCL or PS3 (PostScript) Status Sheet ............................................................................... 80
Loading Paper ........................................................................................................................................... 81 Loading Paper in the Paper Cassettes and Rear Paper Tray............................................................. 81 Paper Loading Capacity ..................................................................................................................... 84 Double-sided Printing Capacity .......................................................................................................... 89 Compatible Epson Papers.................................................................................................................. 91 Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software.............................................................................. 93 Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source - Control Panel ........................................................... 94 Paper Type Settings - Control Panel ............................................................................................. 94 Selecting Default Paper Settings - Administrator................................................................................ 95 Selecting the Default Printer Settings ............................................................................................ 96 Paper Source Settings Options................................................................................................. 96 Selecting the Universal Print Settings............................................................................................ 97 Universal Print Settings Options ............................................................................................... 97
Placing Originals on the Product ............................................................................................................. 99 Placing Originals in the Automatic Document Feeder ........................................................................ 99 Placing Originals on the Scanner Glass ........................................................................................... 100
Copying .................................................................................................................................................... 102 Copying Documents or Photos......................................................................................................... 102 Copying Options............................................................................................................................... 103
Printing from a Computer ....................................................................................................................... 106 Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows ......................................................... 106 Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows .................................................................................... 107 Paper Source Options - Windows ........................................................................................... 109 Print Quality Options - Windows ............................................................................................. 110 Multi-Page Printing Options - Windows................................................................................... 110 Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Windows ................................................................... 110 Double-sided Printing Options - Windows............................................................................... 113 Print Density Adjustments - Windows ..................................................................................... 113 Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows ........................................................... 114
5

Custom Color Correction Options - Windows.......................................................................... 115 Image Options and Additional Settings - Windows.................................................................. 116 Header/Footer Settings - Windows ......................................................................................... 117 Selecting a Printing Preset - Windows......................................................................................... 118 Selecting Extended Settings - Windows ...................................................................................... 120 Extended Settings - Windows ................................................................................................. 121 Printing Your Document - Windows ............................................................................................. 122 Locking Printer Settings - Windows ............................................................................................. 123 Locked Setting Options........................................................................................................... 124 Entering a User ID and Password for Printing ............................................................................. 126 Selecting Default Print Settings - Windows.................................................................................. 127 Changing the Language of the Printer Software Screens ....................................................... 128 Changing Automatic Update Options .......................................................................................... 129 Printing with the Built-in Epson Driver - Windows 10 S..................................................................... 130 Selecting Print Settings - Windows 10 S...................................................................................... 130 Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac ................................................................. 134 Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac ........................................................................................... 135 Paper Source Options - Mac ................................................................................................... 138 Print Quality Options - Mac ..................................................................................................... 138 Selecting Page Setup Settings - Mac .......................................................................................... 139 Selecting Print Layout Options - Mac........................................................................................... 140 Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Mac........................................................................... 140 Double-sided Printing Options and Adjustments - Mac ........................................................... 141 Selecting Printing Preferences - Mac .......................................................................................... 142 Printing Preferences - Mac...................................................................................................... 143 Printing Your Document - Mac..................................................................................................... 143 Checking Print Status - Mac.................................................................................................... 144 Setting Up Printing on a Chromebook .............................................................................................. 145 Printing from a Smartphone or Tablet............................................................................................... 145 Printing with the PCL Printer Software - Windows............................................................................ 146 Synchronizing Printer Settings - PCL Driver - Windows .............................................................. 146 Selecting Basic Print Settings - PCL Driver - Windows................................................................ 147 Selecting Default Print Settings - PCL Driver - Windows ............................................................. 149
6

Locking Printer Settings - PCL Driver - Windows......................................................................... 150 PCL Driver Locked Setting Options ........................................................................................ 152
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows ........................................................ 153 Selecting Basic Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows ...................................... 153 Selecting Default Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows.................................... 155
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac ................................................................ 155 Selecting Basic Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Mac ............................................. 156
Cancelling Printing Using a Product Button...................................................................................... 160
Scanning .................................................................................................................................................. 161 Starting a Scan................................................................................................................................. 161 Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel ........................................................................ 161 Scanning to Email ................................................................................................................... 162 Scanning to a Connected Computer ....................................................................................... 163 Scanning to a Memory Device ................................................................................................ 164 Scanning to the Cloud............................................................................................................. 165 Setting Up a WSD Port (Windows 7/Windows Vista) .............................................................. 166 Control Panel Scanning Options ............................................................................................. 167 Setting Up and Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server...................................................... 168 Creating a Shared Network Folder.......................................................................................... 169 Registering Contacts for Network Folder or FTP Scanning - Web Config ............................... 170 Registering Contacts for Email, Network, or FTP Scanning - Control Panel ........................... 171 Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server.......................................................................... 173 Starting a Scan Using the Epson Scan 2 Icon ............................................................................. 174 Starting a Scan from a Scanning Program................................................................................... 177 Starting a Scan from a Smartphone or Tablet.............................................................................. 179 Scanning in Epson Scan 2 ............................................................................................................... 179 Additional Scanning Settings - Main Settings Tab ....................................................................... 182 Additional Scanning Settings - Advanced Settings Tab ............................................................... 183 Saving Scanned Documents as a Searchable PDF Using Epson Scan 2 ................................... 184 Image Format Options................................................................................................................. 185 Scan Resolution Guidelines ........................................................................................................ 186 Scanning with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture .......................................................... 186 Scanning with Simple Scan in Document Capture Pro - Windows .............................................. 187
7

Scanning with Job Scan in Document Capture Pro - Windows.................................................... 188 Adding and Assigning Scan Jobs with Document Capture Pro - Windows ............................. 190
Scanning Two Originals onto One Sheet (Stitching Images) - Windows ..................................... 193 Scanning Multi-Page Originals as Separate Files - Windows ...................................................... 196 Scanning with Document Capture - Mac ..................................................................................... 199
Adding and Assigning Scan Jobs with Document Capture - Mac............................................ 202 Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning ............................................................................... 203
Faxing....................................................................................................................................................... 204 Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine .............................................................................. 204 Setting Up Fax Features .................................................................................................................. 207 Setting Up Basic Fax Features .................................................................................................... 208 Using the Fax Setup Wizard ................................................................................................... 208 Selecting the Line Type........................................................................................................... 210 Setting the Number of Rings to Answer .................................................................................. 211 Selecting Advanced Fax Settings ................................................................................................ 212 Basic Settings - Fax ................................................................................................................ 213 Send Settings - Fax................................................................................................................. 215 Receive Settings - Fax ............................................................................................................ 216 Report Settings - Fax .............................................................................................................. 219 Security Settings - Fax ............................................................................................................ 220 Setting Up the Fax Utility - Windows............................................................................................ 221 Setting Up Fax Features Using the Fax Utility - Mac ................................................................... 223 Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups......................................................................................... 224 Creating a Contact....................................................................................................................... 225 Editing or Deleting a Contact ....................................................................................................... 226 Creating a Contact Group............................................................................................................ 226 Editing or Deleting a Contact Group ............................................................................................ 227 Sending Faxes ................................................................................................................................. 228 Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel........................................................................... 228 Sending a Fax Using the Keypad, Contact List, or History ...................................................... 228 Fax Sending Options .............................................................................................................. 230 Sending a Fax at a Specified Time ......................................................................................... 232 Sending a Fax on Demand ..................................................................................................... 233
8

Sending a Stored Fax ............................................................................................................. 234 Dialing Fax Numbers from a Connected Telephone ............................................................... 234 Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility - Windows .......................................................................... 235 Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility - Mac .................................................................................. 238 Receiving Faxes............................................................................................................................... 241 Fax Reception ............................................................................................................................. 241 Receiving Faxes Automatically ................................................................................................... 242 Receiving Faxes Manually........................................................................................................... 242 Forwarding Received Faxes........................................................................................................ 243 Receiving a Fax by Polling .......................................................................................................... 243 Checking Fax Status ....................................................................................................................... 244 Viewing a Fax on the LCD Screen (Using the Fax Box) ................................................................... 244 Printing Fax Reports......................................................................................................................... 245 Fax Report Options ..................................................................................................................... 245
Using External USB Devices with Your Product................................................................................... 247 Connecting a USB Device ................................................................................................................ 247 Disconnecting a USB Device............................................................................................................ 247 Viewing and Printing from the LCD Screen ...................................................................................... 248 Printing JPEG Photos.................................................................................................................. 248 Print Setting Options - JPEG Mode......................................................................................... 249 Printing TIFF and PDF Files ....................................................................................................... 250 Print Setting Options - TIFF Mode........................................................................................... 251 Print Setting Options - PDF Mode ........................................................................................... 252 Transferring Files on a USB Device ................................................................................................. 253 Setting Up File Sharing for File Transfers from Your Computer................................................... 253 Transferring Files from a USB Device to Your Computer ............................................................ 254
Replacing the Ink Supply Unit (Ink Pack), Maintenance Box, and Cassette Rollers.......................... 255 Ink Pack Safety Instructions ............................................................................................................. 255 Check Ink and Maintenance Box Status........................................................................................... 256 Checking Ink Status on the LCD Screen...................................................................................... 257 Checking Ink and Maintenance Box Status - Windows................................................................ 257 Checking Ink and Maintenance Box Status - Mac ....................................................................... 259 Purchase Epson Ink Packs and Maintenance Boxes ....................................................................... 260
9

Ink Supply Unit (Ink Pack) and Maintenance Box Part Numbers ................................................ 261 Removing and Installing the Ink Pack............................................................................................... 261 Replacing the Maintenance Box....................................................................................................... 262 Replacing the Paper Feed Rollers ................................................................................................... 263 Resetting the Roller Counter on the LCD Screen ............................................................................. 263
Adjusting Print Quality............................................................................................................................ 265 Print Head Maintenance................................................................................................................... 265 Print Head Nozzle Check............................................................................................................. 265 Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel ......................................................... 266 Checking the Nozzles Using a Computer Utility ...................................................................... 267 Print Head Cleaning .................................................................................................................... 270 Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel ...................................................... 270 Cleaning the Print Head Using a Computer Utility................................................................... 271 Print Head Alignment................................................................................................................... 273 Aligning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel........................................................ 274 Adjusting the Print Quality Using the Product Control Panel ................................................... 274 Cleaning the Paper Guide ................................................................................................................ 276 Cleaning the Translucent Film.......................................................................................................... 276 Checking the Number of Sheets on the LCD Screen ....................................................................... 278
Cleaning and Transporting Your Product ............................................................................................. 280 Cleaning Your Product ..................................................................................................................... 280 Cleaning the Scanner Glass............................................................................................................. 280 Cleaning the Automatic Document Feeder....................................................................................... 281 Transporting Your Product ............................................................................................................... 284
Administering Your Product................................................................................................................... 288 Accessing the Web Config Utility...................................................................................................... 288 Changing the Administrator Password in Web Config ...................................................................... 289 Configuring Product Settings............................................................................................................ 290 Checking Status Information ....................................................................................................... 291 Managing the Network Connection.............................................................................................. 291 Network Settings..................................................................................................................... 292 Setting Control Panel Options ..................................................................................................... 296 Configuring an Email Server........................................................................................................ 296
10

Email Server Settings ............................................................................................................. 297 Sending Email Notifications......................................................................................................... 297 Adjusting Power Saving Settings................................................................................................. 298 Importing and Exporting Product Settings ................................................................................... 299
Exporting Settings Using Web Config ..................................................................................... 299 Importing Settings Using Web Config ..................................................................................... 299 Updating Firmware Using Web Config ........................................................................................ 300 Synchronizing the Date and Time with a Time Server ................................................................. 300 Clearing the Internal Memory ...................................................................................................... 301 Enabling Periodic Cleaning ......................................................................................................... 301 Powering Off or Rebooting the Product Remotely ....................................................................... 302 Restoring Default Product Settings.............................................................................................. 302 Configuring Security Settings ........................................................................................................... 302 Connecting an Authentication Device.......................................................................................... 303 Restricting Features Available for Users ..................................................................................... 304 User Feature Restriction ......................................................................................................... 305 Configuring User Feature Restrictions .................................................................................... 305 Disabling the External Interface................................................................................................... 306 Setting Up Password Encryption ................................................................................................. 306 Working with Audit Logs .............................................................................................................. 307 Restricting PDL File Operations .................................................................................................. 307 Enabling Program Verification on Start Up .................................................................................. 307 Using Your Product on a Secure Network ........................................................................................ 308 Configuring Protocols and Services in Web Config ..................................................................... 308 Protocol Settings..................................................................................................................... 308 Configuring SSL/TLS Communication......................................................................................... 313 Configuring SSL/TLS Settings ................................................................................................ 313 Configuring a Server Certificate for the Product...................................................................... 313 Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering ...................................................................................................... 314 About IPsec/IP Filtering .......................................................................................................... 314 Configuring the Default IPsec/IP Filtering Policy..................................................................... 314 Configuring the Group IPsec/IP Filtering Policies ................................................................... 315 IPsec/IP Filtering Policy Settings ............................................................................................ 315
11

IPsec/IP Filtering Configuration Examples.............................................................................. 321 Configuring an IPsec/IP Filtering Certificate ........................................................................... 322 Connecting the Product to an IEEE 802.1X Network ................................................................... 323 Configuring an IEEE 802.1X Network ..................................................................................... 323 IEEE 802.1X Network Settings ............................................................................................... 323 Configuring a Certificate for an IEEE 802.1X Network ............................................................ 324 IEEE 802.1X Network Status .................................................................................................. 325 Using a Digital Certificate ............................................................................................................ 326 About Digital Certification........................................................................................................ 326 Obtaining and Importing a CA-signed Certificate .................................................................... 326 CSR Setup Settings ................................................................................................................ 327 CSR Import Settings ............................................................................................................... 328 Deleting a CA-signed Certificate ............................................................................................. 329 Updating a Self-signed Certificate........................................................................................... 330 Importing a CA Certificate ....................................................................................................... 330 Deleting a CA Certificate......................................................................................................... 331 Setting Up Universal Print (Microsoft) .............................................................................................. 331 Using Epson Device Admin Configuration Software......................................................................... 331
Solving Problems .................................................................................................................................... 333 Viewing the Help Screen .................................................................................................................. 333 Product Status Messages ................................................................................................................ 334 Job Status Error Codes .................................................................................................................... 337 Running a Product Check ................................................................................................................ 341 Resetting Control Panel Defaults ..................................................................................................... 342 Solving Setup Problems ................................................................................................................... 343 Product Does Not Turn On or Off................................................................................................. 344 Noise After Ink Installation ........................................................................................................... 344 Software Installation Problems .................................................................................................... 344 Cannot Read the Authentication Card ......................................................................................... 345 Solving Network Problems ............................................................................................................... 345 Product Cannot Connect to a Wireless Router or Access Point .................................................. 346 Network Software Cannot Find Product on a Network................................................................. 347 Wireless Network Connection is Unstable on a Mac ................................................................... 349
12

USB 3.0 Connection is Unstable When Using a USB 2.0 Cable.................................................. 349 Product Does Not Appear in Mac Printer Window ....................................................................... 349 Cannot Print Over a Network....................................................................................................... 349 Cannot Scan Over a Network ...................................................................................................... 351 Solving Network Security Problems ................................................................................................. 352 Cannot Create the Secure IPP Printing Port................................................................................ 352 Cannot Update a Certificate or Create a CSR ............................................................................. 353 Cannot Import a Digital Certificate ............................................................................................... 353 Deleted a CA-signed Certificate .................................................................................................. 354 Digital Certificate Warning Messages.......................................................................................... 354 Solving Copying Problems ............................................................................................................... 356 Product Makes Noise, But Nothing Copies.................................................................................. 356 Product Makes Noise When It Sits for a While............................................................................. 356 Solving Copy Quality Problems ........................................................................................................ 356 Copies Have Incorrect or Faint Colors......................................................................................... 357 Position, Size, or Margins of Copies are Incorrect ....................................................................... 357 Solving Paper Problems................................................................................................................... 358 Paper Feeding Problems............................................................................................................. 358 Originals Do Not Feed From the Automatic Document Feeder.................................................... 359 Paper Jams Inside the Product.................................................................................................... 360 Paper Ejection Problems ............................................................................................................. 360 Solving Problems Printing from a Computer..................................................................................... 360 Nothing Prints .............................................................................................................................. 361 Product Icon Does Not Appear in Windows Taskbar ................................................................... 363 Printing is Slow ............................................................................................................................ 363 Solving Page Layout and Content Problems .................................................................................... 365 Inverted Image............................................................................................................................. 365 Too Many Copies Print ................................................................................................................ 366 Blank Pages Print ........................................................................................................................ 366 Incorrect Margins on Printout....................................................................................................... 367 Incorrect Characters Print............................................................................................................ 367 Incorrect Image Size or Position .................................................................................................. 368 Slanted Printout ........................................................................................................................... 369
13

Solving Print Quality Problems ......................................................................................................... 369 White or Dark Lines in Printout .................................................................................................... 370 Blurry or Smeared Printout .......................................................................................................... 371 Faint Printout or Printout Has Gaps ............................................................................................. 372 Grainy Printout............................................................................................................................. 373
Solving Scanning Problems ............................................................................................................. 374 Scanning Software Does Not Operate Correctly ......................................................................... 374 Cannot Start Epson Scan 2 ......................................................................................................... 374
Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems ....................................................................................... 375 Image Consists of a Few Dots Only............................................................................................. 375 Line of Dots Appears in All Scanned Images............................................................................... 376 Straight Lines in an Image Appear Crooked ................................................................................ 376 Scanned Image Quality Problems ............................................................................................... 377 Image Colors are Patchy at the Edges ........................................................................................ 378 Ripple Patterns Appear in an Image ............................................................................................ 379 Scanned Image Edges are Cropped ........................................................................................... 379
Solving Faxing Problems.................................................................................................................. 379 Cannot Send or Receive Faxes ................................................................................................... 380 Cannot Receive Faxes with a Telephone Connected to Your Product ........................................ 382 Fax Memory Full Error Appears................................................................................................... 382 Fax Quality is Poor ...................................................................................................................... 383 Sent Fax is Received in an Incorrect Size ................................................................................... 384 Received Fax is Not Printed ........................................................................................................ 385
Solving USB Device Problems ......................................................................................................... 385 Cannot View or Print from a USB Device..................................................................................... 385 Cannot Save Files on a USB Device ........................................................................................... 386 Cannot Transfer Files To or From a USB Device......................................................................... 386
Uninstall Your Product Software....................................................................................................... 387 Uninstalling Product Software - Windows .................................................................................... 387 Uninstalling Product Software - Mac............................................................................................ 388
Where to Get Help (U.S. and Canada) ............................................................................................. 389 Where to Get Help (Latin America)................................................................................................... 389
14

Technical Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 392 Windows System Requirements ...................................................................................................... 392 Mac System Requirements .............................................................................................................. 393 Paper Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 394 Printable Area Specifications ........................................................................................................... 395 Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Specifications .......................................................................... 396 Scanning Specifications ................................................................................................................... 397 Fax Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 397 Ink Pack Specifications .................................................................................................................... 399 Dimension Specifications ................................................................................................................. 400 Electrical Specifications ................................................................................................................... 400 Environmental Specifications ........................................................................................................... 401 Interface Specifications .................................................................................................................... 401 External USB Device Specifications................................................................................................. 401 Network Interface Specifications ...................................................................................................... 402 Safety and Approvals Specifications ................................................................................................ 405
Notices ..................................................................................................................................................... 406 Important Safety Instructions............................................................................................................ 406 General Printer Safety Instructions.............................................................................................. 406 Wireless Connection Safety Instructions ..................................................................................... 408 Telephone Equipment Safety Instructions ................................................................................... 408 LCD Screen Safety Instructions................................................................................................... 408 FCC Compliance Statement............................................................................................................. 409 Binding Arbitration and Class Waiver ............................................................................................... 410 Trademarks ...................................................................................................................................... 413 Copyright Notice............................................................................................................................... 414 libTIFF Software Acknowledgment.............................................................................................. 414 A Note Concerning Responsible Use of Copyrighted Materials................................................... 415 Default Delay Times for Power Management for Epson Products ............................................... 415 Copyright Attribution .................................................................................................................... 415
15

WF-M5899 User's Guide
Welcome to the WF-M5899 User's Guide. For a printable PDF copy of this guide, click here. Note: Availability of products in this guide varies by country.
17

Product Basics
See these sections to learn about the basic features of your product.
Note: Printing software instructions in this manual are intended for use with the standard Epson printer software. For more information on using the Printer Command Language (PCL) or PostScript (PS3) printer software, please see the appropriate sections.
Installing or Using Optional Parts Product Parts Locations Using the Control Panel Checking for Software Updates Using Power Saving Settings Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More Using the Epson Smart Panel Mobile App Using AirPrint Setting Up Printing on a Chromebook Android Printing Using the Epson Print Enabler Using the Mopria Print Service Voice-activated Printing Related tasks Setting Up Epson Connect Services Related topics Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Installing or Using Optional Parts
Follow the instructions in this section to install or use optional parts. Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts Installing the Optional Paper Cassette Units Parent topic: Product Basics
18

Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts
You can purchase genuine Epson accessories at epson.com (U.S. sales), epson.ca (Canadian sales), or latin.epson.com (Latin American sales). You can also purchase supplies from an Epson authorized reseller. To find the nearest one, call 800-GO-EPSON (800-463-7766) in the U.S. or 800-807-7766 in Canada.
U.S. and Canada

Option or part Replacement maintenance box Optional input tray Paper Feed Roller for Cassette A (C1) Paper Feed Roller for Cassette B (C2-C4) Low Optional Cabinet Medium Optional Cabinet Tall Optional Cabinet

Part number C12C938211 C12C937901 C12C938261 C12C938281 C12CFM7066 C12CFM7067 C12CFM7068

Latin America

Option or part Replacement maintenance box Optional input tray Paper Feed Roller for Cassette A (C1) Paper Feed Roller for Cassette B (C2-C4)

Part number C12C938211 C12C937901 C12C938261 C12C938281

Parent topic: Installing or Using Optional Parts
Installing the Optional Paper Cassette Units
You can install up to three optional paper cassette units to provide more paper capacity. 1. Turn off the product, and unplug the power cord and any connected cables.

Warning: To avoid electric shock, make sure you unplug the power cord.

2. Remove the paper cassette unit from its packaging and remove any protective materials. 3. Make sure you have all the items shown here. You will also need a screwdriver to attach the paper
cassette unit, and two people to lift the printer.
4. Remove the protective piece from the back of the printer.
Note: Do not throw the piece away; you will use it later. 5. Place the first optional paper cassette unit in the location where you want to set up the printer.
20

6. If you are installing more than one optional paper cassette unit, stack them on top of each other and secure them with the included screws.
21

7. Repeat this step for all paper cassette units. 22

8. Lift up your product and gently lower it onto the paper cassette unit with the corners aligned. Secure the product to the paper cassette unit using the included screws.
Caution: Because the product is heavy, two or more people should lift and carry it using the hand positions shown:
23

9. Secure the printer and paper cassette units at the back and right side using the included screws as shown.
10. Re-insert the part you removed earlier into the back of the lowest paper cassette unit.
24

11. Place the correct sticker on each cassette unit to indicate the cassette number.
12. Connect the power cord and other connection cables, then plug in the product. 13. Turn on the product. 14. Press the Paper Setting button and make sure the installed cassette units are displayed on the
screen. 15. Enable the optional paper cassette units in the printer software. Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - Windows Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - PostScript Printer Software - Windows Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - Mac Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - PostScript Printer Software - Mac Parent topic: Installing or Using Optional Parts Related tasks Synchronizing Printer Settings - PCL Driver - Windows Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - Windows You need to enable the optional paper cassette units before you can use them with the printer software.
25

Note: If you are using the PCL driver or PostScript (PS3) printer software, see the link below to enable the optional cassette units. Note: Log on to your computer as an administrator. 1. Do one of the following:
· Windows 11: Click , search for Settings and select it. Select Bluetooth & devices > Printers & scanners. Select your product name, then select Printer properties.
· Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners. Select your product name and select Manage > Printer properties.
· Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. Right-click your product name and select Printer properties.
· Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click your printer name and select Printer properties.
· Windows Vista: Click and select Control Panel. Click Printer under Hardware and Sound, then right-click your printer name and select Properties.
2. Click the Optional Settings tab.
26

You see a window like this:
3. Make sure Acquire from Printer is selected and click Get. The optional paper sources are listed in the Current Printer Information section.
4. Click OK. The optional paper cassettes are now enabled. Parent topic: Installing the Optional Paper Cassette Units Related tasks Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - PostScript Printer Software - Windows Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - PostScript Printer Software - Windows If you installed optional paper cassette units, you need to enable the optional cassette units before you can use them with the PS3 printer software.
27

1. Do one of the following: · Windows 11: Click , search for Settings and select it. Select Bluetooth & devices > Printers & scanners. Select your product name, then select Printer properties. · Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners . Select your product name and select Manage > Printer properties. · Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. Right-click your product name and select Printer properties. · Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click your product name and select Printer Properties. · Windows Vista: Click and select Control Panel. Click Printer under Hardware and Sound, then right-click your product name, and select Properties.
2. Click the Device Settings tab.
28

You see a window like this:
3. Select the number of optional cassettes installed as the Lower Cassette Unit setting. 4. Click OK. The optional paper cassettes are now enabled. Parent topic: Installing the Optional Paper Cassette Units Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - Mac You need to enable the optional paper cassette units before you can use them with the printer software. Note: If you are using the PostScript (PS3) printer software, see the link below to enable the optional cassette units.
29

1. In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences. 2. Select Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options
& Supplies. 3. Select Driver or Options.
You see a screen like this:
4. Select the number of cassette units installed as the Lower Cassette setting. 5. Click OK. The optional paper cassettes are now enabled. Parent topic: Installing the Optional Paper Cassette Units Related tasks Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - PostScript Printer Software - Mac Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - PostScript Printer Software - Mac If you installed optional paper cassette units, you need to enable the optional cassette units before you can use them with the PS3 printer software. 1. In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences. 2. Select Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options
& Supplies. 30

3. Select Driver or Options. You see a screen like this:
4. Select the number of optional cassettes installed as the Lower Cassette Unit setting. 5. Click OK. The optional paper cassettes are now enabled. Parent topic: Installing the Optional Paper Cassette Units
Product Parts Locations
See these sections to identify the parts on your product. Product Parts - Front Product Parts - Inside Product Parts - Back Parent topic: Product Basics
31

Product Parts - Front
Certain parts are labeled with a letter and number code. If you encounter any paper jams or errors, you can use these codes to locate and correct the problem.
1 Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) cover (F) 2 ADF edge guides 3 ADF input tray 4 ADF output tray 5 Control panel 6 Paper cassette 1 (C1) 7 Optional paper cassette 2 (C2)
32

8 Optional paper cassette 3 (C3) 9 Optional paper cassette 4 (C4) 10 External interface USB port
1 Paper tray cover 2 Edge guides 3 Paper support 4 Paper tray (B) 5 Output tray
33

6 Edge guides 7 Paper cassette Parent topic: Product Parts Locations
Product Parts - Inside
Certain parts are labeled with a letter and number code. If you encounter any paper jams or errors, use these codes to locate and correct the problem.
1 Document cover 34

2 Scanner glass
1 Scanner unit (J) 2 Print head 3 Ink tray 4 Ink cover (A)
35

5 Cover lock Parent topic: Product Parts Locations
Product Parts - Back
Certain parts are labeled with a letter and number code. If you encounter any paper jams or errors, use these codes to locate and correct the problem.
1 LAN port 2 USB port 3 Service USB port (do not remove sticker) 4 LINE port 5 EXT. port 6 AC inlet 7 Rear cover (D)
36

8 Rear cover (E) 9 Maintenance box cover (H) Parent topic: Product Parts Locations
Using the Control Panel
See these sections to learn about the control panel and select control panel settings. Control Panel Buttons and Lights Selecting the Date and Time Selecting Your Country or Region Entering Characters on the LCD Screen Using Presets Changing LCD Screen Language Adjusting Control Panel Sounds Adjusting the Screen Brightness Turning Off the Operation Time Out Setting Parent topic: Product Basics
Control Panel Buttons and Lights
37

1 The power button and light

2 The LCD screen

3 The log out button

4 The Interrupt button

5 The Reset button

6 The Contacts button

7 The C clear button

8 The numeric keypad

9 The Job/Status button, the Error light, and the Data light

10 The Paper Setting button

11 The stop button

12 The help button

13 back button

14 The home button

Received Fax light

Status Icon Information Job/Status Screen Parent topic: Using the Control Panel Status Icon Information Your product displays status icons on the LCD screen for certain product status conditions. Press the
icon to view or change the current network settings.

Icons

Description
Displays additional information or instructions, such as loading paper or placing a document.
Indicates whether a firmware update is available, Press the icon to update the firmware.
Displays the Printer Status screen

Icons

Description Displays the sound setting screen. You can set the Mute and Quiet Mode settings, When Quiet Mode is enabled, noise is reduced during printing, but the print speed may be reduced. Press this icon to change the settings. Displays the Fax Data Information screen.
Press this icon to enable sleep mode and turn off the LCD screen.
The indicated setting has changed.
There is a problem with the indicated setting. Press the icon to resolve the problem.
No Ethernet connection.
An Ethernet connection is established.
No Wi-Fi connection.
A Wi-Fi network error has occurred or the product is searching for a connection.
A Wi-Fi connection is established. The number of bars indicates the connection's signal strength. No Wi-Fi Direct connection.
A Wi-Fi Direct connection is established.
Access to the product's functions are restricted to authorized users. Press the icon to log in to the printer using a user name and password. Contact your administrator if you do not know the login information. Access to the product's functions are restricted to authorized users and a user is currently logged in. Press the icon to log out of the current user account.

Parent topic: Control Panel Buttons and Lights

Job/Status Screen You can press the Job/Status button to view the status of your product or print jobs.
1 Select to view active jobs or the job history 2 Select a job filter 3 Displays a list of ongoing jobs or the job history 4 Displays any errors; select the error for details 5 Displays approximate ink level 6 Displays approximate maintenance box level 7 Displays the estimated power consumption* *The displayed power amount is a guideline value for general use and may vary depending on how you use this product. It is calculated using the following formula.<The amount of power required to print on one sheet of paper with this product> × <The number of sheets printed in the past 7 days> * TEC is an abbreviation of Typical Electricity Consumption and is the power consumption (kWh) for a standard week (5 days of repeated operation and sleep/off and two days of sleep/off). This value is used as a reference value to comply with the "International Energy Star Program". Parent topic: Control Panel Buttons and Lights
Selecting the Date and Time
Before using your product, select the current date, time, and daylight saving phase in your area, and choose your preferred date and time format.
40

Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting, contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Date/Time Settings. 3. Select Daylight Saving Time. 4. Select the setting that applies to your area:
· Winter: it is winter or your region does not use Daylight Saving Time (DST) · Summer: it is spring or summer and your region uses Daylight Saving Time (DST)
Note: If your region uses Daylight Saving Time (DST), you must change this setting to match the season. When you change from Winter to Summer, your product automatically sets its clock ahead one hour. When you change from Summer to Winter, it sets its clock back one hour.
5. Select Date/Time. 6. Select the date format you want to use. 7. Use the numeric keypad to enter the current date and select OK. 8. Select the time format you want to use. 9. Use the numeric keypad to enter the current time and select OK. Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Selecting Your Country or Region
Before using your product, select the country or region in which you are using your product.
Note: If you change the country or region, your fax settings return to their defaults and you must select them again. This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting, contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Country/Region. 3. Scroll up or down, if necessary, and select your country or region.
You see a confirmation screen. 4. If the setting is correct, select Yes. (If not, select No and retry.)
41

Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Entering Characters on the LCD Screen
Follow these guidelines to enter characters for passwords and other settings.

· To move the cursor, select the left or right arrows.

· To change the case of letters, select .

· To delete the previous character, select .

· To enter numbers or symbols, select

· To enter a space, select Space.

Parent topic: Using the Control Panel

Using Presets
You can save frequently used copy, fax, and scan settings as presets. This lets you easily reuse them whenever necessary.

Note: Presets can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change presets, contact your administrator for assistance.

1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Presets. 3. Select Add New. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
Note: You can save up to 50 presets.
4. Select the function for which you want to set up a preset. 5. Select the settings you want to save and select Register. 6. Select Name. 7. Use the displayed keyboard to enter a name for the preset and select OK. 8. Select OK to return to the Presets screen. When you copy, fax, or scan, you can use the preset by selecting Presets and selecting your preset name from the list. Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Changing LCD Screen Language
You can change the language used on the LCD screen.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting, contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Language. 3. Select a language. Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Adjusting Control Panel Sounds
You can adjust the sound level heard when you press buttons on the control panel.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting, contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
43

2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Sounds. 3. Select Mute to turn off all control panel sounds, then go to step 7. 4. Select Normal Mode or Quiet Mode to adjust control panel sounds.

Note: You can also select the 5. Select Button Press.

icon on the home screen to adjust sounds.

6. Select to decrease or to increase the sound and select OK when you are finished. 7. Select the back arrow to exit.
Note: You can also adjust the Sound Type and the sound level for various product functions.
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Adjusting the Screen Brightness
You can adjust the brightness of the LCD screen. 1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > LCD Brightness. 3. Select the or + icons to decrease or increase the brightness. 4. Select OK to exit. Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Turning Off the Operation Time Out Setting
The Operation Time Out setting causes the LCD screen to return to the Home screen after a few minutes of inactivity. This feature is enabled by default, but you can turn it off.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting, contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings. 3. Scroll down and set Operation Time Out to Off.

Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Checking for Software Updates
It's a good idea to check Epson's support website occasionally for free updates to your product software. Visit epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America) and select your product.
Note: Your printer is designed to work only with genuine Epson-brand ink packs. Other brands of ink packs and ink supplies are not compatible and, even if described as compatible, may not function properly or at all. Epson periodically provides firmware updates to address issues of security, performance, minor bug fixes and ensure the printer functions as designed. These updates may affect the functionality of third-party ink. Non-Epson branded or altered Epson ink packs that functioned prior to a firmware update may not continue to function.
· Windows: Your printer software automatically checks for updates. You can also manually update the software by selecting Software Update here:
· Accessing the Windows Desktop and right-clicking the icon for your product in the right side of the Windows taskbar, or clicking the up arrow and right-clicking .
· On the Maintenance tab in the printer settings window You can also update the software by selecting EPSON Software Updater in the EPSON or Epson Software program group, accessible by the Start button, or on the Start or Apps screens, depending on your version of Windows. · OS X: You can manually update the software by opening the Applications > Epson Software folder and selecting EPSON Software Updater. · macOS 10.12.x to 13.x: You can manually update the software by opening the App Store, selecting Updates, searching for a software update option for Epson Software, and selecting Update. Parent topic: Product Basics
Using Power Saving Settings
Your product enters sleep mode automatically and turns off the LCD screen if it is not used for a period of time. You can make the time period shorter and select other options to save energy and resources. Changing the Sleep Timer Settings Changing the Power Off Timer Settings Parent topic: Product Basics
45

Changing the Sleep Timer Settings
You can adjust the time period before your product enters sleep mode and turns off the LCD screen.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting, contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Sleep Timer.
Note: Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
3. Do one of the following: · Select the or + icon to decrease or increase the number of minutes. · Select the number of minutes on the LCD screen, select the number of minutes from the onscreen keypad, and select OK.
4. Select OK. 5. Select Wake from Sleep. 6. Select Touch LCD Screen to Wake. 7. Do one of the following:
· Select On to wake the printer from sleep mode by tapping the LCD touchscreen or by pressing a button on the control panel.
· Select Off to wake the printer from sleep mode by only pressing a button on the control panel. This prevents unintentional operations due to objects bumping the LCD touchscreen.
· Select Scheduled to set a time range for the feature to be enabled. Parent topic: Using Power Saving Settings
Changing the Power Off Timer Settings
You can have the product turn off automatically if it is not used for a specified period of time.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting, contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
46

2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Power Off Timer. 3. Select a time period between 30minutes and 12h (12 hours). Parent topic: Using Power Saving Settings
Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More
Use your smartphone, tablet, or computer to print and scan documents, photos, emails, and web pages from your home, office, or even across the globe.
Note: If you are using your Epson product with the Windows 10 S operating system, you cannot use the software described in this section. You also cannot download and install any Epson product software from the Epson website for use with Windows 10 S; you must obtain software only from the Windows Store.
Print from anywhere with these Epson Connect solutions: · Epson Email Print · Epson Remote Print Scan and send a file as an email or upload it to an online service directly from your Epson product with Epson Scan to Cloud. Setting Up Epson Connect Services Using Epson Email Print Using Epson Remote Print Using Epson Scan to Cloud Parent topic: Product Basics
Setting Up Epson Connect Services
If you did not activate your product's email address for use with Epson Connect when you set up your product, you can activate it using the product control panel. 1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select General Settings.
47

You see a screen like this:
4. Select Web Service Settings. 5. Select Epson Connect Services.
You see a screen like this:
6. Select Register. 7. Follow the instructions on the screen to activate your product's email address. Parent topic: Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More
48

Using Epson Email Print
With Epson Email Print, you can print from any device that can send email, such as your smartphone, tablet, or laptop. Just activate your product's unique email address. When you want to print, attach a PDF, Microsoft Office document, or photo to an email and send it to your product. Both the email and the attachments will print automatically. 1. Connect your product to your network. See the link below. 2. If you did not already set up Email Print when you installed your product software, see the link below
to use your product control panel to activate your unique email address. Or visit epson.com/connect (U.S.), epson.ca/connect (Canada), or latin.epson.com/connect (Latin America) to learn more about Email Print, create your Epson Connect account, and register your product to the Epson Connect service. 3. Now you are ready to send and print emails to your product's Email Print address.
Note: Go to epsonconnect.com and log into your Epson Connect account to personalize your product's email, adjust print settings, and set up other Epson Connect services.
Parent topic: Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More Related tasks Setting Up Epson Connect Services Related topics Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Using Epson Remote Print
With Epson Remote Print software, you can print from your laptop or desktop computer to an Epson Email-enabled product anywhere in the world. 1. Connect your Epson product to your wireless network. See the link below. 2. If you did not already set up an Epson Connect account when you installed your product software,
visit epsonconnect.com to create your account and register your product to the Epson Connect service.
Note: Make a note of your product's email address.
3. Visit epsonconnect.com to learn more about Remote Print and how to download the Remote Print Driver software.
4. Download and install the Remote Print software.
49

5. Enter the email address and optional access key of your Epson product during Remote Print setup. 6. Now you are ready to print remotely. Select the print command in your laptop or desktop computer
application and choose the Remote Print option for your Epson product. Parent topic: Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More Related tasks Setting Up Epson Connect Services Related topics Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Using Epson Scan to Cloud
The Epson Scan to Cloud service allows you to scan and send a file as an email or upload it to an online service directly from your Epson product. Register an email address or online services such as Box, DropBox, Evernote, or Google Drive with your Epson Connect account. 1. Connect your Epson product to your network. See the link below. 2. If you did not already set up an Epson Connect account when you installed your product software,
visit epsonconnect.com to create your account and register your product to the Epson Connect service.
Note: Make a note of your product's email address and password.
3. Visit epsonconnect.com to sign into your account with the email address and password you selected.
4. Select your product, select Scan to Cloud, and select Destination List. 5. Click Add, then follow the instructions on the screen to create your destination list. 6. Now you are ready to use Scan to Cloud. Select the setting for scanning to Scan to Cloud on your
Epson product control panel. Parent topic: Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More Related tasks Setting Up Epson Connect Services Related topics Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
50

Using the Epson Smart Panel Mobile App
Use this free Apple and Android app to set up and control your Epson product. Epson Smart Panel also lets you check product status.
Note: App features may vary depending on your Epson product.
1. Visit epson.com/connect (U.S.), epson.ca/connect (Canada), or latin.epson.com/connect (Latin America) to learn more about Epson Smart Panel and check the compatibility of your mobile device.
2. Download Epson Smart Panel from the Apple App Store or Google Play. 3. Do one of the following:
· If your Epson product is already connected to a wireless network, connect your mobile device to the same network. Then open Epson Smart Panel and select your Epson product, if necessary.
· If your Epson product is not connected to a wireless network, connect your mobile device to the network you want to use, then open Epson Smart Panel and follow the instructions to set up your Epson product.
Now you are ready to control your Epson product with your mobile device. Parent topic: Product Basics Related topics Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Using AirPrint
AirPrint enables instant wireless printing from iPhone, iPad, iPod touch, and Mac without the need to install drivers or download software.
Note: If you disabled paper configuration messages on your product control panel, you cannot use AirPrint. See the link below to enable the messages, if necessary.
1. Load paper in your product. 2. Set up your product for wireless printing. See the link below.
51

3. Connect your Apple device to the same wireless network that your product is using. 4. Print from your device to your product.
Note: For details, see the AirPrint page on the Apple website.
Parent topic: Product Basics Related references Paper Source Settings Options Related topics Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Setting Up Printing on a Chromebook
Your Epson printer supports native printing on Chromebook, allowing you to print from a Chromebook without drivers or cables. For directions on setting up your printer, visit Setting Up Your Epson Printer on Your Chromebook (U.S.) or Setting Up Your Epson Printer on Your Chromebook (Canada). For Latin America, visit Setting Up Your Epson Printer on Your Chromebook. Parent topic: Product Basics Printing from a Computer Related topics Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Android Printing Using the Epson Print Enabler
You can wirelessly print your documents, emails, photos, and web pages right from your Android phone or tablet (Android v4.4 or later). With a few taps, your Android device will discover your nearby Epson product and print.
Note: Operations may differ depending on the device.
1. Connect your Epson product to your wireless network. See the link below. 2. On your Android device, download the Epson Print Enabler plug-in from Google Play. 3. Go to Settings on your Android device, select Printing, and enable the Epson plug-in, if necessary. 4. Connect your Android device to the same wireless network as your product.
52

5. Now you are ready to print. From an Android application such as Chrome or Gmail, tap the menu icon and print whatever is on the screen.
Note: If you do not see your product, tap All Printers and select your product.
Parent topic: Product Basics Related topics Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Using the Mopria Print Service
You can use the Mopria Print Service to print from your Android phone or tablet (Android v4.4 or later) to your Epson product or any Mopria-certified product from other manufacturers. You can download the Mopria Print Service from Google Play.
Note: For details on the Mopria Print Service, click here (U.S.) or click here (Canada). Some Amazon Fire tablets also use the Mopria Print Service.
1. Connect your Epson product to your wireless network. See the link below. 2. On your Android device, download the Mopria Print Service app from Google Play.
Note: On some Samsung Galaxy devices, Mopria may come preinstalled.
3. Go to Settings on your Android device, select Printing, and enable the Mopria Print Service, if necessary.
4. Connect your Android device to the same wireless network as your product. 5. Now you are ready to print. From an Android application such as Chrome or Gmail, tap the menu
icon and select Print. Then select All printers, select your Epson product, adjust your print settings, and print. Parent topic: Product Basics Related topics Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
53

Voice-activated Printing
Take advantage of voice-activated, hands-free printing from your Epson product with Alexa and Siri. Depending on which voice assistant you use, you can ask your product to print photos, calendars, recipes, photo props, and more. Click here for more information. 1. Connect your product to your network. See the link below. 2. Set up your product's email address for use with Epson Connect. See the link below to activate it
from the product control panel. 3. Click here for instructions on how to set up your product and voice assistant to use the voice-
activated printing feature. Now you are ready to print with your voice and your Epson product. Parent topic: Product Basics Related tasks Setting Up Epson Connect Services Related topics Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
54

Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
See these sections to use your product on a Wi-Fi or wired network. Network Security Recommendations Wi-Fi Infrastructure Mode Setup Wi-Fi Direct Mode Setup Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) Printing a Network Status Sheet Printing a Network Connection Report Changing or Updating Network Connections
Network Security Recommendations
To help deter unauthorized access to your product over a network, you should protect your network environment using appropriate security measures. Security measures such as these can help deter threats such as loss of user data, use of telephone and fax lines, and other intrusions: · Enable security on your wireless LAN
Enable the appropriate security on the wireless LAN you plan to use with your product. Network security such as a network password can deter interception of traffic over the wireless LAN. Your router may already have a default password enabled by your Internet service provider (ISP). See your ISP and router documentation for instructions on how to change the default password and better secure your network. · Connect your product only to a network protected by a firewall Connecting your product directly to the Internet may leave it vulnerable to security threats. Instead, connect it to a router or other network connection protected by a firewall. Your router may already have a firewall set up by your Internet service provider; check with your ISP for confirmation. For best results, set up and use a private IP address for your network connection. · Change the default administrator password on your product If your product has the option to set an administrator password, change the default administrator password to deter access by unauthorized users to personal data stored on your product, such as IDs, passwords, and contact lists. Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
55

Wi-Fi Infrastructure Mode Setup
You can set up your product to communicate with your computer using a wireless router or access point. The wireless router or access point can be connected to your computer over a wireless or wired network.
1 Epson product 2 Wireless router or access point 3 Computer with a wireless interface 4 Computer 5 Internet 6 Ethernet cable (used only for wired connection to the wireless router or access point) Selecting Wireless Network Settings from the Control Panel Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
56

Selecting Wireless Network Settings from the Control Panel
You can select or change wireless network settings using your product control panel.
To install your product on a wireless network, follow the instructions on the Start Here sheet and install the necessary software by downloading it from the Epson website. The installer program guides you through network setup.

Note: Breakdown or repair of this product may cause loss of fax and network data and settings. Epson is not responsible for backing up or recovering data and settings during or after the warranty period. We recommend that you make your own backup or print out your fax and network data and settings.

1. Press the home button, if necessary.

2. Press the

icon.

3. Select Router.

4. Select Start Setup, Change Settings, or Change to Wi-Fi Connection.

5. Select Wi-Fi Setup Wizard.

6. Select the name of your wireless network or select Enter Manually to enter the name manually. Use the displayed keypad to enter your network name.

7. Select the Enter Password field and enter your wireless password using the displayed keypad.

Note: The network name and password are case sensitive. Be sure to correctly enter uppercase and lowercase letters, and numeric or special characters.
· To move the cursor, select the left or right arrows.

· To change the case of letters, select .

· To delete the previous character, select .

· To enter numbers and symbols, select

· To enter a space, select Space.

8. Select OK when you finish entering your password.

9. Confirm the displayed network settings and select Start Setup to save them.

A message appears when setup is complete.

10. Press the home button to exit.

You see the icon on the LCD screen and should be able to connect to your product directly from your computer or device, and then print. If you are printing from a computer, make sure you installed the network software as described on the Start Here sheet.

Note: If you don't see the icon, you may have selected the wrong network name or entered the password incorrectly. Repeat these steps to try again.
Parent topic: Wi-Fi Infrastructure Mode Setup Related references Status Icon Information Related tasks Entering Characters on the LCD Screen

Wi-Fi Direct Mode Setup
You can set up your product to communicate directly with your computer or another device without requiring a wireless router or access point. In Wi-Fi Direct Mode, the product itself acts as a network access point for up to 8 devices.
1 Epson product 2 Computer with a wireless interface 3 Other wireless device Note: The product normally uses W52 (36ch) as the channel when connecting to Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP). Since the channel for wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) connection is selected automatically, the channel used may differ when used at the same time as a Wi-Fi Direct connection. Sending data to the printer may be delayed if the channels are different. If it does not interfere with use, connect to the SSID in the 2.4 GHz band. In the 2.4 GHz frequency band, the channels used will match. When setting the wireless LAN to 5 GHz, we recommend disabling Wi-Fi Direct. Connecting to a Mobile Device Modifying the Wi-Fi Direct Network Name or Password Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Connecting to a Mobile Device
You can connect a mobile device directly to the printer without a wireless router or access point.
59

Note: Make sure the Epson Smart Panel app is installed on your mobile device before connecting to the printer.

1. Press the home button, if necessary.

2. Select the

icon.

3. Select Wi-Fi Direct .

4. Select Start Setup.

5. Do one of the following:

· If you are using Epson Smart Panel, open the Epson Smart Panel app on your device and select the printer displayed on the LCD screen. Select Complete on the LCD screen.

· For iOS devices, select Other Methods, then select iOS. Scan the QR code with the camera app on your device and follow the instructions on your device. On the printer LCD screen, select Complete.

· For other types of devices, select Other Methods, then select Other OS Devices. Use your device to select the Wi-Fi network name (SSID) displayed on the LCD screen, then enter the password shown.

6. Follow the instructions on the LCD screen to complete Wi-Fi Direct setup.

The Wi-Fi Direct icon displayed on the LCD screen indicates if Wi-Fi Direct is enabled on the product.
If you are printing from a computer, make sure you installed the network software as described on the Start Here sheet.
Parent topic: Wi-Fi Direct Mode Setup
Related references Status Icon Information
Related tasks Entering Characters on the LCD Screen

Modifying the Wi-Fi Direct Network Name or Password
You can modify the Wi-Fi Direct name and password to create a more descriptive and secure Wi-Fi Direct network.

Note: If you are printing from a computer, make sure you installed the network software as described on the Start Here sheet.

1. Press the home button, if necessary.

2. Select the

icon.

3. Select Wi-Fi Direct.

4. Select Start Setup.

5. Select the Menu icon.

6. Do one of the following:

· To change the Wi-Fi Direct network name, select Change Network Name, and select Yes. Select Change, then use the on-screen keyboard to enter the new network name.

· To change the Wi-Fi Direct password, select Change Password, then select Yes. Use the onscreen keyboard to enter your new Wi-Fi Direct password.

Note: Your password must be at least 8 and no more than 22 characters long.

Note: If you have already connected devices or computers to your product via Wi-Fi Direct, they will be disconnected when you change the network name or password.

7. When entering your Wi-Fi Direct network name or password, do the following: · To enter letters or symbols, tap them on the LCD screen. · To enter numbers and symbols or change the case of letters, select the 123# icon.

· To delete the previous character, select the back icon. · To enter a space, select Space. 8. Use your computer or wireless device to select the Wi-Fi network name (SSID) displayed on the LCD screen, then enter the password shown.
Note: Make a note of the SSID and password that appear.
9. Press the home button to return to the home screen. Computers and wireless devices can now access the product using the new network name and password.

Parent topic: Wi-Fi Direct Mode Setup

Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
If your network uses a WPS-enabled wireless router or access point, you can quickly connect your product to the network using Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS).

Note: To check if your router is WPS-enabled, look for a button labeled WPS on your router or access point. If there is no hardware button, there may be a virtual WPS button in the device's software. Check your network product documentation for details.

Using WPS to Connect to a Network Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking

Using WPS to Connect to a Network
If you have a WPS-enabled wireless router or access point, you can use Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) to connect your product to the network.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.

2. Press the

icon.

You see a screen like this:

3. Select Router. 4. Select Change Settings, if necessary. 5. Select Push Button Setup (WPS). 6. Follow the instructions on the LCD screen to complete WPS setup. 7. Press the home button to exit.
You see the icon on the LCD screen and should be able to connect to your product directly from your computer or device, and then print. If you are printing from a computer, make sure you installed the network software as described on the Start Here sheet.
Note: If you don't see the icon, repeat these steps to try again.
Parent topic: Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
Printing a Network Status Sheet
You can print a network status sheet to help you determine the causes of any problems you may have using your product on a network. 1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Network Status > Print Status Sheet. 3. Select Print. Examine the settings shown on the network status sheet to diagnose any problems you have. Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Printing a Network Connection Report
You can print a network connection report to view solutions to any problems you may have using your product on a network. 1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Connection Check. 3. Select Print Check Report.
Note: Select OK to return to the Network Settings menu without printing a report.
4. Select Print.
63

Examine the error codes and solutions shown on the network connection report. Network Connection Report Codes and Messages Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Network Connection Report Codes and Messages
Check the error codes and messages on the network connection report to solve problems you may encounter with network connections. The tables here list solutions to problems based on the error codes and messages that may appear at the top of the report.

1 Error code 2 Message

Note: Error codes and messages listed here may not all apply to your product.

Error Codes and Messages

Error code and message
E-1
Confirm that the network cable is connected and network devices such as a hub, router, or access point are turned on.

Solution
Make sure your router, access point, and/or hub are turned on, and the network cable is securely connected to your device and your product.
If you are trying to set up Wi-Fi, remove the network cable and set up Wi-Fi again. Ethernet and Wi-Fi cannot be connected at the same time.

Error code and message

Solution

E-2, E-3, or E-7

Check the following:

No wireless network names (SSID) found. Confirm that the router/access point is turned on and the wireless network (SSID) is set up correctly. Contact your network administrator for assistance.
No wireless network names (SSID) found. Confirm that the wireless network name (SSID) of the PC you wish to connect is set up correctly. Contact your network administrator for assistance.
Entered security key/password does not match the one set for your router/access point. Confirm security key/password. Contact your network administrator for assistance.

· Make sure your router or access point is turned on and is correctly connected to your computer or network device.
· Turn off the router or access point, wait about 10 seconds, and turn it on again.
· Move your product closer to your router or access point, and remove any obstacles between them. Also move your product away from devices such as wireless phones or microwaves.
· Confirm that the SSID shown on the network connection report matches the label on your router or access point. Also make sure your SSID uses only ASCII characters and symbols, or your product cannot display the SSID correctly.
· If you are trying to connect using the WPS push button method, make sure your router or access point supports it.

· If you are using a network password, check the label on your router or access point to confirm that you are using the correct password, or check with your network administrator or router/access point documentation.

· If you are connecting to a smart device that generates an SSID, check the device documentation for the SSID and password you should use.

· If your wireless connection suddenly disconnects, and another smart device was added to the network using a WPS push button method, or your network was set up using a non-WPS push button method, try downloading and installing your product software again.

Error code and message

Solution

E-5
Security mode (e.g. WEP, WPA) does not match the current setting of the printer. Confirm security mode, and contact the network administrator for assistance.

If the security on your router or access point is not one of the following types, change the type of security on your router or access point and reset your product's network settings.
· WEP-64 bit (40 bit)

· WEP-128 bit (104 bit)

· WPA PSK (TKIP/AES); also known as WPA Personal

· WPA2 PSK (TKIP/AES); also known as WPA2 Personal

· WPA (TKIP/AES)

· WPA2 (TKIP/AES)

· WPA3-SAE (AES)

· WPA2/WPA3-Enterprise

Latin America: Also make sure you are connecting to the 2.4GHz band on your network and using the password for that band.

E-6

If your router or access point has MAC address filtering

MAC address of your printer may be filtered. Check whether your router/access point has restrictions such as MAC address filtering. See the documentation of the

enabled, register your product's MAC address so it is not filtered. Locate the MAC address on the network connection report and check your router or access point documentation for instructions.

router/access point or contact your network If your router or access point is using shared

administrator for assistance.

authentication with WEP security, confirm that you are

using the correct authentication key and index.

If your router or access point limits the number of connected devices, raise the connection limit. See your router or access point documentation for instructions.

Error code and message

Solution

E-8
Incorrect IP address is assigned to the printer. Confirm IP address setup of the network device (hub, router, or access point). Contact your network administrator for assistance.

If your product's Obtain IP Address setting is set to Auto, enable DHCP on your router or access point. If it is set to Manual, the IP address may be out of range or on a different network segment; set a valid IP address using your product control panel or the Web Config utility.
You can also try turning off your product and the router or access point, waiting about 10 seconds, and turning them on again.

E-9

Make sure your computer or network device are turned

Confirm the connection and network setup of the PC or other device. Connection using the EpsonNet Setup is available. Contact

on. Also make sure that you can access the Internet and other devices on the same network from the devices you are trying to connect to your product.

your network administrator for assistance. If you still cannot connect to your product, turn off your

router or access point, wait about 10 seconds, and turn it

on again. Download and install your product software

again to reset your network settings.

E-10
Confirm IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway setup. Connection using the EpsonNet Setup is available. Contact your network administrator for assistance.

Make sure other devices on the network are turned on and do the following:
· If your product's Obtain IP Address setting is set to Manual, check the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway addresses on the network connection report to see if they are correct. If not, correct the settings.

· If DHCP is enabled, set your product's Obtain IP Address setting to Auto. If you want to use the DHCPassigned address as a static address, set the Obtain IP Address setting to Manual, enter the product's IP address as listed on the network connection report, and set the subnet mask to 255.255.255.0.

If you still cannot connect to your product, turn off your router or access point, wait about 10 seconds, and turn it on again.

Error code and message

Solution

E-11
Setup is incomplete. Confirm default gateway setup. Connection using the EpsonNet Setup is available. Contact your network administrator for assistance.

If you set your product's TCP/IP Setup setting to Manual, check that the default gateway address listed on the network connection report is correct. Also turn on the device that is set as the default gateway.

E-12

Make sure other devices on the network are turned on and

Confirm the following:

do the following:

-Entered security key/password is correct

· Make sure the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway addresses are correct, if you are entering them

-Index of the security key/password is set to manually.

the first number

· Confirm that the subnet mask and default gateway

-IP address, subnet mask, or default

addresses for other devices are the same.

gateway setup is correct

· Make sure the IP address does not conflict with other

Contact your network administrator for

devices.

assistance.

If you still cannot connect to your product, do the

following:

· Turn off your router or access point, wait about 10 seconds, and turn it on again.

· Download and install your product software again to reset your network settings.

· If your router or access point uses WEP security with several registered passwords, make sure that the first registered password is set on your product.

Error code and message

Solution

E-13

Make sure your router, access point, and/or hub are

Confirm the following:

turned on. Also make sure the TCP/IP setup on your router, access point, and/or hub is not set manually; this

-Entered security key/password is correct may cause your product's network settings to differ from

-Index of the security key/password is set to the manually set up devices.

the first number

If you still cannot connect to your product, do the

-Connection and network setup of the PC following:

or other device is correct

· Turn off your router or access point, wait about 10

Contact your network administrator for

seconds, and turn it on again.

assistance.

· Download and install your product software again to

reset your network settings.

· If your router or access point uses WEP security with several registered passwords, make sure that the first registered password is set on your product.

Network Environment Messages

Message

Solution

The Wi-Fi environment needs to be improved. Turn the wireless router off and then turn it on. If the connection does not improve, see the documentation for the wireless router.

Move your product closer to your router or access point, and remove any obstacles between them. Then turn off your router or access point, wait about 10 seconds, and turn it back on again. If you still cannot connect to your product, check the documentation that came with your router or access point for solutions.

*No more devices can be connected.

You can connect up to 8 computers or other devices to

Disconnect one of the connected devices if your product using a Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) connection.

you want to add another one.

If you want to add another device, disconnect an existing

connected device first.

The same SSID as Wi-Fi Direct exists in the environment. Change the Wi-Fi Direct SSID if you cannot connect a smart device to the printer.

Change the Wi-Fi Direct SSID. You can change the network name after "DIRECT-XX-". The custom name must be 22 characters or less.

Parent topic: Printing a Network Connection Report

Changing or Updating Network Connections
See these sections to change or update how your product connects to a network. Changing a USB Connection to a Wi-Fi Connection Changing a Wi-Fi Connection to a Wired Network Connection Connecting to a New Wi-Fi Router Disabling Wi-Fi Features Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Changing a USB Connection to a Wi-Fi Connection
If you have already connected your product to your computer using a USB connection, you can change to a Wi-Fi connection. 1. Disconnect the USB cable from your product. 2. Uninstall your product software. 3. Download and install your product software from the Epson website using the instructions on the
Start Here sheet. Parent topic: Changing or Updating Network Connections Related concepts Uninstall Your Product Software
Changing a Wi-Fi Connection to a Wired Network Connection
If you have already connected your product to your computer wirelessly, you can change to a wired network connection if necessary. 1. Disable your product's Wi-Fi features. 2. Connect one end of an Ethernet network cable to the product's LAN port. 3. Connect the other end to any available LAN port on your router or access point. 4. Uninstall your product software. 5. Download and install your product software from the Epson website. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software. 7. When you see the Select Your Connection screen, select Wired network connection. 8. If you see a Select Setup Option screen, select Set up printer for the first time.
70

9. Continue following the rest of the on-screen instructions. Parent topic: Changing or Updating Network Connections Related concepts Uninstall Your Product Software Related tasks Disabling Wi-Fi Features
Connecting to a New Wi-Fi Router
If you change the wireless router you have been using on your network, you need to update your product's Wi-Fi connection to the new router.
Note: If you switch to a 5 GHz wireless router, set the router to operate in dual band (2.4 GHz and 5 GHz) mode. If your router uses a single network name (SSID) for both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz band, give each band its own network name (SSID) instead, such as Home Network 2.4 GHz and Home Network 5 GHz. See your router documentation for instructions.
1. Do one of the following: · Windows: Uninstall your product software. · Mac: Go to the next step.
2. Download and install your product software from the Epson website using the instructions on the Start Here sheet.
Parent topic: Changing or Updating Network Connections Related concepts Uninstall Your Product Software
Disabling Wi-Fi Features
You may need to disable your product's Wi-Fi features if you change your network connection type or need to solve a problem with your network connection.
Note: Before disabling Wi-Fi features, make a note of your product's SSID (network name) and password, and any network settings selected for the Epson Connect services you may use.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
71

2. Press the

icon.

You see a screen like this:

3. Select Router > Change Settings > Others > Disable Wi-Fi > Start Setup. A message appears after Wi-Fi is disabled.
Parent topic: Changing or Updating Network Connections

Enabling PCL or PostScript Printing
Before enabling PCL or PostScript printing on your product, make sure you have installed the software as described on the Start Here sheet. To download the PCL or PostScript drivers, visit epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America) and select your product. Installing the PCL Driver - Windows Installing the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows Installing the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac Selecting PDL (Page Description Language) Settings Selecting Printer Language and Interface Settings Printing a PCL or PS3 (PostScript) Status Sheet
Installing the PCL Driver - Windows
The PCL driver can be installed on a Windows computer. Before enabling PCL printing on your product, make sure you have installed the software as described on the Start Here sheet. Note: Make sure your product is turned on and connected to the same network as your computer before installing the printer software. Depending on your model, not all printer languages may be supported. 1. To download the PCL file, visit epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or
latin.epson.com/support (Latin America) and select your product. 2. After downloading the installer file, double-click the downloaded file to install the software.
73

3. Follow the on-screen instructions until you see this screen:
4. If your product is already connected to a network, select Yes: Network connection and click OK. You see a screen like this:
74

5. Make sure your product is selected, and click OK. A message appears when the installation is complete.
6. If your product is not connected to a network, select No: USB connection and click OK. Connect a USB cable to your product's USB port, and connect the other end of the cable to your computer. A message appears when the installation is complete.
Parent topic: Enabling PCL or PostScript Printing
Installing the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
If you did not install the standard Epson printer software or Epson Universal Print Driver, you need to install the PostScript (PS3) printer software before you can adjust the print settings and print to your network printer.
Note: Make sure your product is turned on and connected to the same network as your computer before installing the printer software.
1. To download the Drivers and Utilities Combo Package - PS3 PostScript file, visit epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America) and select your product.
2. After downloading the installer file, double-click the downloaded file to install the software. 3. Click OK. 4. Click Accept. 5. Click Install. 6. Click Next and follow the on-screen instructions. Parent topic: Enabling PCL or PostScript Printing
Installing the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac
If you did not install the standard Epson printer software, you need to install the PostScript (PS3) printer software before you can adjust the print settings and print to your network printer.
Note: Make sure your product is turned on and connected to the same network as your computer before installing the printer software.
75

1. To download the Drivers and Utilities Combo Package - PS3 PostScript file, visit epson.com/support (U.S), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America) and select your product.
2. After downloading the installer file, double-click the downloaded file to install the software. 3. Double-click EPSON. 4. Click Continue on the next two screens. 5. Click Agree. 6. Click Install. 7. If necessary, enter the administrator password. 8. Click Start and follow the on-screen instructions. Parent topic: Enabling PCL or PostScript Printing
Selecting PDL (Page Description Language) Settings
You can select settings for PCL and PostScript printing using the control panel on the product.
Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access these settings, contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > PDL Print Configuration. 3. Select one of the available options, then select the PDL print configuration options you want to use. 4. When you are finished, press the home button to exit. PDL Print Configuration Options Parent topic: Enabling PCL or PostScript Printing
PDL Print Configuration Options
Select the PDL Print Configuration options you want to use for PCL or PostScript printing. Common Settings menu
76

Option Paper Size Paper Type Orientation Quality
Ink Save Mode Print Order
Number of Copies Binding Margin Auto Paper Ejection 2-Sided Printing PCL Menu Option Font Source Font Number

Available settings Various sizes
Various paper types Portrait Landscape Draft Standard Best On/Off Last Page on Top First Page on Top 1 to 999 Left Edge Top Edge On/Off
On/Off
Available settings Resident Download 1 to 111

Description
Sets the default paper size for PCL or PostScript printing Sets the default paper type for PCL or PostScript printing Sets the default orientation for PCL or PostScript printing Sets the quality for PCL or PostScript printing
Saves ink by reducing print density Starts printing from the first page of a file
Starts printing from the last page of a file
Selects the number of copies to print Specifies the binding edge for double-sided documents
Ejects paper automatically when printing is stopped during a print job Selects duplex printing
Description
Uses a font preinstalled on the printer Uses a font you have downloaded Selects the default font number for the default font source

Option Pitch Height Symbol Set Form
CR Function LF Function Paper Source Assign
PS Menu Option Error Sheet

Available settings 0.44 to 99.99 cpi
4.00 to 999.75 pt
Various
5 to 128 lines
CR CR+LF LF CR+LF 4 4K 5S

Description
Selects the default font pitch if the font is scalable and fixed-pitch (availability depends on font source and number settings)
Selects the default font height if the font is scalable and proportional (availability depends on font source and number settings)
Selects the default symbol set. If the selected font is not available for the selected symbol set, the font source and number are replaced with IBM-US (the default setting).
Sets the number of lines for the selected paper size and orientation. Changes the line spacing (VMI) stored in the printer. Later changes in page size or orientation cause changes in the Form value based on the stored VMI.
Selects the line feed command when printing with a driver from a specific operating system
Makes the paper source select command compatible with HP LaserJet 4
Makes the paper source select command compatible with HP LaserJet 4000, 5000, and 8000
Makes the paper source select command compatible with HP LaserJet 5S

Available settings
On/Off

Description
Prints a sheet showing the status when errors occur during PostScript or PDF printing

Option Binary
PDF Page Size

Available settings On/Off
Various sizes

Description
Enable when printing files that contain binary images (available when the product is connected to the network). Allows you to print binary images even if the driver is set to ASCII.
Selects the paper size when printing a PDF file. If Auto is selected, the paper size is determined based on the size of the first page.

Parent topic: Selecting PDL (Page Description Language) Settings
Selecting Printer Language and Interface Settings
You can select printer language and interface settings using the control panel on the product.

Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access these settings, contact your administrator for assistance.

1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings. 3. Select the printing language and interface options for your connection type. 4. When you are finished, press the home button to return to the Home screen. Printing Language and Interface Options Parent topic: Enabling PCL or PostScript Printing
Printing Language and Interface Options
Select the printing language and interface options you want to use. Main Printer Settings menu

Option

Available settings

PC Connection via USB Enable

Disable

Description
Select whether to allow USB communication with the product

Option

Available settings

USB I/F Timeout Setting 0 to 300 seconds

Description
Specify the length of time before ending USB communication from a computer using the PCL or PostScript driver. This setting is necessary to avoid endless USB communication.

Printing Language menu

Option
USB Network

Available settings Auto PCL PS PDF

Description Select the language for the USB or network interface

Parent topic: Selecting Printer Language and Interface Settings
Printing a PCL or PS3 (PostScript) Status Sheet
You can print a PCL or PS3 (PostScript) status sheet to confirm the current font information. 1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Settings > Printer Status/Print > Print Status Sheet. 3. Select PS Font List or PCL Font List . 4. Select Print to print the status sheet. Parent topic: Enabling PCL or PostScript Printing

Loading Paper
Before you print, load paper for the type of printing you will do. Note: Load only plain paper when printing with the PCL or PostScript (PS3) printer software. Loading Paper in the Paper Cassettes and Rear Paper Tray Paper Loading Capacity Double-sided Printing Capacity Compatible Epson Papers Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source - Control Panel Selecting Default Paper Settings - Administrator
Loading Paper in the Paper Cassettes and Rear Paper Tray
You can load paper up to Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm]) in the paper cassettes and the rear paper tray. 1. To view animated instructions on how to load paper in the rear paper tray or paper cassettes, select
the help icon and select How To > Load Paper. Select a paper source and paper type. 2. If you are loading pre-punched paper, glossy paper, envelopes, or long paper in the rear paper tray,
do one of the following: · Load one sheet of pre-punched paper, short edge first, as shown. Adjust the print position to avoid
printing over the holes. Automatic 2-sided printing is not available for pre-punched paper.
81

· Load sheets of paper with their glossy or printable side visible. · Load up to 10 envelopes, short edge first with the flap facing down and to the left · Load long paper by allowing the paper to roll over as shown. Select the user-defined setting as the
paper size setting.
3. Set the paper size and type on the LCD. Note: If you do not want to display the paper settings screen when you load paper, set the Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Paper Source Settings > Paper Setup Auto Display setting to Off.
Always follow these paper loading guidelines: · Load only the recommended number of sheets. · Load paper short edge first, no matter which way your document faces. · Load letterhead or pre-printed paper top edge first. · Do not load paper above the arrow mark inside the edge guides. · Check the paper package for any additional loading instructions.
82

Caution: Do not load the following papers; they may cause paper jams, smears on the printout, or damage to the printer. · Papers that are wavy or damp · Papers that have not dried after printing on one side · Papers that are wadded or curled · Papers that are torn, cut, or folded · Papers that are too thick or thin · Pre-printed papers printed by other inkjet printers, thermal transfer printers, page printers, or copiers · Papers that are perforated · Papers that have stickers · Papers held together with tape, staples, or paper clips · Envelopes with adhesive surfaces or windows Parent topic: Loading Paper Related references Paper Source Settings Options Paper Loading Capacity Paper Specifications
83

Paper Loading Capacity

Paper type

Paper cassette loading capacity

Plain paper

250 sheets (cassette 1):

500 sheets (cassettes 2 to 4):

Pre-printed paper Letterhead paper Colored paper Recycled paper

A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm])
A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm])
A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])

B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm])

Half Letter (5.5 × 8.5 inches [140 × 216 mm])

B4 (13.9 × 9.84 inches [353 × 250 mm])

Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches [184 × 267 mm])

Oficio 9 (8.46 × 12.4 inches [215 × 315 mm])

Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])

8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm) 8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm)

Mexico-Oficio (8.5 × 13.4 inches [216 × 340 mm])

Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm])

User-Defined (3.3 × 4.9 inches to 8.5 × 14 inches [85 × 125 mm to 216 × 356 mm])

User-Defined (3.9 × 5.8 inches to 8.5 × 14 inches [100 × 148 mm to 216 × 356 mm])

Epson Bright White Pro Paper 200 sheets (cassette 1) or 400 sheets (cassettes 2 to 4):

Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])

Paper type

Paper cassette loading capacity

Epson Bright White Premium Paper
Epson Multipurpose Plus Paper

250 sheets (cassette 1) or 500 sheets (cassettes 2 to 4): Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])

Epson High Quality Ink Jet Paper
Epson Presentation Paper Matte

80 sheets Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm]) A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])

Epson Ultra Premium Photo Paper Glossy
Epson Premium Photo Paper Glossy
Epson Premium Photo Paper Semi-gloss
Epson Photo Paper Glossy

50 (cassette 1): 4 × 6 inches (102 × 152 mm) 5 × 7 inches (127 × 178 mm) 8 × 10 inches (203 × 254 mm) Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])

50 (cassettes 2 to 4):
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
8 × 10 inches (203 × 254 mm)

Epson Premium Presentation Paper Matte

Paper type
Card Stock 1 (25 to 42 lb [91 to 160 g/m2])

Paper cassette loading capacity
90 sheets (cassette 1)
A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm])
A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm])
A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
B6 (5 × 7.2 inches [128 × 182 mm])
B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm])
Half Letter (5.5 × 8.5 inches [140 × 216 mm])
Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches [184 × 267 mm])
Oficio 9 (8.46 × 12.4 inches [215 × 315 mm])
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm)
Mexico-Oficio (8.5 × 13.4 inches [216 × 340 mm])
Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm])
User-Defined (3.3 × 4.9 inches to 8.5 × 14 inches [85 × 125 mm to 216 × 356 mm])

Card Stock 2 (43 to 68 lb [161 -- (cassette 1) to 256 g/m2])

Envelopes

10 (cassette 1)

250 sheets (cassettes 2 to 4):
A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm])
A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm])
A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
B6 (5 × 7.2 inches [128 × 182 mm])
B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm])
Half Letter (5.5 × 8.5 inches [140 × 216 mm])
Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches [184 × 267 mm])
Oficio 9 (8.46 × 12.4 inches [215 × 315 mm])
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm)
Mexico-Oficio (8.5 × 13.4 inches [216 × 340 mm])
Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm])
User-Defined (3.9 × 5.8 inches to 8.5 × 14 inches [100 × 148 mm to 216 × 356 mm])
-- (cassettes 2 to 4)
-- (cassettes 2 to 4)

Paper type Plain paper Pre-printed paper Letterhead paper Colored paper Recycled paper
Epson Bright White Pro Paper Epson Bright White Premium Paper Epson Multipurpose Plus Paper Epson High Quality Ink Jet Paper Epson Presentation Paper Matte Epson Ultra Premium Photo Paper Glossy Epson Premium Photo Paper Glossy Epson Premium Photo Paper Semigloss Epson Photo Paper Glossy Epson Premium Presentation Paper Matte

Rear paper tray loading capacity 80 sheets: A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm]) A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm]) A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm]) B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm]) Half Letter (5.5 × 8.5 inches [140 × 216 mm]) Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches [184 × 267 mm]) Oficio 9 (8.46 × 12.4 inches [215 × 315 mm]) Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm]) 8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm) Mexico-Oficio (8.5 × 13.4 inches [216 × 340 mm]) Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm]) User-Defined (2.5 × 4.9 inches to 8.5 × 236 inches [64 × 125 mm to 216 × 6000 mm]) 50 sheets
70 sheets
20 sheets

Paper type Card Stock 1 (25 to 42 lb [91 to 160 g/m2]) Card Stock 2 (43 to 68 lb [161 to 256 g/m2])
Envelopes

Rear paper tray loading capacity 30 sheets: A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm]) A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm]) A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm]) B6 (5 × 7.2 inches [128 × 182 mm]) B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm]) Half Letter (5.5 × 8.5 inches [140 × 216 mm]) Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches [184 × 267 mm]) Oficio 9 (8.46 × 12.4 inches [215 × 315 mm]) Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm]) 8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm) Mexico-Oficio (8.5 × 13.4 inches [216 × 340 mm]) Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm]) 10

Parent topic: Loading Paper

Double-sided Printing Capacity

Paper type

Auto duplex (paper cassettes)

Plain paper

250 sheets (cassette 1):

500 sheets (cassettes 2 to 4):

Pre-printed paper Letterhead paper Colored paper Recycled paper

A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm])
A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm])

Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches [184 × 267 mm])

Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])

User-Defined (5.8 × 8.2 inches to User-Defined (5.8 × 8.2 inches to

8.5 × 11.7 inches [148 × 210 mm to 8.5 × 11.7 inches [148 × 210 mm to

216 × 297 mm])

Epson Bright White Pro Paper

200 sheets (cassette 1)

400 sheets (cassettes 2 to 4)

Epson Bright White Premium Paper

Epson Multipurpose Plus Paper

Paper type

Auto duplex (paper cassettes)

Card Stock 1 (25 to 42 lb [91 90 sheets (cassette 1):

to 160 g/m2])

A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches

[148 × 210 mm])

250 sheets (cassettes 2 to 4):
A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm])

A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])

B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm])

Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches [184 × 267 mm])

Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])

User-Defined (5.8 × 8.2 inches to User-Defined (5.8 × 8.2 inches to

8.5 × 11.7 inches [148 × 210 mm to 8.5 × 11.7 inches [148 × 210 mm to

216 × 297 mm])

Paper type Plain paper Pre-printed paper Letterhead paper Colored paper Recycled paper

Manual duplex (rear paper tray) 30 sheets: A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm]) A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm]) B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm]) Half Letter (5.5 × 8.5 inches [140 × 216 mm]) Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches [184 × 267 mm]) Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm]) Oficio 9 (8.46 × 12.4 inches [215 × 315 mm]) 8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm) Mexico-Oficio (8.5 × 13.4 inches [216 × 340 mm]) Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm]) User-Defined (5.8 × 8.2 inches to 8.5 × 11.7 inches [148 × 210 mm to 216 × 297 mm])

Paper type Epson Bright White Pro Paper Epson Bright White Premium Paper Epson Multipurpose Plus Paper Card Stock 1 (25 to 42 lb [91 to 160 g/m2]) Card Stock 2 (43 to 68 lb [161 to 256 g/m2])

Manual duplex (rear paper tray) 30 sheets
5 sheets: A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm]) A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm]) A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm]) B6 (5 × 7.2 inches [128 × 182 mm]) B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm]) Half Letter (5.5 × 8.5 inches [140 × 216 mm]) Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches [184 × 267 mm]) Oficio 9 (8.46 × 12.4 inches [215 × 315 mm]) Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm]) 8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm) Mexico-Oficio (8.5 × 13.4 inches [216 × 340 mm]) Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm]) User-Defined (5.8 × 8.2 inches to 8.5 × 11.7 inches [148 × 210 mm to 216 × 297 mm])

Parent topic: Loading Paper
Related tasks Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Windows Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Mac
Compatible Epson Papers
You can purchase genuine Epson ink, maintenance boxes, and paper at epson.com (U.S. sales), epson.ca (Canadian sales), or latin.epson.com (Latin American sales). You can also purchase supplies from an Epson authorized reseller. To find the nearest one, call 800-GO-EPSON (800-463-7766) in the U.S. or 800-807-7766 in Canada.

Note: Paper/media availability varies by country.

Paper Type Epson Bright White Pro Paper Epson Bright White Premium Paper Epson Multipurpose Plus Paper Epson High Quality Ink Jet Paper Epson Presentation Paper Matte Epson Premium Presentation Paper Matte Epson Photo Paper Glossy
Epson Premium Photo Paper Glossy

Size Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm]) Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm]) Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm]) Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm]) Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm]) Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
4 × 6 inches (102 × 152 mm)
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm]) 4 × 6 inches (102 × 152 mm)
16:9 wide (4 × 7.1 inches [102 × 181 mm]) 5 × 7 inches (127 × 178 mm) 8 × 10 inches (203 × 254 mm) Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])

Part number S041586
S450218-4
S450217-4
S041111
S041062
S041257 S042180 S041809 S042038 S041141 S041649 S041271 S041140
S041808 S041727 S042109
S041464 S041465 S042183 S041667

Sheet count 500
500
500
100
100
50 100 50 100 20 50 100 20
40 100 20
20 20 25 50

Paper Type

Size

Epson Ultra Premium Photo Paper 4 × 6 inches (102 × 152 mm) Glossy

5 × 7 inches (127 × 178 mm)
8 × 10 inches (203 × 254 mm)
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])

Epson Premium Photo Paper Semi-gloss

4 × 6 inches (102 × 152 mm)
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])

Part number S042181 S042174 S041945 S041946 S042182 S042175 S041982 S041331

Sheet count 60 100 20 20 25 50 40 20

Parent topic: Loading Paper
Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software

For this paper Plain paper Epson Bright White Pro Paper Epson Bright White Premium Paper Epson Multipurpose Plus Paper Letterhead paper Recycled paper Colored paper Pre-printed paper Epson High Quality Ink Jet Paper Thick paper up to 25 to 42 lb (91 to 160 g/m2) Thick paper up to 43 to 68 lb (161 to 256 g/m2 ) Envelopes Epson Ultra Premium Photo Paper Glossy

Select this paper Type or Media Type setting Plain Paper / Bright White Paper
Letterhead Recycled Color Preprinted High Quality Plain Paper Card Stock 1 Card Stock 2 Envelope Ultra Premium Photo Paper Glossy

For this paper Epson Premium Photo Paper Glossy Epson Photo Paper Glossy Epson Premium Photo Paper Semi-gloss Epson Premium Presentation Paper Matte Epson Presentation Paper Matte

Select this paper Type or Media Type setting Premium Photo Paper Glossy Photo Paper Glossy Premium Photo Paper Semi-Gloss Premium Presentation Paper Matte Presentation Paper Matte

Note: The settings listed here are available only when printing from your computer; they do not apply to your product's control panel settings.
Parent topic: Loading Paper
Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source - Control Panel
You can change the default paper size and paper type for each source using the control panel on the product. 1. Press the Paper Setting button. 2. Select the paper source you want to select settings for. 3. Select Paper Size. 4. Select the paper size you loaded. 5. Select Paper Type. 6. Select the paper type for the paper you loaded. 7. Select another paper source to change or press the home button to exit. Paper Type Settings - Control Panel Parent topic: Loading Paper
Paper Type Settings - Control Panel
Select a Paper Type setting that matches the paper you loaded.

Paper type loaded Plain paper Epson Bright White Pro Paper Epson Bright White Premium Paper Epson Multipurpose Plus Paper Letterhead paper Recycled paper Colored paper Pre-printed paper Epson High Quality Ink Jet Paper Thick paper up to 25 to 42 lb (91 to 160 g/m2) Thick paper up to 43 to 68 lb (161 to 256 g/m2) Envelopes Epson Ultra Premium Photo Paper Glossy Epson Premium Photo Paper Glossy Epson Photo Paper Glossy Epson Premium Photo Paper Semi-gloss Epson Premium Presentation Paper Matte Epson Presentation Paper Matte

Paper Type setting Plain Paper
Letterhead Recycled Color Preprinted High Quality Plain Paper Card Stock 1 Card Stock 2 Envelope Ultra Glossy Prem. Glossy Glossy Prem. Semi-Gloss Prem. Matte Presentation Matte

Parent topic: Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source - Control Panel
Selecting Default Paper Settings - Administrator
As an administrator, you can adjust default paper settings that apply to all print jobs sent to the product.

Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access these settings, contact your administrator for assistance.

Selecting the Default Printer Settings Selecting the Universal Print Settings

Parent topic: Loading Paper
Selecting the Default Printer Settings
You can change default printer settings using the control panel on the product.

Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access these settings, contact your administrator for assistance.

1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings. 3. Select an Auto Error Solver setting:
· Select On to display a warning and print single-sided when a 2-sided printing error occurs, or to print only what the printer could process when a full memory error occurs.
· Select Off to display an error message and stop printing if an error occurs. 4. Select Paper Source Settings. 5. Select the options you want to use. 6. When you are finished, press the home button to exit. Paper Source Settings Options Parent topic: Selecting Default Paper Settings - Administrator Paper Source Settings Options Select the paper source options you want to use for your print jobs.

Paper Source Settings option
Paper Setting
Paper Tray Priority
A4/Letter Auto Switching

Available settings
Various On Off On Off

Description
Select the paper size and type for each paper source Select On to give printing priority to paper loaded in the rear paper tray
Select On to switch the selected paper size to match the loaded paper (Letter or A4) if the wrong size is selected

Paper Source Settings option Auto Select Settings
Error Notice
Paper Setup Auto Display

Available settings
Available paper sources
Paper Size Notice Paper Type Notice On Off

Description
Select On for a paper source to allow the printer to automatically print on paper from that source if it matches your paper settings
Select On for either of these settings to display an error message when the selected paper type or size does not match the loaded paper
Select On to automatically display a menu that lets you select the paper size and type when you load paper in the product

Note: If you turn this setting off, you cannot use AirPrint.

Parent topic: Selecting the Default Printer Settings
Selecting the Universal Print Settings
You can change the default universal print settings using the control panel on the product.

Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access these settings, contact your administrator for assistance.

1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Universal Print Settings. 3. Adjust the settings as necessary. 4. When you are finished, press the home button to exit. Universal Print Settings Options Parent topic: Selecting Default Paper Settings - Administrator Universal Print Settings Options Select the universal print setting options you want to use for your print jobs.

Universal Print Settings option
Top Offset
Left Offset
Top Offset in Back
Left Offset in Back
Check Paper Width

Available settings -- --
On Off

Skip Blank Page On Off

Description
Adjust the top or left margin
Adjust the top or left margin of the back page when printing double-sided.
Select On to check the paper width before printing. This prevents printing beyond the edges of the paper when the paper size settings are incorrect, but may reduce the printing speed. Select On to skip printing of blank pages automatically

Parent topic: Selecting the Universal Print Settings

Placing Originals on the Product
Follow the instructions here to place your original documents or photos on the product.
Caution: Do not place anything on top of your product or use its cover as a writing surface to avoid damaging it.
Placing Originals in the Automatic Document Feeder Placing Originals on the Scanner Glass
Placing Originals in the Automatic Document Feeder
You can place single- or multi-page original documents in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF). You can also use the ADF to scan both sides of a 2-sided document. Make sure the originals meet the Automatic Document Feeder specifications before loading them.
Caution: Do not load the following types of originals in the ADF, or they may be damaged or may damage the scanner. Use the scanner glass for these types: · Ripped, curled, folded, deteriorated, or wrinkled originals · Originals with holes · Originals containing staples or paper clips · Originals with carbon paper backing · Originals with labels, stickers, or sticky notes · Originals that are bound · Originals that are cut irregularly or not cut at a right angle · Photos or valuable artwork · Thermal paper · Transparencies · Fabric or other non-paper originals · Originals with uneven surfaces, such as embossed documents · Originals with wet ink
99

Note: When originals are placed in the ADF and on the scanner glass, priority is given to the originals in the ADF.
Note: Do not load originals above the line under the triangle symbol on the ADF edge guide. Do not load originals while scanning.
1. Follow the on-screen instructions. Parent topic: Placing Originals on the Product Related references Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Specifications Related topics Copying Scanning Faxing
Placing Originals on the Scanner Glass
You can place originals up to this size on the scanner glass: Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm]) or A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm]).
Note: When originals are placed in the ADF and on the scanner glass, priority is given to the originals in the ADF.
1. Press the help button and select How To > Place Originals > Scanner Glass. 2. Follow the onscreen instructions.
Caution: Be careful not to trap your hands or fingers when opening or closing the document cover. Do not push down on the document cover or scanner glass or you may damage the product.
Note: If there is any dust or dirt on the scanner glass, the scanning range may expand to include it, so the image of the original may be displaced or reduced. Use a soft, dry, clean cloth to remove any dust and dirt on the scanner glass before scanning. When placing bulky originals such as books, prevent exterior light from shining directly onto the scanner glass.
Note: The edges of your original may be cropped by 0.06 inch (1.5 mm) from the edge of the scanner glass. Manually position your original away from the edges to prevent cropping.
100

Remove your originals after scanning. If you leave the originals on the scanner glass for a long time, they may stick to the glass surface. Parent topic: Placing Originals on the Product Related topics Copying Scanning Faxing
101

Copying
See the information here to copy documents or photos using your product.
Note: Copies may not be exactly the same size as your originals.
Copying Documents or Photos Copying Options
Copying Documents or Photos
You can copy documents or photos onto various sizes and types of paper, including Epson special papers. 1. Place your original document or photo on the scanner glass, or place multi-page documents in the
ADF. 2. Load the paper you want to print on. 3. Press the home button, if necessary. 4. Select Copy. 5. To print more than one copy, press a number key on the product's control panel, or select Copies
and use the displayed keypad to enter the number of copies. 6. Change any of the displayed settings as necessary. 7. Select Advanced to view and change additional copy settings, if necessary. 8. Select Preview to preview your copy on the LCD screen. 9. Select Presets to save your copy settings.
Note: Presets can be locked by an administrator. If you can't access or change this setting, contact your administrator for assistance.
10. When you are ready to copy, press the Copy icon.
Note: To cancel printing, press the cancel button or select Cancel.
Parent topic: Copying
102

Related references Copying Options
Related tasks Placing Originals in the Automatic Document Feeder Placing Originals on the Scanner Glass Loading Paper in the Paper Cassettes and Rear Paper Tray Using Presets

Copying Options
Select the copying options you want to use for your copies.

Note: Not all options or settings may be available, depending on other copying settings.

Basic Settings

Copying option Density Paper Setting
Reduce/Enlarge

Available settings Description

Varying levels

Adjusts the lightness or darkness of copies

Various sources

Select the paper source that you want to use. If you select Auto, paper is fed automatically depending on the paper settings you selected for the paper sources.

Auto

Automatically sizes the image to fit the paper size you selected

100%

Copies the original at its full size

Various percentages Automatically converts from one size to another and other conversions

Reduce to Fit Paper Automatically decreases the size of the image by the percentage you select

103

Copying option Original Type
2-Sided

Available settings Text Text & Image Photo Text & Image(Best) Barcode 1>1-Sided 2>2-Sided 1>2-Sided 2>1-Sided

Description Specifies the document type of your originals and adjusts the quality of your copies
Select to make 2-sided copies. When you select 2>2 Sided, 1>2-Sided, or 2>1-Sided, you can scroll down to select the orientation and binding edge for your originals or copies.

Advanced settings

Copying option Multi-Page

Available settings Single Page 2-up 4-up

Original Size

Various sizes

Description
Copies each page of the original onto an individual sheet
Copies multiple page documents onto one sheet. Scroll down and select the document orientation and layout order settings as necessary.
Select the document size of your original. When copying non-standard sized originals, select the closest size.

104

Copying option Finishing

Available settings
Group (Same Pages)

Description
Select to print multiple copies of a multi-page document in unordered groups

Collate (Page Order)

Select to print multiple copies of a multi-page document in ordered sets

Orientation (Original)
Image Quality

Readable Direction Left Direction Various settings

Binding Margin Off

Reduce to Fit Off

Paper

Remove Shadow Off

Remove Punch Off

Holes

Specifies the orientation of your originals
Select advanced quality settings such as Saturation and Sharpness Select On to adjust the margin, binding position, and orientation of the pages when copying a book
Select On to automatically decrease the image by the percentage you select
Select On to erase the shadows that appear in the center of a document when copying a book or that appear around a document when copying thick paper Select On to erase the binding holes on a document

Parent topic: Copying

105

Printing from a Computer
Before printing from your computer, make sure you have set up your product and installed its software as described on the Start Here sheet.
Note: If you have an Internet connection, it is a good idea to check for updates to your product software on Epson's support website. If you see a Software Update screen, select Enable automatic checking and click OK. The update scans your system to see if you have the latest product software. Follow the on-screen instructions. You can also check for updates using Epson Software Updater in the Epson software folder on your computer.
Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows Printing with the Built-in Epson Driver - Windows 10 S Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac Setting Up Printing on a Chromebook Printing from a Smartphone or Tablet Printing with the PCL Printer Software - Windows Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac Cancelling Printing Using a Product Button
Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
You can print with the standard Epson printer software using any Windows printing program, as described in these sections.
Note: If you are using your Epson product with the Windows 10 S operating system, you cannot use the software described in this section. You also cannot download and install any Epson product software from the Epson website for use with Windows 10 S; you must obtain software only from the Windows Store.
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Windows Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows Selecting a Printing Preset - Windows Selecting Extended Settings - Windows
106

Printing Your Document - Windows Locking Printer Settings - Windows Entering a User ID and Password for Printing Selecting Default Print Settings - Windows Changing Automatic Update Options Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Select the basic settings for the document or photo you want to print. 1. Open a photo or document for printing. 2. Select the print command in your application.
Note: You may need to select a print icon on your screen, the Print option in the File menu, or another command. See your application's help utility for details. 3. If necessary, select your product name as the printer you want to use. Note: You may also need to select Properties or Preferences to view your print settings.
107

You see the Main tab of your printer settings window:
4. For the Paper Source setting, select where you loaded the paper you want to print on. 5. Select the size of the paper you loaded as the Document Size setting.
Note: You can also select the User-Defined setting to create a custom paper size. 6. Select the orientation of your document.
Note: If you are printing an envelope, select Landscape. 7. Select the type of paper you loaded as the Paper Type setting.
Note: The setting may not exactly match the name of your paper. Check the paper type settings list for details.
108

8. Select the Quality setting that matches the print quality you want to use. 9. To print on both sides of the paper, select the 2-Sided Printing setting and select the options you
want. 10. To print multiple pages on one sheet of paper, or print one image on multiple sheets of paper, select
one of the settings in the Multi-Page menu and select the printing options you want. 11. To print multiple copies and arrange their print order, select the Copies options. 12. To preview your job before printing, select Print Preview. 13. To save your print job as a project that can be modified and combined with other print jobs, select
Job Arranger Lite. 14. To reduce noise during printing when you select Plain Paper/Bright White Paper, select On in the
Quiet Mode menu.
Note: Enabling Quiet Mode may reduce printing speed.
Paper Source Options - Windows Print Quality Options - Windows Multi-Page Printing Options - Windows Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows Related tasks Entering a User ID and Password for Printing Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Windows Paper Source Options - Windows You can select any of the available options in the Paper Source menu to print on the paper loaded in that source. Auto Select
Automatically selects the paper source based on the selected paper size. Paper Cassette 1
Selects the paper in cassette 1 as the paper source. Paper Cassette 2
Selects the paper in cassette 2 as the paper source. Paper Cassette 3
Selects the paper in cassette 3 as the paper source.
109

Paper Cassette 4 Selects the paper in cassette 4 as the paper source.
Paper Tray Selects the paper in the rear feed as the paper source.
Parent topic: Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows Print Quality Options - Windows
You can select any of the available Quality options to fine-tune the quality of your print. Some settings may be unavailable, depending on the paper type and border setting you have chosen. Draft
For draft printing on plain paper. Standard
For everyday text and image printing. High
For photos and graphics with high print quality. Parent topic: Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows Multi-Page Printing Options - Windows You can select any of the available options in the Multi-Page menu to set up your multi-page print job. 2-Up, 4-Up, 6-Up, 8-Up, 9-Up, and 16-Up
Prints several pages on one sheet of paper. Click the Layout Order button to select page layout and border options. 2×1 Poster, 2×2 Poster, 3×3 Poster, 4×4 Poster Prints one image on multiple sheets of paper to create a larger poster. Click the Settings button to select image layout and guideline options. Parent topic: Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Windows
You can print on both sides of the paper by selecting one of the 2-Sided Printing options on the Main tab.
110

Note: Some options may be pre-selected or unavailable, depending on other settings you have chosen or if you are accessing the product over a network.
1. Select one of the following options for 2-Sided Printing: · Auto (Long-edge binding) to print your double-sided print job by automatically flipping the paper on the long edge. · Auto (Short-edge binding) to print your double-sided print job by automatically flipping the paper on the short edge.
2. Click the Settings button. You see this window:
111

3. Select the double-sided printing options you want to use. 4. Click OK to return to the Main tab. 5. Click the Print Density button.
You see this window:
6. Select the type of document you are printing as the Document Type setting. The software automatically sets the Adjustments options for that document type.
7. If necessary, select the Adjustments options you want to use. 8. Click OK to return to the Main tab. 9. Print a test copy of your double-sided document to test the selected settings. 10. Follow any instructions displayed on the screen during printing. Double-sided Printing Options - Windows Print Density Adjustments - Windows Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows Related references Double-sided Printing Capacity
112

Double-sided Printing Options - Windows You can select any of the available options on the 2-Sided Printing Settings window to set up your double-sided print job. Binding Edge Options Select a setting that orients double-sided print binding in the desired direction. Binding Margin Options Select options that define a wider margin to allow for binding. Start Page Selects whether printing starts on the front or back page. Create Folded Booklet Options Select the Booklet checkbox and a binding option to print double-sided pages as a booklet. Parent topic: Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Windows
Print Density Adjustments - Windows You can select any of the available options on the Print Density Adjustment window to adjust the print quality of your double-sided print job. Print Density Sets the level of ink coverage for double-sided printing. Increase Ink Drying Time Sets the amount of time required for drying ink after printing on one side of the paper before printing the other side in double-sided printing to prevent ink smearing. Parent topic: Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Windows
113

Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows
You can select a variety of additional layout and printing options for your document or photo on the More Options tab.
1. To change the size of your printed document or photo, select the Reduce/Enlarge Document checkbox and select one of these sizing options: · Select the Fit to Page option to size your image to fit the paper you loaded. Select the size of your document or photo as the Document Size setting, and the size of your paper as the Output Paper setting. If you want to center your image on the paper, select the Center option. · Select the Zoom to option to reduce or enlarge your document or photo by a specific percentage. Select the percentage in the % menu.
2. Select one of the following Tone Correction options: · Select Automatic to automatically adjust the brightness and contrast for your image. 114

· Select Custom and click the Advanced button to manually adjust the tone correction settings or turn off color management in your printer software.
· Select Image Options to access additional settings for improving printed images. 3. To add the following features, click the Watermark Features button:
· Anti-Copy Pattern: adds a watermark that only appears when your printout is copied · Watermark: adds a visible watermark to your printout
Note: Click the Add/Delete button to create your own watermark, and click the Settings button to customize the watermark.
· Header/Footer: adds information such as the date and time to the top or bottom of your printout
Note: Click the Settings button to customize the text and location of the header or footer.
4. To add a password to your print job, select the Confidential Job checkbox, then enter a password. Confidential jobs are stored in the product's memory without being printed. To print the job, enter the password for the confidential job on the product's control panel.
Note: Confidential print jobs are cleared from the product's memory after printing.
5. Select any of the Additional Settings options to customize your print. Custom Color Correction Options - Windows Image Options and Additional Settings - Windows Header/Footer Settings - Windows Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows Custom Color Correction Options - Windows You can select any of the available options in the Color Correction window to customize the image colors for your print job. Color Controls
Lets you select a Color Mode setting, individual settings for Brightness, Contrast, Saturation, and Density, and individual color tones. Depending on the selected color mode, you can also adjust the midtone density using the Gamma setting. Fix Photo Improves the color, contrast, and sharpness of flawed photos.
115

Note: Fix Photo uses a sophisticated face recognition technology to optimize photos that include faces. For this to work, both eyes and the nose must be visible in the subject's face. If your photo includes a face with an intentional color cast, such as a statue, you may want to turn off Fix Photo to retain the special color effects.
No Color Adjustment Turns off color management in your printer software so you can manage color using only your application software.
Parent topic: Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows Image Options and Additional Settings - Windows
You can select any of the Image Options and Additional Settings to customize your print. Some options may be pre-selected or unavailable, depending on other settings you have chosen.
Image Options Emphasize Text
Adjusts the weight of printed text to increase readability. Emphasize Thin Lines
Adjusts the weight of printed lines to increase visibility. Edge Smoothing
Smooths jagged edges in low-resolution images such as screen captures or images from the Web. Emphasize Light Text and Lines
Adjusts the weight of light text and printed lines to increase visibility.
Additional Settings Options Rotate 180º
Prints the image rotated 180º from its original orientation. Bidirectional Printing
Prints in both directions (right-to-left and left-to-right), speeding up printing, but may reduce print quality. Mirror Image Flips the printed image left to right. Parent topic: Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows
116

Header/Footer Settings - Windows You can select any of the Header/Footer Settings options to add headers or footers when you print. The items are available to print at the top or bottom of your pages, in either the left, right, or center of the page. Note: These settings are not saved with your document.
You can select to print the following information: · User Name · Computer Name · Date
117

· Date/Time · Document Name · Collate Number · Page Number · Text You can also adjust the text settings for the printed information. Note: The user name, computer name, date, and time come from the Windows Control Panel on your computer. Parent topic: Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows
Selecting a Printing Preset - Windows
For quick access to common groups of print settings, you can select a printing preset on the Main or More Options tab. Note: You can create your own preset by clicking the Add/Remove Presets button. 1. Click the Main or More Options tab.
118

You see the available Printing Presets on the left:
2. Place your cursor over one of the Printing Presets to view its list of settings. 3. Click on a preset to change its settings or delete it, or use any of the available options on the screen
to control your printing presets. 119

4. To choose a preset for printing, select it. 5. Click OK. Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
Selecting Extended Settings - Windows
You can select additional settings that apply to all the print jobs you send to your product. 1. Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the icon for your product in the right side of the
Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click . 2. Select Printer Settings. 3. Click the Maintenance tab.
You see the maintenance options: 4. Click the Extended Settings button.
You see this window:
5. Select any of the extended settings to customize your print. 6. Click OK to close the Extended Settings window. 7. Click OK to close the printer software window.
120

Extended Settings - Windows
Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
Extended Settings - Windows
You can select these settings on the Extended Settings window.
Enable EPSON Status Monitor 3 Enables product monitoring for ink and paper supplies and other issues.
Check Paper Width Before Printing Prevents printing beyond the edges of the paper if the paper size setting is incorrect; may reduce print speed.
Thick Paper and Envelopes Prevents ink from smearing when you print on envelopes or other thick paper.
Separator Page Before each document, prints a separator page containing the title, user, date, and time.
Always Spool RAW Datatype Increases print speed and may solve other printing problems.
Page Rendering Mode Increases print speed when printing is extremely slow or the print head stops during printing.
Print as Bitmap Increases print speed when printing is extremely slow or the print head stops during printing, and other settings do not help.
Skip Blank Page Ensures that your product does not print pages that contain no text or images.
Change Standard Resolution Reduces the resolution of print data to correct printing problems.
Refine screening pattern Prints graphics with a finer screening pattern.
Always Use the Driver's Paper Source Setting Prints using the paper source setting in the printer driver, rather than the setting in your application.
Output 1 page documents facedown in 2-Sided mode Outputs single-sided pages in a 2-sided print job facedown instead of faceup.
Output documents for filing Outputs all landscape, portrait, 1-sided, and 2-sided documents in the same orientation for easier filing.
121

Barcode mode Reduces bleeding when printing barcodes on plain paper, letterhead paper, recycled paper, preprinted paper, envelopes, and thick paper.
Reduce Print Data Size Increases print data compression to improve print speed. Not recommended when printing fine patterns.
Print a document with both single-sided and double-sided pages Prints an entire document that contains both single- and double-sided pages.
Parent topic: Selecting Extended Settings - Windows
Printing Your Document - Windows
Once you have selected your print settings, you are ready to save your settings and print. 1. Click OK to save your settings.
You see your application's Print window, such as this one:
122

2. Click OK or Print to start printing. Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
Locking Printer Settings - Windows
Windows administrators can lock access to some printer settings to prevent unauthorized changes. 1. Do one of the following:
· Windows 11: Click , search for Settings and select it. Select Bluetooth & devices > Printers & scanners. Select your product name and select Printer properties.
· Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners. Select your product name and select Manage > Printer properties.
· Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. Right-click your product and select Printer properties.
· Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click your product and select Printer properties.
· Windows Vista: Click and select Control Panel. Click Printer under Hardware and Sound, then right-click your product and select Properties.
2. Click the Optional Settings tab. Note: You can prevent access to the Optional Settings tab by changing the user or group permissions in the Security tab.
3. Click Driver Settings.
123

You see this window:
4. Select the checkbox for each setting you want to lock. To lock all print settings, select All Document Settings.
5. Under Advanced Settings, select the setting option you want to use for each locked setting. 6. Click OK. Locked Setting Options Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows Locked Setting Options Select the options you want to use for any locked print settings.
124

Setting
Anti-Copy Pattern

Options Various data items
Add/Delete Settings

Watermark

Various text watermarks
Add/Delete

Settings

Header/Footer

Off On Settings

2-sided printing Multi-Page
All Document Settings

Off On Off 2-Up 4-Up 6-Up 8-Up 9-Up 16-Up --

Description
Lets you select the data to use for the pattern or prohibit anticopy patterns
Lets you add or delete a customized anti-copy pattern
Lets you select the arrangement, size, and other settings for the custom anti-copy pattern
Lets you select the text for the watermark or prohibit watermarks
Lets you add or delete a customized text or image-based watermark
Lets you select the size, position, and other watermark settings
Prohibits headers or footers
Allows headers and footers
Lets you select the text and position for printing headers and footers
Allows printing on one side of the paper only
Allows printing on both sides of the paper
Prohibits multi-page settings
Allows printing of 2 pages on one sheet of paper
Allows printing of 4 pages on one sheet of paper
Allows printing of 6 pages on one sheet of paper
Allows printing of 8 pages on one sheet of paper
Allows printing of 9 pages on one sheet of paper
Allows printing of 16 pages on one sheet of paper
Lets you lock all print settings

Parent topic: Locking Printer Settings - Windows

125

Entering a User ID and Password for Printing
If you enabled Access Control on the product, you must enter a user ID and password in the printer driver to be able to print. Note: If you do not know the user ID or password, contact your administrator for assistance. 1. Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the icon for your product in the right side of the
Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click . Select Printer Settings and click the Maintenance tab.
2. Click the Printer and Option Information button. 3. Select the Save Access Control settings checkbox. 4. Click the Settings button. 5. Enter your user name and password.
126

6. Click OK. Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
Selecting Default Print Settings - Windows
When you change your print settings in a program, the changes apply only while you are printing in that program session. If you want to change the print settings you use in all your Windows programs, you can select new default print settings. 1. Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the icon for your product in the right side of the
Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click . 2. Select Printer Settings.
You see the printer settings window:
3. Select the print settings you want to use as defaults in all your Windows programs. 127

4. Click OK. These settings are now the defaults selected for printing. You can still change them as needed for printing in any program session. Changing the Language of the Printer Software Screens Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows Changing the Language of the Printer Software Screens You can change the language used on the Windows printer software screens. 1. Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the icon for your product in the right side of the
Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click . 2. Select Printer Settings.
You see the printer settings window. 3. Click the Maintenance tab.
You see the maintenance options:
128

4. Select the language you want to use as the Language setting. 5. Click OK to close the printer software window. The printer software screens appear in the language you selected the next time you access them. Parent topic: Selecting Default Print Settings - Windows
Changing Automatic Update Options
Your printer software for Windows automatically checks for updates to the product software. You can change how often the software checks for updates or disable this feature. 1. Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the icon for your product in the right side of the
Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click . 2. Select Software Update Settings.
You see this window:
3. Do one of the following: · To change how often the software checks for updates, select a setting in the Check every menu. · To disable the automatic update feature, select the Never option.
4. Click OK to exit. Note: If you choose to disable the automatic update feature, you can check for updates manually.
129

Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
Printing with the Built-in Epson Driver - Windows 10 S
You can print with the built-in Epson printer driver using any printing program on Windows 10 S, as described in these sections. Note: The built-in Epson driver in Windows 10 S does not include all the available print settings for your product. Selecting Print Settings - Windows 10 S Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
Selecting Print Settings - Windows 10 S
Select the settings for your print job in your Windows 10 S application. 1. Select the print command in your application.
Note: You may need to select a print icon on your screen, the Print option in the File menu, or another command. See your application's help utility for details. 2. If necessary, select your product name as the printer you want to use. Note: You may also need to select Properties or Preferences to view your print settings.
130

You see a window like this:
3. Select the type of paper you loaded as the Media setting. Note: The setting may not exactly match the name of your paper. Check the paper type settings list for details.
4. Click the Advanced button.
131

You see a window like this:
5. Select the size of the paper you loaded as the Paper Size setting. 6. To print multiple copies, select or enter the number as the Copy Count setting. 7. To print multiple copies of multi-page documents in sets, select the Collated checkbox. 8. Click OK.
You return to the printing preferences window.
132

9. Select the Layout tab. 10. Select the orientation of your document as the Orientation setting.
133

11. To print double-sided, select one of the Print on Both Sides options, depending on how you want to orient the page layout. The icon next to each option shows the layout.
12. Click OK to save your settings. You see your application's Print window.
13. Click OK or Print to start printing. Parent topic: Printing with the Built-in Epson Driver - Windows 10 S
Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac
You can print with your product using any Mac printing program, as described in these sections. Note: If you have an Internet connection, it is a good idea to check for updates to your product software on Epson's support website or using Epson Software Updater. Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac Selecting Page Setup Settings - Mac
134

Selecting Print Layout Options - Mac Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Mac Selecting Printing Preferences - Mac Printing Your Document - Mac Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Select the basic settings for the document or photo you want to print. 1. Open a photo or document for printing. 2. Select the print command in your application.
Note: You may need to select a print icon on your screen, the Print option in the File menu, or another command. See your application's help utility for details. 3. Select your product as the Printer setting.
4. If necessary, click the arrow next to the Printer setting or the Show Details button to expand the print window.
135

6. Select the page setup options: Paper Size and Orientation. Note: If you do not see these settings in the print window, check for them in your application before printing. They may be accessible by selecting Page Setup from the File menu.
7. Select any application-specific settings that appear on the screen, such as those shown in the image above for the Preview application.
8. Select Print Settings or Printer Features from the pop-up menu. You see these settings:
Note: The available print settings and appearance of the print window may be different than those covered here, depending on the Mac OS version and the application you are using. 9. Select the Paper Source you wish to print from. 10. Select the type of paper you loaded as the Media Type setting. Note: The setting may not exactly match the name of your paper. Check the paper type settings list for details. 11. Change the Job Type setting if you want to save the file to the product's hard drive. 12. Select the Print Quality setting you want to use. 13. Select any of the available print options.
137

14. If you want to save your settings as a new printing preset, select Presets and then select Save current settings as Preset.
Paper Source Options - Mac Print Quality Options - Mac Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac Paper Source Options - Mac You can select any of the available options in the Paper Source menu to print on the paper loaded in that source. Auto Select
Automatically selects the paper source based on the selected paper size. Paper Tray
Selects the paper in the rear feed as the paper source. Cassette 1
Selects the paper in cassette 1 as the paper source. Cassette 2
Selects the paper in cassette 2 as the paper source. Cassette 3
Selects the paper in cassette 3 as the paper source. Cassette 4
Selects the paper in cassette 4 as the paper source. Parent topic: Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac Print Quality Options - Mac You can select any of the available Print Quality options to fine-tune the quality of your print. Some settings may be unavailable, depending on the paper type setting you have chosen. Normal
For everyday text and image printing.
138

Best Quality For the best print quality, but the slowest print speed.
Parent topic: Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Selecting Page Setup Settings - Mac
Depending on your application, you may be able to select the paper size and orientation settings from the print window.
Note: If you do not see these settings in the print window, check for them in your application before printing. They may be accessible by selecting Page Setup from the File menu. 1. Select the size of the paper you loaded as the Paper Size setting. 2. Select the orientation of your document or photo as shown in the print window.
Note: If you are printing an envelope, select the icon. Note: You can reduce or enlarge the size of the printed image by selecting Paper Handling from the pop-up menu and selecting a scaling option. Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac
139

Selecting Print Layout Options - Mac
You can select a variety of layout options for your document or photo by selecting Layout from the popup menu on the print window.
· To print multiple pages on one sheet of paper, select the number of pages in the Pages per Sheet pop-up menu. To arrange the print order of the pages, select a Layout Direction setting.
· To print borders around each page on the sheet, select a line setting from the Border pop-up menu. · To invert or flip the printed image, select the Reverse page orientation or Flip horizontally settings. Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac
Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Mac
You can print on both sides of the paper by selecting Two-sided Printing Settings from the pop-up menu on the print window.
Note: Some options may be pre-selected or unavailable, depending on other settings you have chosen or if you are accessing the product over a network. This screen may be different, depending on the Mac OS version you are using.
140

1. Select one of the Two-sided Printing options. 2. Select the type of document you are printing as the Document Type setting. The software
automatically sets the Adjustments options for that document type.
3. If necessary, customize the Adjustments settings as instructed on the screen. 4. Print a test copy of your double-sided document to test the selected settings. 5. Follow any instructions displayed on the screen during printing. Double-sided Printing Options and Adjustments - Mac Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac Double-sided Printing Options and Adjustments - Mac You can select any of the available options in the Two-sided Printing Settings pop-up menu to set up your double-sided print job.
141

Long-Edge binding Orients double-sided printed pages to be bound on the long edge of the paper.
Short-Edge binding Orients double-sided printed pages to be bound on the short edge of the paper.
Print Density Sets the level of ink coverage for double-sided printing.
Increased Ink Drying Time Sets the amount of time required for drying ink after printing on one side of the paper before printing the other side in double-sided printing.
Parent topic: Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Mac
Selecting Printing Preferences - Mac
You can select printing preferences that apply to all the print jobs you send to your product. 1. In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences or System Settings. 2. Select Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options
& Supplies. 3. Select Driver or Options.
You see a screen like this:
142

4. Select any of the available printing preferences.
5. Click OK.
Printing Preferences - Mac
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac
Printing Preferences - Mac
You can select these settings on the Options or Driver tab.
Thick Paper and Envelopes Prevents ink from smearing when you print on envelopes or other thick paper.
Skip Blank Page Ensures that your product does not print pages that contain no text or images.
Quiet Mode Lessens noise during printing but may decrease print speed.
Bidirectional printing Prints in both directions (right-to-left and left-to-right), speeding up printing, but may reduce print quality.
Output documents for filing Outputs all landscape, portrait, 1-sided, and 2-sided documents in the same orientation for easier filing.
Warning Notifications Lets you choose whether or not to receive warning notifications from the printer software for various operating conditions.
Establish bidirectional communication Allows the product to communicate with the computer. Do not change the default setting unless you experience issues when using a shared printing pool.
Reduce Print Data Size Increases print data compression to improve print speed. Not recommended when printing fine patterns.
Lower Cassette Specifies whether the optional cassette is present.
Parent topic: Selecting Printing Preferences - Mac
Printing Your Document - Mac
Once you have selected your print settings, you are ready to print.
143

Click Print at the bottom of the print window.
Checking Print Status - Mac Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac Checking Print Status - Mac During printing, you can view the progress of your print job, control printing, and check ink status. 1. Click the printer icon when it appears in the Dock.
You see the print status window:
144

2. Select the following options as necessary for your Mac OS version:
· To cancel printing, click the print job and click or Delete.
· To pause a print job, click the print job and click or Hold. To resume a print job, click the paused print job and click or Resume.
· To pause printing for all queued print jobs, click Pause or Pause Printer. · To display other printer information, click Settings or Supply Levels. Parent topic: Printing Your Document - Mac
Setting Up Printing on a Chromebook
Your Epson printer supports native printing on Chromebook, allowing you to print from a Chromebook without drivers or cables. For directions on setting up your printer, visit Setting Up Your Epson Printer on Your Chromebook (U.S.) or Setting Up Your Epson Printer on Your Chromebook (Canada). For Latin America, visit Setting Up Your Epson Printer on Your Chromebook. Parent topic: Product Basics Printing from a Computer Related topics Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Printing from a Smartphone or Tablet
You can print from a smartphone or tablet running iOS or Android using the Epson Smart Panel app.
Note: Your device must be connected to the same wireless network as your Epson product, and Epson Smart Panel must be configured for use with your product.
1. Download the Epson Smart Panel app from your device's app store or from Epson's website. 2. Open the Epson Smart Panel app and select a print menu on the home screen. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to begin printing. Parent topic: Printing from a Computer Related tasks Using the Epson Smart Panel Mobile App
145

Printing with the PCL Printer Software - Windows
You can print with the PCL printer software using any Windows printing program, as described in these sections. Synchronizing Printer Settings - PCL Driver - Windows Selecting Basic Print Settings - PCL Driver - Windows Selecting Default Print Settings - PCL Driver - Windows Locking Printer Settings - PCL Driver - Windows Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
Synchronizing Printer Settings - PCL Driver - Windows
You may need to synchronize the printer driver with the product if the printer driver does not detect the correct information or settings from the product. 1. Do one of the following:
· Windows 11: Click , search for Settings and select it. Select Bluetooth & devices > Printers & scanners. Select the PCL driver, then select Printer properties.
· Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners. Select the PCL driver, and select Manage > Printer properties.
· Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. Right-click on your product, select the PCL option, and select Printer properties.
· Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click on your product, select the PCL option, and select Printer properties.
2. Click the Optional Settings tab.
146

You see a window like this:
3. Make sure Acquire from Printer is selected and click Get. The product's settings and other information appears in the Current Printer Information area.
4. Click OK. Parent topic: Printing with the PCL Printer Software - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - PCL Driver - Windows
Select the basic settings for the document or photo you want to print. Note: The names of settings on the PCL driver screens may vary slightly, depending on the version of the driver you have installed. 1. Open a photo or document for printing.
147

2. Select the print command in your application. Note: You may need to select a print icon on your screen, the Print option in the File menu, or another command. See your application's help utility for details.
3. If necessary, select the PCL option of your product as the printer you want to use. Note: You may also need to select Properties or Preferences to view your print settings. You see the Main tab of your printer settings window:
Note: For more information about a setting, right-click it and select Help. 4. For the Paper Source setting, select where you loaded the paper you want to print on.
148

5. Select the size of the paper you loaded as the Document Size setting.
Note: You can also select the User-Defined setting to create a custom paper size.
6. Select the orientation of your document.
Note: If you are printing an envelope, select Landscape.
7. Select the type of paper you loaded as the Paper Type setting.
Note: The setting may not exactly match the name of your paper. Check the paper type settings list for details.
8. Select any of the available print options. 9. To select a variety of additional layout and printing options for your document or photo, select the
More Options tab and select the printing options you want. 10. To select maintenance and other optional settings, select the Maintenance tab and select the
options you want. Parent topic: Printing with the PCL Printer Software - Windows Related references Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software
Selecting Default Print Settings - PCL Driver - Windows
When you change your print settings in a program, the changes apply only while you are printing in that program session. If you want to change the print settings you use in all your Windows programs, you can select new default print settings. 1. Do one of the following:
· Windows 11: Click , search for Settings and select it. Select Bluetooth & devices > Printers & scanners. Right-click on your product, select the PCL option, and select Printer properties.
· Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners. Right-click on your product, select the PCL option, and select Manage > Printing preferences.
· Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. Right-click on your product, select the PCL option, and select Printing preferences.
149

· Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click on your product, select the PCL option, and select Printing preferences.
You see the printer settings window:
Note: For more information about a setting, right-click it and select Help. 2. Select the print settings you want to use as defaults in all your Windows programs. 3. Click OK. These settings are now the defaults selected for printing. You can still change them as needed for printing in any program session. Parent topic: Printing with the PCL Printer Software - Windows
Locking Printer Settings - PCL Driver - Windows
Administrators can lock some printer settings to prevent unauthorized changes. 150

1. Do one of the following: · Windows 11: Click , search for Settings and select it. Select Bluetooth & devices > Printers & scanners. Right-click on your product, select the PCL option, and select Printer properties. · Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners. Right-click on your product, select the PCL option, and select Manage > Printer properties. · Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. Right-click on your product, select the PCL option, and select Printer properties. · Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click on your product, select the PCL option, and select Printer properties.
2. Click the Optional Settings tab. 3. Click Driver Settings.
You see this window:
151

4. Select the checkbox for the settings you want to lock. To lock all print settings, select All Document Settings.
5. Under Advanced Settings, select the setting option you want to use for each locked setting. 6. Click OK. PCL Driver Locked Setting Options Parent topic: Printing with the PCL Printer Software - Windows PCL Driver Locked Setting Options Select the options you want to use for any locked print settings.

Setting Watermark

Options
Various text watermarks
Add/Delete

Settings

Header/Footer

Off On Settings

2-sided printing Multi-Page

Off On Off 2-Up 4-Up 6-Up 8-Up 9-Up 16-Up

Description Lets you select the text for the watermark or prohibit watermarks Lets you add or delete a customized text or image-based watermark Lets you select the size, position, and other watermark settings Prohibits headers or footers Allows headers and footers Lets you select the text and position for printing headers and footers Allows printing on only one side of the paper Allows printing on both sides of the paper Prohibits multi-page settings Allows printing of 2 pages on one sheet of paper Allows printing of 4 pages on one sheet of paper Allows printing of 6 pages on one sheet of paper Allows printing of 8 pages on one sheet of paper Allows printing of 9 pages on one sheet of paper Allows printing of 16 pages on one sheet of paper

152

Parent topic: Locking Printer Settings - PCL Driver - Windows
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
You can print with the PostScript (PS3) printer software using any Windows printing program, as described in these sections. Selecting Basic Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows Selecting Default Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
Selecting Basic Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows
Select the basic settings for the document or photo you want to print. The PostScript printer software supports plain paper printing on these paper and envelope sizes: · Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm]) · A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm]) · Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm]) · A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm]) · B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm]) · A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm]) · B6 (5 × 7.2 inches [128 × 182 mm]) · Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches [184 × 267 mm]) · 8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm) · No. 10 (4.1 × 9.5 inches [105 × 241 mm]) 1. Open a photo or document for printing. 2. Select the print command in your application.
Note: You may need to select a print icon on your screen, the Print option in the File menu, or another command. See your application's help utility for details.
3. If necessary, select your product name as the printer you want to use, and then click the Preferences button. You see the Paper/Quality tab of your printer settings window:
153

4. Select the Paper Source that matches where you loaded the paper you want to print on. 5. Select Plain as the Media setting. 6. Click the Layout tab.
You see this window:
7. Select the orientation of your document. 8. To print on both sides of the paper, select one of the Print on Both Sides settings. 9. To change the printing order of the pages, select one of the Page Order settings. 10. To print multiple pages on one sheet of paper, adjust the Pages per Sheet setting. 11. To create a folded booklet out of your photo or document, select the Booklet option. Parent topic: Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
154

Selecting Default Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows
When you change your print settings in a program, the changes apply only while you are printing in that program session. If you want to change the print settings you use in all your Windows programs, you can select new default print settings. 1. Do one of the following:
· Windows 11: Click , search for Settings and select it. Select Bluetooth & devices > Printers & scanners. Right-click on your product and select Printer properties.
· Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners. Select your product name and select Manage > Printing preferences.
· Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. Right-click your product name and select Print Preferences.
· Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click your product name and select Printing Preferences.
You see the printer settings window:
2. Select the print settings you want to use as defaults in all your Windows programs. 3. Click OK. These settings are now the defaults selected for printing. You can still change them as needed for printing in any program session. Parent topic: Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac
You can print with the PostScript (PS3) printer software using any Mac printing program, as described in these sections. Selecting Basic Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Mac
155

Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
Selecting Basic Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Mac
Select the basic settings for the document or photo you want to print. The PostScript printer software supports plain paper printing on these paper and envelope sizes: · A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm]) · Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm]) · No. 10 (4.1 × 9.5 inches [105 × 241 mm]) · A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm]) · B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm]) · A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm]) · B6 (5 × 7.2 inches [128 × 182 mm]) · Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches [184 × 267 mm]) · Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm]) · 8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm) 1. Open a photo or document for printing. 2. Select the print command in your application.
Note: You may need to select a print icon on your screen, the Print option in the File menu, or another command. See your application's help utility for details. 3. Select your product as the Printer setting.
4. If necessary, click the arrow next to the Printer setting or the Show Details button to expand the print window.
156

You see the expanded printer settings window for your product:
Note: The print window may look different, depending on the Mac OS version and the application you are using. 5. Select the Two-Sided, Copies, and Pages settings as necessary. Note: If you do not see these settings in the print window, check for them in your application before printing. 6. Select the page setup options: Paper Size and Orientation. Note: If you do not see these settings in the print window, check for them in your application before printing. They may be accessible by selecting Page Setup from the File menu.
157

7. Select any application-specific settings that appear on the screen, such as those shown in the image above for the Preview application.
8. Select Paper Feed from the pop-up menu.
You see these settings:
9. Select All Pages From or First Page From and select the paper source you want to print from.
158

10. Select Printer Features from the pop-up menu.
You see these settings:
11. Select Plain as the MediaType setting. 12. Select one of the following Print Quality options:
· For fast printing with reduced quality, select Fast. · For printing text and graphics with good quality and print speed, select Fine. · For the best printing with reduced speed, select Maximum. 13. Select any of the following from the pop-up menu as necessary: · Select Layout to adjust a variety of layout options for your document or photo. · Select Paper Handling to adjust the size of the image as you print it.
159

· Select Color Matching to fine-tune the colors in your printout. For monochrome printers, this adjusts the tone and brightness of your printout.
Parent topic: Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac
Cancelling Printing Using a Product Button
If you need to cancel printing, press the cancel button. Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
160

Scanning
You can scan your originals and save them as digital files. Starting a Scan Scanning in Epson Scan 2 Scanning with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning
Starting a Scan
After placing your originals on your product for scanning, start scanning using one of these methods. Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel Setting Up and Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server Starting a Scan Using the Epson Scan 2 Icon Starting a Scan from a Scanning Program Starting a Scan from a Smartphone or Tablet Parent topic: Scanning
Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel
You can scan an image to a variety of destinations using your product's control panel. 1. Make sure you installed the product software and connected the product to your computer or
network.
Note: Restart your computer after installing the product software to enable scanning from the control panel.
2. Place your original on the product for scanning.
Note: To scan a double-sided or multi-page document, place your originals in the ADF.
3. Press the home button, if necessary. 4. Select Scan. 5. Select one of the following Scan to options:
· Network Folder/FTP saves your scanned file to a specified folder on a network.
161

· Email lets you send scanned files through a pre-configured email server. · Computer lets you scan to a connected computer using Document Capture Pro (Windows) or
Document Capture (Mac). · Memory Device saves your scanned file on a USB device and lets you select the file format,
quality, and other settings. · Cloud sends your scanned files to a destination that you have registered with Epson Connect. · WSD lets you manage network scanning in Windows 10, Windows 8.x, Windows 7, or Windows
Vista (English only). To use this feature, you must first set up a WSD (Web Services for Devices) port on your Windows 7 or Windows Vista computer (the port is set up automatically on Windows 10 and Windows 8.x). 6. Follow the instructions in the links below to complete your scan. Scanning to Email Scanning to a Connected Computer Scanning to a Memory Device Scanning to the Cloud Setting Up a WSD Port (Windows 7/Windows Vista) Control Panel Scanning Options Parent topic: Starting a Scan
Related tasks Using Presets Using Epson Scan to Cloud
Related topics Placing Originals on the Product
Scanning to Email You can scan an original and email the scanned file using your product's control panel. You need to have a preconfigured email server before you can scan to email. You can enter email addresses directly on the product's control panel or select them from the Recipient tab. Make sure the date and time are set correctly so the time stamps on your emails are accurate. 1. Place your original on the product for scanning.
Note: To scan a double-sided or multi-page document, place all of the pages in the ADF.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
162

3. Select Scan. 4. Select Email. 5. Do one of the following:
· Select an email address from any of the displayed frequent contacts. · Select Keyboard to use the on-screen keyboard to enter the email address for the recipient(s)
and select OK. · Select Contacts and choose an email address from the list. · Select History to choose an email address from your recent scan history. 6. Select Scan Settings. 7. Select File Format to choose the file format for your scan. 8. Scroll down to change the Subject and File Name, if necessary. 9. Select any additional scan settings as necessary. 10. Select Presets to save your scan settings.
Note: Presets can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting, contact your administrator for assistance.
11. Select Send. Your product scans your original and emails the scanned file.
Parent topic: Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel Related tasks Configuring an Email Server Registering Contacts for Email, Network, or FTP Scanning - Control Panel Related topics Placing Originals on the Product Scanning to a Connected Computer You can scan an original and save it to a connected computer using your product's control panel. The computer must be on the same network as the product and must have the Document Capture Pro Server software installed. The product must also be configured for Document Capture Pro Server.
163

You can save the scanned file as a PDF file. You can also set up custom scan settings using Document Capture Pro (Windows) or Document Capture (Mac) and automatically scan using those settings on your product control panel. 1. Place your original on the product for scanning.
Note: To scan a multi-page document, place all of the pages in the ADF.
2. Press the home button, if necessary. 3. Select Scan. 4. Select Computer. 5. Select Select Computer to choose a computer to scan to, and select it when it appears.
Note: The computer you want to scan to must be on the same network as the product or connected to the product with a USB cable.
The Select Job screen appears. 6. Select one of the scan job options.
Note: The default scan job is Scan to PDF. Any additional scan job options must be added in Document Capture Pro (Windows) or Document Capture (Mac).
7. Select Save. Document Capture Pro (Windows) or Document Capture (Mac) scans the original to the connected computer.
Parent topic: Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel Scanning to a Memory Device
You can scan an original and save the scanned image to a external USB device connected to your product. 1. Insert an external USB device into the product's USB port. 2. Place your original on the product for scanning.
Note: To scan a double-sided or multi-page document, place all of the pages in the ADF.
164

3. Press the home button, if necessary. 4. Select Scan. 5. Select Memory Device. 6. Select the settings as necessary. 7. Select Presets to save your scan settings.
Note: Presets can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting, contact your administrator for assistance.
8. Select Save. Your product scans your original and saves the scanned file to the connected memory device.
Parent topic: Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel Related topics Placing Originals on the Product Scanning to the Cloud You can use the control panel to send your scanned files to a destination that you have registered with Epson Connect.
Note: Make sure to set up your product using Epson Connect before using this feature.
1. Place your original on the product for scanning.
Note: To scan a double-sided or multi-page document, place all of the pages in the ADF.
2. Press the home button, if necessary. 3. Select Scan. 4. Select Cloud. 5. Select the + icon and select a cloud destination. 6. Select the settings as necessary.
165

7. Select Presets to save your scan settings.
Note: Presets can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting, contact your administrator for assistance.
8. Select Upload. Your product scans your original and saves the scanned file to the selected destination.
Parent topic: Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel Setting Up a WSD Port (Windows 7/Windows Vista)
You can scan to a networked Windows computer using WSD (Web Services for Devices). You must first set up a WSD port on your Windows 7 or Windows Vista system (the port is set up automatically on Windows 11, Windows 10 and Windows 8.x). Before you set up a WSD port, make sure you installed your product software, and connected your product and computer to the same network. 1. Turn on your product. 2. Print a network status sheet so you can identify the network name and model name for your product
on the network.
3. Click or Start and select Computer. 4. On the left side of the window, select Network. 5. Locate your product on the Network screen, right-click it, and select Install. 6. When you see the User Account Control screen, click Continue.
Note: If you see an Uninstall screen, click Uninstall and repeat these steps as necessary.
7. When you see the message Your device is ready to use in the Windows taskbar, click the message.
8. On the Driver Software Installation screen, make sure your product is listed as Ready to use. Then click Close.
9. Do one of the following:
· Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. · Windows Vista: Click Start and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.
166

10. Make sure that an icon appears for your product's name on the network. When you use WSD, select your product name to scan over the network. Parent topic: Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel Control Panel Scanning Options Select the options you want to use for scanning.
Note: Not all options or settings may be available, depending on the Scan to option selected.

Scan Settings File Format
Resolution 2-Sided Scan Area

Available options Description

JPEG

Select for photos. You can also select the Compression Ratio.

PDF (Single Page) PDF (Multi Page)

Select for documents. You can also select the Compression Ratio and PDF Settings.

PDF/A (Single Page)

PDF/A (Multi Page)

TIFF (Single Page) TIFF (Multi Page)

Select for scanned files that you can print from a device. Multi Page TIFF documents are scanned in black and white.

200dpi

Select for documents

300dpi

Select for photos

600dpi

Select for highest quality printing

1-Sided 2-Sided

Lets you scan 2-sided originals placed in the ADF. If you select 2-Sided, you can also select the Orientation (Original) and the Binding (Original).

Auto Cropping

Select to automatically adjust the scan area

Various sizes

Select the page size for documents

Max Area

Select for most photos

167

Scan Settings Original Type
Orientation (Original) Density Remove Shadow
Remove Punch Holes Subject Attached File Max Size File Name

Available options Text Text & Image Photo Readable Direction Left Direction Varying levels
Off On
Off On -- Various sizes
--

Description Specify the type of original you are scanning
Select the orientation direction for how you placed the originals
Adjust the lightness or darkness of scanned images. Erase the shadows that appear in the center of a document when copying a book or the shadows that appear around a document when copying thick paper Erase the binding holes on a document
Enter a subject for your email Select the maximum file size that can be attached to an email Enter a prefix, the date, and the time to the file name for your scanned file

Parent topic: Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel
Setting Up and Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server
Before you can scan to a network folder on your computer or on an FTP server, you need to create a shared folder and optionally register its location to your product's Contacts list. Select the links below as necessary to create and register the folder, and to scan to it over the network.
Creating a Shared Network Folder Registering Contacts for Network Folder or FTP Scanning - Web Config Registering Contacts for Email, Network, or FTP Scanning - Control Panel Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server
Parent topic: Starting a Scan

168

Creating a Shared Network Folder You can create a shared network folder on your computer or an FTP site and register its location to your product's Contacts list.
Note: If you are creating a shared network folder on a Mac, see your Mac documentation for instructions on creating the folder. The instructions here are for Windows.
First make sure you connected your product and computer to the same network.
Note: If you are running a Home version of the Windows operating system, you cannot create a shared folder on your Windows desktop or in the Documents or Pictures folder unless you have created a Home Group Configuration for sharing. You can, however, create a shared folder in the root of the C: drive on your system.
If you want to scan to a folder on an FTP server, contact the FTP server administrator for the server address and authentication access to a shared folder on the server. 1. If you are scanning to a network folder on your computer, do one of the following to check the format
of your computer name: · Windows 11, Windows 10, or Windows 8.x: Hold down the Windows key on your keyboard and
press the X key. Select System from the list that appears. Check the Computer Name or Device Name listed for your computer on the System window.
· Windows 7: Click , right-click Computer, and select Properties. Check the Computer Name listed for your computer on the System window.
Note: The settings in these steps may vary, depending on your version of Windows. See Windows Help for details on your operating system.
2. If the computer's name uses any characters that are not alphanumeric (letters or numbers), do one of the following to change the computer's name: · Windows 11, Windows 10, or Windows 8.x: Select Rename this PC and follow the on-screen prompts. · Windows 7: Select Change Settings, change the computer's name, and click OK. (See Windows Help for instructions, if necessary.)
Note: You need to be logged into Windows as an administrator to change the computer's name. After changing the name, restart your computer.
169

3. Start File Explorer or Windows Explorer. 4. Create a folder on the Windows desktop with a folder name of 12 characters or less; otherwise, your
product may not be able to access the folder.
Note: You need to be logged into Windows as an administrator to access the desktop folder and the document folder under each User folder.
5. Right-click the folder you created and select Properties. 6. On the General tab, deselect the Read-only checkbox to allow users to access the folder over the
network. 7. Select the Sharing tab and click the Advanced Sharing button.
Note: You need to be logged into Windows as an administrator to select the Advanced Sharing button.
8. On the Advanced Sharing screen, select the Share this folder checkbox. 9. Click the Permissions button and select the following on the Share Permissions tab:
· Select Everyone under Group or user names. · Select the checkbox in the Allow column for the Change setting. 10. Click OK to save the settings, then click OK again to close the Advanced Sharing window. 11. Select the Security tab and check that the Group or user names list at the top includes the current computer user and the administrators who can now access the folder. 12. Select the Sharing tab again and write down the Network Path listed under Network File and Folder Sharing at the top. This is the path you will register to your product's Contacts list so you can select it for network scanning. 13. Click OK or Close. Now you can register the folder path to your product's Contacts list. Parent topic: Setting Up and Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server Registering Contacts for Network Folder or FTP Scanning - Web Config You can register a list of contacts for scanning to a network folder or FTP server using Web Config and your computer's internet browser. Before you begin, print a network status sheet and locate the IP address for your product on the sheet. 1. Start an internet browser on a computer that is using the same network as your product.
170

2. Type your product's IP address into the address bar and press Enter. 3. Click Continue to this website (not recommended). 4. Click the Scan/Copy tab. 5. Click Contacts. 6. Select an empty number you want to use for the contact you are adding and click Edit. 7. Enter the following information for the contact:
· Name: The name to display in your product's contact list. · Index Word: Enter a word to identify this entry when searching for it (up to 30 characters). This
field is optional. · Type: Select Network Folder (SMB) or FTP. · Assign to Frequent Use: If you want to identify the contact as a frequently used address, select
On. This makes it quicker to select the contact when you scan. · Save to: The network path to the shared folder.
Enter the folder path name in one of the following formats depending on the Type setting you selected: · SMB: host_name\folder · FTP: host_name/folder_name · Secure Connection: For FTP locations, select the secure connection type. · User Name and Password: Enter only if you have set up a password on your computer. · Connection Mode: For FTP locations, select Passive Mode if there is a firewall between the product and FTP server. · Port Number: For FTP locations, enter the port number. · Certificate Validation: For FTP locations, choose to enable or disable an imported certificate. 8. Click Apply. After a moment, you see a message telling you that contact registration is complete. 9. Close your web browser. Parent topic: Setting Up and Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server Registering Contacts for Email, Network, or FTP Scanning - Control Panel You can create a list of contacts for scanning to email or to a network folder or FTP.
171

Note: Contacts can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change contacts, contact your administrator for assistance. You can create up to 200 contacts and contact groups combined (including fax contacts).
1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Settings > Contacts Manager > Register/Delete. 3. Select Add Entry. 4. Select Add Contact. 5. Do one of the following:
· To create a contact for scanning to fax, select Fax. · To create a contact for scanning to email, select Email. · To create a location for scanning to a network folder or FTP, select Network Folder/FTP. 6. Select the number you want to use for the contact you are adding. 7. Select the Name field. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the contact name (up to 30 characters) and select OK. 8. Select the Index Word field. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter a word to use when searching for an entry (up to 30 characters) and select OK. (This field is optional.) 9. Do one of the following: · For a fax contact, select the Enter Fax Number field. Use the displayed keyboard to enter the fax
number and select OK. Select any other fax settings as necessary. · For an email contact, select the Email Address (Required) field. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the address and select OK. · For a network folder or FTP location, select the Communication Mode field and select an option. Then select the Location (Required) field, use the on-screen keyboard to enter the location, and select OK. Enter other information if necessary. Enter the folder path name for the location setting in one of the following formats depending on the Communication Mode setting you selected: · SMB: \\host name\folder · FTP: ftp://host name/folder name 10. Select OK.
172

Note: If you need to edit or delete scanning contacts, the procedures are the same as for fax contacts. Parent topic: Setting Up and Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server You can scan an image and save it to a network folder using your product's control panel. You can either enter the folder path directly on the product's control panel or select a folder from the Destination tab. Note: Make sure the date and time are set correctly before using this feature. 1. Place your original on the product for scanning.
Note: To scan a double-sided or multi-page document, place your originals in the ADF. 2. Press the home button, if necessary. 3. Select Scan. 4. Select Network Folder/FTP.
You see a screen like this:
5. Do one of the following: · Choose a saved location on the Destination tab.
173

· Select Keyboard, select the Communication Mode field, and select Network Folder (SMB) or FTP. Then select the Location (Required) field, enter the folder location, and select OK. Enter other information as necessary. Enter the folder path name for the location setting in one of the following formats depending on the Communication Mode setting you selected: · SMB: \\host name\folder · FTP: ftp://host name/folder name · Select an email address from any displayed frequent contacts.
6. Select Scan Settings. 7. Select File Format to choose the file format for your scan. 8. Scroll down to select File Name and change it if necessary. 9. Select any additional scan settings as necessary. 10. Select Presets to save your scan settings.
Note: Presets can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting, contact your administrator for assistance.
11. Select Save. Your product scans your original and saves it in the selected location.
Parent topic: Setting Up and Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server Related tasks Selecting the Date and Time Related topics Placing Originals on the Product
Starting a Scan Using the Epson Scan 2 Icon
You can start the Epson Scan 2 program to select scan settings, scan, and save the scanned image to a file.
Note: If you are using your Epson product with the Windows 10 S operating system, you cannot use the software described in this section. You also cannot download and install any Epson product software
174

from the Epson website for use with Windows 10 S; you must obtain software only from the Windows Store. · Windows 11: Click , then search for Epson Scan 2 and select it. · Windows 10: Click and select EPSON > Epson Scan 2. · Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Epson Scan 2. · Windows (other versions): Click or Start, and select All Programs or Programs. Select EPSON
> Epson Scan 2 > Epson Scan 2. · Mac: Open the Applications folder, open the Epson Software folder, and select Epson Scan 2.
175

You see an Epson Scan 2 window like this:
Parent topic: Starting a Scan Related tasks Starting a Scan from a Scanning Program Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning
176

Related topics Placing Originals on the Product
Starting a Scan from a Scanning Program
You can start Epson Scan 2 from a TWAIN-compliant scanning program to select scan settings, scan, and open the scanned image in the program. Note: If you are using your Epson product with the Windows 10 S operating system, you cannot use the software described in this section. You also cannot download and install any Epson product software from the Epson website for use with Windows 10 S; you must obtain software only from the Windows Store. 1. Open your scanning program and select its scanning option. (See your scanning program help for
instructions.) 2. Select your product.
Note: In certain programs, you may need to select your product as the "source" first. If you see a Select Source option, choose it and select your product. With Windows, do not select a WIA option for your product; not all scan functions will be available.
177

You see an Epson Scan 2 window like this:
Parent topic: Starting a Scan Related tasks Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning Related topics Placing Originals on the Product
178

Starting a Scan from a Smartphone or Tablet
You can use the Epson Smart Panel app to scan from a network scanner to an iOS or Android device over a direct Wi-Fi connection. 1. Download the Epson Smart Panel app from your device's app store or from Epson's website. See
the link below. 2. Place your original on the product for scanning. 3. Open the Epson Smart Panel app and select a scan menu on the home screen. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions to scan and save your original. Parent topic: Starting a Scan Related tasks Using the Epson Smart Panel Mobile App Related topics Placing Originals on the Product
Scanning in Epson Scan 2
Epson Scan 2 gives you access to basic and advanced scanning features. You can scan your document and save the scanned image in various file formats in your operating system's Documents or My Documents folder, or open it in your scanning program. You can preview the scanned image and select or change settings as necessary.
Note: If you are using your Epson product with the Windows 10 S operating system, you cannot use the software described in this section. You also cannot download and install any Epson product software from the Epson website for use with Windows 10 S; you must obtain software only from the Windows Store.
1. Start Epson Scan 2.
179

You see this window:
2. Select the Document Source setting that matches where you placed your original, or select Auto Detect to have Epson Scan 2 automatically detect the source.
3. Select the Scanning Side setting if you are scanning from the ADF. 4. Select the Document Size setting that matches the size of your original. You can select Customize
to enter a custom size, if necessary. 180

5. Select the image type of your original and how you want it scanned as the Image Type setting. 6. Select the Resolution setting you want to use for your scan. 7. Select the Rotate setting to rotate the scanned image. 8. Select the Correct Document Skew setting to correct skewed originals, image contents, or both. 9. Click the Preview button.
Epson Scan 2 previews your original and displays the results in the Epson Scan 2 window.
10. Reinsert your original into the ADF, if necessary. 11. Select any of the additional settings that you want to use on the Main Settings tab. 12. Click the Advanced Settings tab and select any settings that you want to use. 13. Select the format in which you want to save your scanned file as the Image Format setting. If
necessary, select Options and select any desired format options. 14. Enter the file name for your scanned file in the File Name field. If necessary, select Settings to
modify the file name settings. 15. Select the location in which you want to save your scanned file as the Folder setting. If necessary,
select Select to create a new folder. 16. Click Scan.
181

The product scans your original and saves the scanned file in the location you specified. Additional Scanning Settings - Main Settings Tab Additional Scanning Settings - Advanced Settings Tab Saving Scanned Documents as a Searchable PDF Using Epson Scan 2 Image Format Options Scan Resolution Guidelines Parent topic: Scanning
Related topics Placing Originals on the Product
Additional Scanning Settings - Main Settings Tab
You can select these additional scanning settings on the Epson Scan 2 Main Settings tab. Not all adjustment settings may be available, depending on other settings you have chosen.
Stitch Images When scanning double-sided originals, lets you lay out images from both sides of the original onto one scanned page.
Rotate Rotates the original image clockwise to the desired angle before scanning it. Select Auto to allow your product to automatically rotate the image based on the orientation of the text (may take longer to scan).
Correct Document Skew Corrects skewed originals, image contents, or both.
Add or edit pages after scanning Lets you add, remove, or edit the pages in a scan, including rotating pages and changing the page order.
Note: To save multiple pages in a single file, you must select a file format that supports multiple pages such as PDF or Multi-TIFF. If you select another file format, each scanned image or page is saved as a separate file.
Skip Blank Pages If the scanner detects marks from the other side of a blank page and adds the marks to the scanned image, adjust this setting to prevent this.
Parent topic: Scanning in Epson Scan 2
182

Additional Scanning Settings - Advanced Settings Tab
You can select these additional scanning settings on the Epson Scan 2 Advanced Settings tab. Not all adjustment settings may be available, depending on other settings you have chosen.
Remove Background Removes the background of the originals.
Text Enhancement Sharpens the appearance of letters in text documents.
Auto Area Segmentation Makes black and white images clearer and text recognition more accurate by separating the text from the graphics.
Threshold Adjusts the level at which black areas in text and line art are delineated, improving text recognition in OCR (Optical Character Recognition) programs.
Color Enhance Enhances the shades of the color you select in the scanned image. This setting is available only if you select Grayscale or Black & White as the Image Type setting.
Brightness Adjusts the overall lightness and darkness of the scanned image.
Contrast Adjusts the difference between the light and dark areas of the overall scanned image.
Gamma Adjusts the midtone density of the scanned image.
Descreening Removes the ripple pattern that might appear in subtly shaded image areas, such as skin tones. This option improves results when scanning magazines or newspapers. (The results of descreening do not appear in the preview image, only in your scanned image.)
Edge Fill Corrects shadowing around the edges of the image by filling the shadows with black or white.
Dual Image Output Scans the original image twice using different output settings (Windows only).
Watermark Adds a watermark to a scanned image.
Parent topic: Scanning in Epson Scan 2
183

Saving Scanned Documents as a Searchable PDF Using Epson Scan 2
You can scan a document and save the text in a searchable PDF. In a searchable PDF, text is recognized using Optical Character Recognition (OCR) and then embedded in the scanned original. Note: The required Epson Scan 2 OCR Component is installed automatically when you install your product software as instructed on the Start Here sheet. If you install your scanner software programs individually, be sure to also install this component if you want to perform OCR. 1. Load your original in the product for scanning. 2. Start Epson Scan 2. 3. Select your scan settings. 4. Click Preview and adjust the area you want to scan, if necessary. 5. If you are using the ADF, reload the ejected original. 6. Select Searchable PDF as the Image Format setting. 7. Select Options from the Image Format list.
You see this window:
184

8. Select any of the options on the General tab.
9. Select the Text tab.
10. Make sure the language used in the document text is selected as the Text Language setting.
11. Select the Security tab if you want to add a password to the PDF or protect printing or editing properties.
12. Click OK.
13. Confirm the File Name setting and select a Folder setting for your document.
14. Click Scan.
The scanned image is saved as a searchable PDF.
Parent topic: Scanning in Epson Scan 2
Related topics Placing Originals on the Product
Image Format Options
You can select different image formats and related options. For details on available options, click the ? icon on the Epson Scan 2 Image Format Options window. Not all image formats have options.
BITMAP (*.bmp) A standard image file format for most Windows programs.
JPEG (*.jpg) An image format that lets you highly compress image data. However, the higher the compression, the lower the image quality. (The TIFF format is recommended when you need to modify or retouch your scanned image.)
PNG (*.png) An image format that does not lose quality during editing.
TIFF (*.tif) A file format created for exchanging data between many programs, such as graphic and DTP software.
Multi-TIFF (*.tif) A TIFF file format when multiple pages are saved to the same file, allowing you to edit the images using a compatible program.
PDF (*.pdf) A document format that is readable by Windows and Mac systems using Adobe Reader, Acrobat, or other programs. You can save multi-page documents in one PDF file.
185

Searchable PDF (*.pdf) A document format that is readable by Windows and Mac systems using Adobe Reader, Acrobat, or other programs. You can save multi-page documents in one PDF file. Recognized text in the scanned document can be searched.
Parent topic: Scanning in Epson Scan 2
Scan Resolution Guidelines
The Resolution setting, measured in dpi (dots per inch), controls the amount of detail captured in your scans. Increasing the resolution raises the amount of detail captured but comes with the following disadvantages: · Larger file sizes · It takes longer to scan your originals, send/receive your scans by email or fax, and to print your scans · The image may become too large to fit on your display or print on paper If you plan to enlarge a scanned image so you can print it at a larger size, you may need to increase the resolution from the default resolution set by Epson Scan 2. Follow these guidelines to determine the resolution setting you need: · You will scan the image at its original size but enlarge it later in an image-editing program.
Increase the Epson Scan 2 Resolution setting in your scan. Increase the resolution by the same amount you will increase the image size to retain a high image quality. For example, if the resolution is 300 dpi (dots per inch) and you will double the image size later, change the Resolution setting to 600 dpi. · You will scan the image at 100% or a smaller size. Select the Epson Scan 2 Resolution setting based on how you will use the scanned image: · Email/view on a computer screen/post on the web: 96 to 200 dpi · Print/fax/convert to editable text (OCR)/create searchable PDF: 200 to 300 dpi Parent topic: Scanning in Epson Scan 2
Scanning with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture
When you scan with Document Capture Pro (Windows) or Document Capture (Mac), the program automatically saves your scanned file on your computer in the folder you specify. You can preview and edit the scanned file, change the scanned file settings, and send to a destination if necessary. Scanning with Simple Scan in Document Capture Pro - Windows Scanning with Job Scan in Document Capture Pro - Windows
186

Scanning Two Originals onto One Sheet (Stitching Images) - Windows Scanning Multi-Page Originals as Separate Files - Windows Scanning with Document Capture - Mac Parent topic: Scanning Related topics Placing Originals on the Product
Scanning with Simple Scan in Document Capture Pro - Windows
You can use the Simple Scan option in Document Capture Pro to quickly scan an original. Note: Settings may vary depending on the software version you are using. Click the Help icon in Document Capture Pro at any time for more information. 1. Load your original in the product. 2. Do one of the following to start Document Capture Pro:
· Windows 11: Click , then search for Document Capture Pro and select it. · Windows 10: Click and select Epson Software > Document Capture Pro. · Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Document Capture Pro. · Windows (other versions): Click or Start, and select All Programs or Programs. Select
Epson Software > Document Capture Pro. You see the Document Capture Pro window. Note: You may need to select your scanner from the list, if necessary. 3. Select the Simple Scan tab.
187

You see a window like this:
4. Select the size of your original from the Document Size menu. 5. If you want to change specific settings for the scan, click the Scan Settings button. Change any of
the settings as necessary and click OK. For additional settings, click the Detailed Settings button on the Scan Settings screen. 6. Do one of the following: · To scan the front side of an original, select SCAN single-sided. · To scan both sides of an original, select SCAN double-sided. Your product scans the original and the image appears in the Edit Scanned Results window. 7. Review and edit the scanned image as necessary and click Next when you are finished. 8. Select a destination for the scanned image, change any settings as necessary, and click Complete. Note: If you are sending the scanned image to a server or cloud destination, you need to enter your login information. Parent topic: Scanning with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture
Scanning with Job Scan in Document Capture Pro - Windows
You can create scan jobs in Document Capture Pro and use them to quickly scan originals and save them to various destinations.
188

Note: Settings may vary depending on the software version you are using. Click the Help icon in Document Capture Pro at any time for more information. 1. Load your original in the product. 2. Do one of the following to start Document Capture Pro:
· Windows 11: Click , then search for Document Capture Pro and select it. · Windows 10: Click and select Epson Software > Document Capture Pro. · Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Document Capture Pro. · Windows (other versions): Click or Start, and select All Programs or Programs. Select
Epson Software > Document Capture Pro. You see the Document Capture Pro window. Note: You may need to select your scanner from the list, if necessary. 3. Select the Job Scan tab. You see a window like this:
4. Select one of the scan jobs (or click Job Settings to create a new scan job). The product scans the loaded original and saves it according to the job settings.
189

5. Depending on the settings for the scan job you selected, you may be able to view and edit the pages before saving them. If so, click Complete when finished. The scanned image is saved according to the job settings.
Adding and Assigning Scan Jobs with Document Capture Pro - Windows Parent topic: Scanning with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture Adding and Assigning Scan Jobs with Document Capture Pro - Windows You can add scan jobs that contain specific scan settings and use the jobs when you scan from your product control panel or the Job Scan option in Document Capture Pro. You can save up to 30 scan jobs. Note: Settings may vary depending on the software version you are using. Click the Help icon in Document Capture Pro at any time for more information. 1. Do one of the following to start Document Capture Pro:
· Windows 11: Click , then search for Document Capture Pro and select it. · Windows 10: Click and select Epson Software > Document Capture Pro. · Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Document Capture Pro. · Windows (other versions): Click or Start, and select All Programs or Programs. Select
Epson Software > Document Capture Pro. You see the Document Capture Pro window. 2. Select the Job Scan tab.
190

You see a window like this:
3. Click the Job Settings button. You see a window like this:
4. To add a scan job, click the New Job icon. 191

5. Enter a name for the new job, and select any settings as necessary from the following options: · Scan: select the size, color, or resolution · Save: select the file name, file type, or destination folder · Index: enable the index setting and choose output options for an index file · Send: select the destination for the scanned file, or choose to email or print the file · Confirm/Test: select the job button icon and color, choose display settings, and run a test scan if necessary
6. Click Save when you are finished. The new job appears in the Job Scan window.
7. To assign a scan job to the product control panel, click the Button Assignment icon. You see a screen like this:
192

8. Select the jobs that you want to assign to the product control panel using any of the pull-down menus.
Note: The number of pull-down menus available may vary, depending on your product and any connected options.
9. Click OK, then click Back. You can now use the added scan jobs when you scan from the product control panel.
Parent topic: Scanning with Job Scan in Document Capture Pro - Windows
Scanning Two Originals onto One Sheet (Stitching Images) - Windows
You can scan both sides of a double-sided or folded original in Document Capture Pro and combine them into a single image with the Epson Scan 2 Stitch Images setting (not available for all products).
Note: Settings may vary depending on the software version you are using. Click the Help icon in Document Capture Pro at any time for more information.
1. Load your original in the product.
Note: If an optional carrier sheet is included with your product, use it when scanning a folded original or damage to the original may occur. Place the original into the carrier sheet with the folded edge against the right side of the carrier sheet. Make sure to insert the carrier sheet into your product with the white edge facing down.
2. Do one of the following to start Document Capture Pro: · Windows 11: Click , then search for Document Capture Pro and select it. · Windows 10: Click and select Epson Software > Document Capture Pro. · Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Document Capture Pro. · Windows (other versions): Click or Start and select All Programs or Programs. Select Epson Software > Document Capture Pro.
3. Select the Simple Scan tab.
193

You see a window like this: 4. Click Scan Settings > Detailed Settings.
194

You see an Epson Scan 2 window like this: 195

5. Select Double-Sided as the Scanning Side setting. 6. Select the original document size or Auto Detect as the Document Size setting. 7. Select one of the following as the Stitch Images setting:
· Top & Bottom: Places the scanned images one above the other. · Left & Right: Places the scanned images side by side. 8. Select the Advanced Settings tab and verify that the Edge Fill setting is set to None. 9. Click Save. 10. Click OK. 11. Click SCAN double-sided. Your product scans the original and the image appears in the Edit Scanned Results window.
Note: If the scanned images are not stitched together in the correct orientation, click Scanning Side on the Epson Scan 2 window, select Settings, set the Binding Edge to Left or Top, and rescan the document.
12. Review and edit the scanned pages as necessary and click Next when you are finished. 13. Select a destination and any settings as necessary and click Complete. Parent topic: Scanning with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture Related topics Placing Originals on the Product
Scanning Multi-Page Originals as Separate Files - Windows
You can use Document Capture Pro to scan multi-page originals as separate scanned files. You can indicate how the separate files are created by defining a maximum page count per file or by inserting blank pages, barcodes, or characters that can be detected by the software as separation markers.
Note: Settings may vary depending on the software version you are using. Click the Help icon in Document Capture Pro at any time for more information.
1. Load your multi-page original in the product. 2. Do one of the following to start Document Capture Pro:
· Windows 11: Click , then search for Document Capture Pro and select it.
196

· Windows 10: Click and select Epson Software > Document Capture Pro. · Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Document Capture Pro. · Windows (other versions): Click or Start, and select All Programs or Programs. Select
Epson Software > Document Capture Pro. You see the Document Capture Pro window. 3. Select the Job Scan tab. You see a window like this:
4. Click the Job Settings button. You see a window like this:
197

5. Select New Job and select the scan settings. Click Next when finished. You see a window like this:
6. Select the Apply job separation checkbox. 7. Select the method you want to use to separate the originals as the Separator setting. Click
Separation Settings to specify the settings for the selected option. 198

8. Finish creating the new scan job and click Save. 9. Click Back on the Job Settings screen.
Your originals are saved into separate files and folders as specified when the job is run. Parent topic: Scanning with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture Related topics Placing Originals on the Product
Scanning with Document Capture - Mac
When you scan with Document Capture, the program automatically saves your scanned file on your computer in the folder you specify. You can select settings, preview, and change the scanned file settings as necessary. Note: Settings may vary depending on the software version you are using. See the Help menu in Document Capture at any time for more information. 1. Load your original in the product. 2. Open the Applications folder, open the Epson Software folder, and select Document Capture.
You see a window like this:
199

Note: You may need to select your scanner from the scanner list. 3. Click the scan icon.
You see a window like this:
Note: If you want to use a scan job that you created instead, select it from the Job list in the Document Capture window, click the Start Job button, and skip the rest of these steps. 4. Select any displayed scan settings you want to use. Note: See the Help information in Document Capture for details. 5. If you want to select detailed scan settings, close the Scan Settings window, open the Scan menu at the top of the Mac desktop, and select Displays the EPSON Scan Setup Screen.
200

6. Click the Scan icon and select any detailed scan settings you want to use from the Epson Scan 2 window.
7. Click Scan. You see a preview of your scan in the Document Capture window.
Note: You may have to close the Epson Scan 2 window to view your scan in the Document Capture window. 8. If you would like to scan additional originals and add them to the current captured images, click the + icon, select Acquire from Scanner, and repeat the previous steps. 9. Check the scanned images and edit them as necessary. 10. Click one of the destination icons to choose where to send your scanned files. (If you cannot see all of the icons below, click the arrow next to the icons.) Change any settings as necessary.
Note: If you are sending the scanned image to a server or cloud destination, you need to enter your login information.
201

11. Depending on the destination you chose, click OK or Send to complete the operation. Adding and Assigning Scan Jobs with Document Capture - Mac Parent topic: Scanning with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture
Related topics Placing Originals on the Product
Adding and Assigning Scan Jobs with Document Capture - Mac You can add scan jobs that contain specific scan settings and use the jobs when you scan from your product control panel or Document Capture. You can save up to 30 scan jobs.

Note: Settings may vary depending on the software version you are using. See the Help menu in Document Capture at any time for more information.

1. Start Document Capture on a computer connected to the product.

2. Click the Manage Job icon from the toolbar at the top of the window.
You see a window showing the current scan job list.
3. To add a scan job, click the + icon, enter a name for the new job, select settings as necessary, and click OK.
You can now use the new scan job when you scan with Document Capture.

4. To assign a scan job to the product control panel, click the window and click Event Settings.

settings icon at the bottom of the

5. Select the jobs that you want to assign to the product control panel using any of the pull-down menus.

Note: The number of pull-down menus available may vary, depending on your product and any connected options.

6. Click OK, then click OK again. You can now use the added scan jobs when you scan from the product control panel.
Parent topic: Scanning with Document Capture - Mac

202

Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning
If you enabled Access Control on your product, a user ID and password may be required to scan. You can enter the user ID and password in Epson Scan 2. Note: If you do not know the user ID or password, contact your administrator for assistance. 1. Start Epson Scan 2. 2. Select Settings from the Scanner drop-down list.
You see this window:
3. Select Access Control. 4. Enter your user name and password. 5. Click OK. Parent topic: Scanning
203

Faxing
See these sections to fax using your product.
Note: This product allows you to store names, telephone numbers, and fax data in its memory even when the power is turned off. Make sure you restore all of the default settings if you give away or dispose of the product. This will erase all of your network settings and fax data.
Note: When using the PCL or PostScript (PS3) printer software with the product, you can fax using the printer buttons or the utilities included with the standard Epson printer software. To download the standard Epson printer software,visit epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin,epson.com/support (Latin America) and select your product.
Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine Setting Up Fax Features Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups Sending Faxes Receiving Faxes Checking Fax Status Viewing a Fax on the LCD Screen (Using the Fax Box) Printing Fax Reports
Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine
You must connect your product to a telephone wall jack to send or receive faxes. If you want to use the same telephone line to receive calls, you can connect a telephone or answering machine to your product using an additional phone cable.
Note: If you do not connect a telephone to your product, make sure Receive Mode is set to Auto. Otherwise, you cannot receive faxes.
204

1. Connect a phone cable to your telephone wall jack and to the LINE port on your product.
Note: If you have a DSL or ISDN connection, you must connect the appropriate DSL filter, or ISDN terminal adapter or router to the wall jack to be able to use the line for faxing or voice calls using your product. Contact your DSL or ISDN provider for the necessary equipment.
205

2. If you are connecting a telephone or answering machine to your product using a second phone cable, remove the cap from the EXT port on your product.
Note: If your telephone has a fax function, disable the fax function before connecting it. If you are not able to completely disable the fax function on your telephone, you may not be able to use it as an external telephone.
206

3. Connect a second phone cable to your telephone or answering machine and to the EXT port on your product.
Note: If you connect an answering machine and Receive Mode is set to Auto, set the number of rings before your product answers a call to a number that is higher than your answering machine's setting for the number of rings. Make sure to connect the telephone to the EXT port on your product. If you split the telephone line between your telephone and the product, they will not work correctly. Parent topic: Faxing Related references Cannot Receive Faxes with a Telephone Connected to Your Product Related tasks Receiving Faxes Automatically Using the Fax Setup Wizard
Setting Up Fax Features
Before faxing with your product, set up your fax header and select the fax features you want to use. 207

Note: If you leave your product unplugged for a long period of time, you may need to reset the date and time settings for faxes. Setting Up Basic Fax Features Selecting Advanced Fax Settings Setting Up the Fax Utility - Windows Setting Up Fax Features Using the Fax Utility - Mac Parent topic: Faxing
Setting Up Basic Fax Features
See these sections to select the basic settings you need to use the product's fax features. Using the Fax Setup Wizard Selecting the Line Type Setting the Number of Rings to Answer Parent topic: Setting Up Fax Features Using the Fax Setup Wizard You can setup the product's basic fax settings using the Fax Setting Wizard. This wizard is automatically displayed when the product is turned on for the first time. You can also change these settings individually from the Fax Settings menu. Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change these setting, contact your administrator for assistance. 1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Fax Setting Wizard.
208

You see a screen like this:
3. Select Proceed. 4. On the Fax Header screen, use the displayed keypad to enter the sender name for your fax source,
such as your name or a business name. You can enter up to 40 characters. Select OK when you are done. 5. On the Your Phone Number screen, use the displayed keypad to enter your fax number, up to 20 characters. Select OK when you are done. Note: The name and phone number in the fax header identifies the source of the faxes you send. 6. On the Distinctive Ring Setting screen, do one of the following: · If you have subscribed to a distinctive ring service from your telephone company, select Proceed.
Select the ring pattern to be used for incoming faxes or select All. Go to the next step. · If you do not have a distinctive ring service, select Skip and go to step 9. Note: Distinctive ring services allows you to have several phone numbers on one phone line. Each number is assigned a different ring pattern. You can use one number for voice calls and another for fax calls. Select the ring pattern assigned to fax calls in the DRD Setting. If you select a ring pattern other than All, Receive Mode is automatically set to Auto.
209

7. On the Receive Mode Setting screen, do one of the following: · If you have connected an external telephone or answering machine to the product, select Yes and go to the next step. · If you did not connect an external telephone or answering machine, select No and go to step 9. (Receive Mode is automatically set to Auto; otherwise you cannot receive faxes.)
8. On the next Receive Mode Setting screen, select Yes to receive faxes automatically or select No to receive faxes manually.
Note: If you connect an external answering machine and select to receive faxes automatically, make sure the Rings to Answer setting is correct. If you select to receive faxes manually, you need to answer every call and operate the product's control panel or your phone to receive faxes.
9. On the Proceed screen, confirm the displayed settings and select Proceed, or press the back arrow to change the settings.
10. On the Run Check Fax Connection screen, select Start Checking and follow the on-screen instructions to check the fax connection and print a report of the check result. If there are any errors reported, try the solutions on the report and run the check again.
If the Select Line Type screen appears, select the correct line type. If the Dial Tone Detection screen appears, select Disable. However, disabling the dial tone detection function may drop the first digit of a fax number and send the fax to the wrong number. Parent topic: Setting Up Basic Fax Features Selecting the Line Type If you connect the product to a PBX phone system or terminal adapter, you must change the product's line type. PBX (Private Branch Exchange) is used in office environments where an external access code such as "9" must be dialed to call an outside line. The default Line Type setting is PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network), which is a standard home phone line.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you can't access or change this setting, contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Line Type > PBX.
210

You see a screen like this:
3. Select Access Code. 4. Select Use. 5. Select the Access Code field. 6. Use the displayed keypad to enter the access code, such as 9, and select OK. Parent topic: Setting Up Basic Fax Features Setting the Number of Rings to Answer If you connect an external answering machine and select to receive faxes automatically, make sure the Rings to Answer setting is correct. The number of rings should be higher than the number of rings your answering machine is set to for answering a call. Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting, contact your administrator for assistance. 1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Rings to Answer.
211

You see a screen like this:
3. Select the number of rings and select OK. Make sure to select a number higher than the number of rings your answering machine is set to for answering a call.
Note: An answering machine picks up every call faster than the product, but the product can detect fax tones and start receiving faxes. If you answer the phone and hear a fax tone, check that the product has started receiving the fax, then hang up the phone. Parent topic: Setting Up Basic Fax Features
Selecting Advanced Fax Settings
You can select a variety of advanced fax settings. Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change these setting, contact your administrator for assistance. 1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings.
212

You see a screen like this:

3. Select the group of settings you want to change. Basic Settings - Fax Send Settings - Fax Receive Settings - Fax Report Settings - Fax Security Settings - Fax Parent topic: Setting Up Fax Features Basic Settings - Fax Set the basic options you want to use for incoming and outgoing faxes.
Note: If the optional fax board is installed on your product, the Expansion Line Settings menu appears. You can select certain settings below for each added line.

Setting Fax Speed

Options

Description

Fast(33,600bps) Sets the speed at which you send and receive faxes.

Medium(14,400bps)

Slow(9,600bps)

213

Setting ECM

Options On

Off

Dial Tone Detection

Off

Line Type Header Receive Mode DRD

PSTN
PBX
Your Phone Number Fax Header Manual
Auto All Single Double Triple Double&Triple

Description
Turns on Error Correction Mode (ECM) to automatically correct errors in sent or received fax data.
Turns off Error Correction Mode (ECM); color faxes cannot be sent or received.
Automatically dials the number you enter for faxing when the product detects a dial tone.
Turns off automatic dial tone detection, which may be necessary if the product is connected to a PBX (Private Branch Exchange) or a TA (Terminal Adapter). However, turning this setting off may cause the product to drop the first digit of a fax number.
Selects a standard phone line (Public Switched Telephone Network).
Selects Private Branch Exchange, the type of phone line used in office environments where an access code such as 9 must be used to call an outside line.
Select to enter the header information and your phone number for inclusion on outgoing faxes.
Lets you confirm whether an incoming fax should be printed; a telephone must be connected to the product
Automatically receives and prints faxes.
If you are using a Distinctive Ring Service on your phone line, your telephone company can assign two or more phone numbers to the same line and assign different ring patterns to each. If you use this service, select the number of rings for your fax number so your product can receive faxes on the correct number of rings. Select All for phones lines that do not use this service.

214

Setting Rings to Answer

Options 1 to 9

Remote Receive

Off On Start Code

Rejection Fax

Various

Save/Forward File Format

PDF

TIFF Cloud Destination List Various

Description
Sets the number of rings before your product receives a fax. If Receive Mode is set to Auto and an answering machine is connected to the product, make sure this setting is set higher than the number of rings your answering machine is set to answer a call.
Lets you start receiving faxes using your phone instead of operating the product (if the Receive Mode is set to Auto). When you select On, you must also set a Start Code. If you are using a cordless handset with its base connected to the product, you can start receiving the fax by entering the code using the handset.
Lets you automatically reject faxes from blocked numbers, with blank headers, or from unrecognized contacts.
Saves or forwards a fax as a PDF file. You can also set a password for opening the PDF or allowing printing and editing permissions.
Saves or forwards a fax as a TIFF file.
Allows user to register up to five addresses at a cloud service recognized by Epson Connect. Received faxes may be forwarded to the selected cloud service. To use this feature, the printer must be registered with Epson Connect.

Parent topic: Selecting Advanced Fax Settings
Related tasks Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel Selecting the Date and Time
Related topics Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups
Send Settings - Fax Set the send options you want to use for outgoing faxes.

215

Setting Quick memory send Batch Send
Save Failure Data

Options --
Off On Off On

Wait Time for Next Original
Fax Preview Display Time
Allow Backup

Off On Off On Allowed Not Allowed

Description
Sends the outgoing fax as soon as the first page is finished scanning.
Sorts outgoing faxes by recipient in the product's memory, and then sends them as a batch. Up to five documents (200 pages total) can be sent at one time.
Saves faxes that failed to be sent in the product's memory. You can resend the faxes from the product's Job/Status menu. When you select On, you can select a time period to store the saved faxes.
Sets a time in between sending the next fax
Sets a time for previewing the scanned document on the LCD screen before it is sent
Allows you to back up sent faxes. Select Fax > Fax Settings > Backup to view backed up faxes.

Parent topic: Selecting Advanced Fax Settings Receive Settings - Fax
Set the save/forward or print options you want to use for incoming faxes. Save/Forward Settings

216

Setting Unconditional Save/Forward
Conditional Save/Forward Common Settings
Print Settings Setting Auto Reduction

Options

Description

Save to Inbox

Saves received faxes in printer's inbox

Save to Computer Converts received faxes to PDFs and saves them on a computer connected to the printer

Save to Memory Device

Converts received faxes to PDFs and saves them on an external memory device connected to the printer

Forward

Forwards received faxes to another fax machine, or converts them to PDFs and forwards them to a shared folder on a network or an email address. Forwarded faxes are deleted from the printer.

Email Notifications Sends an email notification after a fax is received, printed, saved, or forwarded

Sets up conditions to save, forward, or print received

faxes. Select Enable to enable a condition. Select the

arrow icon to enter conditions and other settings.

Inbox Settings

Sets up what happens when the fax memory is full, or sets up a password for the inbox. You cannot set a password if the Options when memory is full setting has been set to Receive and print faxes.

Email Subject to Specifies a subject when forwarding a fax to an email

Forward

address

Box Document Delete Settings

Select On to automatically delete received faxes after a set period of time

Options On
Off

Description
Select to reduce the size of large received faxes to fit on the paper size in the selected paper source.
Select to print large incoming faxes at their original size on multiple sheets, if necessary.

217

Setting Split Page Settings
Acting Print
Auto Rotation Add Reception Information 2-Sided Print Start Timing
Collation Stack
Print Suspend Time

Options

Description

Delete Print Data After Split
Overlap When Split

Select how to split large incoming faxes across multiple sheets when using the Auto Reduction option.

On (Split to Pages) Select to split large incoming faxes across multiple sheets.

On (Reduce to Fit) Select to reduce the size of large received faxes to fit on the paper size in the selected paper source.

Off

Select to print large incoming faxes at their original

size on multiple sheets, if necessary.

If you have loaded A5-size paper, select On to rotate

Off

landscape-oriented incoming faxes so that they print correctly on the paper.

Select On to include the date, time, the sender's

Off

information, and a page number in the header of your incoming faxes.

Select On to print incoming faxes double sided. You

Off

can also select the Binding Margin.

All Pages Received

Select to print incoming faxes after the product receives all of the pages of the document.

First Page Received

Select to print incoming faxes as soon as the product receives the first page of the document.

Select On to print incoming faxes so that the pages

Off

are stacked in the correct page order. (When the product is low on memory, this option may not be

available.)

Off On Time to Stop

Select On to set a time period to stop automatic printing of faxes or reports and save received faxes in the product's memory. (Make sure there is enough free memory before using this function.)

Time to Restart

218

Setting Quiet Mode

Options On Off

Description
Select On to reduce noise during printing (printing speed may be reduced).

Parent topic: Selecting Advanced Fax Settings Report Settings - Fax
Set the options you want for fax reports.

Setting Forwarding Report

Options Print on Error

Print Do Not Print

Backup Error Report Fax Log Auto Print

On Off Off On(Every 100)

On(Time)

Reception Report

Print on Error
Print Do Not Print

Description
Prints a report after forwarding a received document only if an error occurs
Prints a report after forwarding a received document
Does not print a report after forwarding a received document
Select On to print a report when a backup error for sending faxes occurs
Does not print a fax log
Prints a fax log after every 100 fax jobs are completed
Prints a fax log at a specified time. If the number of completed fax jobs exceeds 30, the fax log prints before the specified time.
Prints a report after receiving a fax only if an error occurs
Prints a report after receiving a fax
Does not print a report after receiving a fax

219

Setting
Attach Fax Image to Report

Options Off
On(Large Image)

On(Small Image)

Fax Log Layout

Combine Send and Receive

Separate Send and Receive

Report Format

Simple

Detail

Fax Log Output Method Print

Save to Memory Device

Forward

Description
Does not include an image on the Transmission Report
Prints a Transmission Report that includes the upper part of the first page of the sent document
Prints a Transmission Report that includes a reduced size of the entire first page of the sent document
Prints a Transmission Report and a Reception Report on the same sheet when you print a fax log
Prints a Transmission Report and a Reception Report on separate sheets when you print a fax log
Prints a simple fax report
Prints a fax report that includes error codes
Prints fax reports
Saves fax reports to an inserted memory device. Select Create a folder to save fax data to create a folder on the inserted memory device.
Forwards fax reports to a specified destination

Parent topic: Selecting Advanced Fax Settings Security Settings - Fax
Set the security options you want to use for fax data.

Setting Direct Dialing Restrictions
Broadcasting Restrictions

Options Off On
Enter Twice
Off On

Description
Does not restrict dialed fax numbers.
Allows faxing only to numbers stored in the contacts list or history.
Requires you to enter fax numbers twice to prevent errors.
Select On to allow only one fax number to be entered as the recipient

220

Setting

Options

Confirm Address List Off

Backup Data Auto Clear Off

Clear Backup Data

Description
Selects whether or not to display a recipient confirmation screen before a fax is sent.
Automatically erases sent or received fax data from your product's memory.
Deletes all sent or received fax data remaining in your product's memory; run this function if you are giving away or disposing of your product.

Parent topic: Selecting Advanced Fax Settings
Setting Up the Fax Utility - Windows
You can set up the FAX Utility for Windows for use with your product.

Note: Before using the FAX Utility for Windows, make sure you have set up the fax features on your product using the product control panel. Also first confirm that you can send and receive faxes using the control panel.

1. Do one of the following:
· Windows 11: Click , then search for EPSON Software and select it. · Windows 10: Click and select EPSON Software. · Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen.
· Windows (other versions): Click or Start > Programs or All Programs > EPSON Software. 2. Select FAX Utility.

221

The first time you use the FAX Utility, you see this introduction window: 3. Read about the FAX Utility and click Return to the main window at the bottom of the window.
222

You see this window:
4. Click Select Printer and follow the on-screen instructions to transfer your product's fax settings to the FAX Utility. Note: For detailed information, click Help or Open Online Help.
Parent topic: Setting Up Fax Features
Setting Up Fax Features Using the Fax Utility - Mac
You can set up your fax header and select your fax settings using the FAX Utility for Mac. 223

1. In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences. Select Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select the FAX option for your product, and select Options & Supplies. Select Utility and select Open Printer Utility.
2. Double-click FAX Utility, if necessary. You see a window like this:
3. Select your FAX product in the Printer list. 4. Select Fax Settings. 5. Follow the prompts that appear on the screen to enter your fax header information and select your
fax settings. Note: For detailed information, select the FAX Utility ? icon. Parent topic: Setting Up Fax Features
Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups
You can set up a list of contacts and their fax numbers so you can quickly select them for faxing. You can also set up contact groups to send a fax message to multiple contacts. Note: Contacts can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change contacts, contact your administrator for assistance.
224

Creating a Contact Editing or Deleting a Contact Creating a Contact Group Editing or Deleting a Contact Group Parent topic: Faxing
Creating a Contact
You can create a list of contacts to save frequently used fax numbers.
Note: You can create up to 200 contacts and contact groups combined.
1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Fax. 3. Select Contacts. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
4. Select the icon. 5. Select Add Contact. 6. Select the registry number you want to use for the contact you are adding. 7. Select the Name field, use the displayed keyboard to enter the contact name (up to 30 characters),
and select OK. 8. Select the Index Word field, use the displayed keyboard to enter a word to use when searching for
an entry (up to 30 characters), and select OK.
Note: This field is automatically populated after you enter the name. This field is optional.
9. Select the Fax Number field, and use the numeric keypad on the LCD screen or the buttons on the product to enter the fax number. You can enter up to 64 characters. Select OK when you are done.
Note: If necessary, enter an outside line access code (such as 9) at the beginning of the fax number. If the access code has been set up in the Line Type setting, enter the # pound sign instead of the code.
10. Set the Fax Speed, Subaddress, and Password settings, if necessary. 11. Select OK.
225

Parent topic: Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups
Editing or Deleting a Contact
You can edit or delete any of the contacts on your list. 1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Fax. 3. Select Contacts. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
4. Select the icon next to the contact you want to edit or delete. 5. Do one of the following:
· To delete the contact, select Delete and select Yes on the confirmation screen. · To edit the contact, select Edit, select the item you want to change, enter the correct information,
and select OK. When you are finished editing, select OK. Parent topic: Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups
Creating a Contact Group
You can create a group of contacts so that you can easily send faxes to multiple recipients.
Note: You can create up to 200 contacts and contact groups combined.
1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Fax. 3. Select Contacts. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
4. Select the icon. 5. Select Add Group. 6. Select the registry number you want to use for the group you are adding. 7. Select the Group Name field, use the displayed keyboard to enter the group name (up to 30
characters), and select OK.
226

8. Select the Index Word field, use the displayed keyboard to enter a word to use when searching for a group (up to 30 characters), and select OK.
Note: This field is automatically populated after you enter the group name. This field is optional.
9. Select Contact(s) Added to the Group. You see your contacts list.
10. Select each contact you want to include in your group. Each selected contact is highlighted.
11. Select Close. 12. Select OK. Parent topic: Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups
Editing or Deleting a Contact Group
You can edit an existing contact group to add or delete entries. You can also delete the entire contact group. 1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Fax. 3. Select Contacts. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
4. Select the icon next to the group you want to edit or delete. 5. To edit the group, select Edit. 6. Select Contact(s) Added to the Group.
You see a list of the contacts in your group. 7. Select the contact you want to add or delete.
Each selected contact is highlighted. 8. Select Close. 9. Select OK. Parent topic: Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups
227

Sending Faxes
See these sections to send faxes using your product. Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility - Windows Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility - Mac Parent topic: Faxing
Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel
See these sections to send faxes using the product's control panel. Sending a Fax Using the Keypad, Contact List, or History Fax Sending Options Sending a Fax at a Specified Time Sending a Fax on Demand Sending a Stored Fax Dialing Fax Numbers from a Connected Telephone Parent topic: Sending Faxes Sending a Fax Using the Keypad, Contact List, or History You can send a fax from your product control panel by entering the fax number, or selecting the number from either the contact list or fax history.
Note: You can send a black-and-white fax to up to 200 recipients at a time, or send a color fax to one recipient at a time. If your recipient's fax machine does not print in color, your fax is automatically sent in black-and-white.
Note: The product can queue up to 50 black-and-white fax jobs. You can check or cancel fax jobs in the queue using the Job/Status menu.
1. Place your original on the product for faxing. 2. Press the home button, if necessary. 3. Select Fax.
Note: To fax a double-sided document, place your document in the ADF and turn on the ADF 2Sided setting. (You cannot fax double-sided documents in color.)
228

4. Do one of the following to select fax recipients:
· Select Keypad and enter a fax number. Select OK when done. To add another fax number, repeat the same steps. You can also use the numeric keypad on the control panel to enter a fax number.

Note: If direct dialing has been restricted, you can only select the number from the contact list or fax history. If necessary, enter an outside line access code (such as 9) at the beginning of the fax number. If the access code has been set up in the Line Type setting, enter the # pound sign

instead of the code. If your fax number requires a brief pause, select the pause symbol ().

icon to insert a

· Select Contacts to display the contact list. Select one or more contacts (select the contact again to deselect it). You can also select the Search for Contacts field to search for recipients by name, index name, or entry number. Select Close when you are finished.
· Select Recent to display the sent fax history.

Note: To delete entered recipients, select the Select Recipient field, select the recipient you want to delete, and select Remove.

5. If you need to change any fax settings, select Fax Settings and select your settings.
6. If you want to preview your fax in black-and-white on the LCD, press the Preview icon. (If the preview looks incorrect, select Cancel, reposition the document or change the fax settings, and repeat this step.)

Note: If you do not touch the preview screen for 20 seconds, your product sends the fax automatically. You cannot preview images when the Direct Send setting is turned on.

7. If you want to save your fax settings for later use, select Presets and add a new entry.

8. Select the Send icon.

Note: To cancel faxing, select the cancel button. You can also cancel the job or check the job status from the Job/Status menu.

Your product scans your original and prompts you to place additional pages, if necessary. After scanning your originals, your product dials the number and sends the fax.

229

Note: Your product does not save sent color faxes to its memory. If the Save Failure Data option is enabled, faxes that failed to be sent are stored to the product's memory and you can resend them from the Job/Status menu.

Parent topic: Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel
Related references Fax Sending Options
Related tasks Selecting the Line Type Using Presets
Related topics Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups Placing Originals on the Product
Fax Sending Options While sending a fax, you can select Fax Settings and select these options.

Setting Resolution
Density Original Type
Remove Background

Options Standard Fine Super Fine Ultra Fine Varying levels available Text Text & Image Photo Auto

Varying levels available

Description Adjusts the scan resolution and print quality of outgoing faxes
Lets you select from various density levels
Specifies the document type of your originals and adjusts the quality of your copies
Automatically removes any background color on scanned images Lets you select from various levels of background color adjustment

230

Setting Sharpness
ADF 2-Sided

Options Varying levels available
Off
On

Continuous Scan (ADF) Off On

Original Size (Glass)

Various sizes Auto Detect

Color Mode Direct Send

B&W Color Off On

Priority Send

Off

Send Fax Later

Off

Add Sender Information Off

Outside of Image

Inside of Image

Notify Send Result

Off

Transmission Report Print on Error

Do Not Print

Description
Lets you adjust the sharpness level of outgoing faxes
Select On to enable 2-sided faxing from the ADF. The Direct Send option and color faxing are disabled when you turn on this setting.
Select On to have the product to ask if you want to scan another page after a document in the ADF has finished scanning
Select the size for a document placed on the scanner glass, or select Auto Detect to have the product automatically detect the size of the document.
Select whether to scan images in color or black and white
Select On to send black-and-white faxes to a single recipient as soon as the connection is made, without saving the scanned image to memory. You cannot use this setting when sending a color fax or sending a fax to multiple recipients.
Select On to send the current fax before other faxes waiting to be sent
Select On to send the current monochrome fax at a selected time
Lets you include a header, your phone number, or a destination list in the selected location on your outgoing faxes
Sends a notification to the selected email address when an outgoing fax is sent
Lets you select when to print transmission reports

231

Setting Backup

Options Off On

Description
Saves a copy of the scanned fax to the selected email address or network folder/FTP location

Parent topic: Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel Sending a Fax at a Specified Time
You can send a fax at a time of your choice.

Note: Make sure the product's date and time settings are correct. You can only send faxes in black-andwhite when you use this option.

1. Place your original on the product for faxing. 2. Press the home button, if necessary. 3. Select Fax. 4. Enter a fax number or select a number from the Contacts or Recent lists. 5. Select Fax Settings. 6. Select Send Fax Later. 7. Select On. 8. Select Time, use the displayed keypad on the LCD screen to enter your desired time, and select
OK.

9. Select the Send icon.

Note: To cancel faxing, select the cancel button.

After scanning your originals, your product dials the number and sends the fax at the specified time.

Note: If the product is turned off at the specified time, the fax is sent when it is powered on.

Parent topic: Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel
Related references Fax Sending Options

232

Related tasks Selecting the Date and Time Related topics Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups Placing Originals on the Product Sending a Fax on Demand You can store one scanned document (up to 100 black-and-white pages) and have it sent automatically when another fax machine requests it. Other fax users can receive the document by calling your fax number and using the polling receive function on their fax machines. 1. Place your original on the product for faxing. 2. Press the home button, if necessary. 3. Select Fax Box. 4. Select Polling Send/Board. 5. Select Polling Send.
6. Review the displayed Polling Send Box settings. If you need to make changes, select the icon and select Settings. Make any necessary changes and select OK.
7. Select Add Document. 8. Review the displayed Fax Settings. Make any necessary changes.
9. Select the Store icon. Your document is scanned and stored until you overwrite or delete it.
You can store only one document at a time. Subsequent documents overwrite the existing document. You can also delete a stored document from the Job/Status menu. Parent topic: Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel Related references Fax Sending Options Related topics Placing Originals on the Product
233

Sending a Stored Fax You can store up to 10 black-and-white scanned documents (200 pages total) and send them whenever necessary. 1. Place your original on the product for faxing. 2. Press the home button, if necessary. 3. Select Fax.
4. Select the icon. 5. Select Extended Fax. 6. Select Store Fax Data and select On. 7. Select Close. 8. Select any other fax settings as necessary and select Close.
9. Select the Store icon. Your document is scanned, stored, and briefly previewed.
10. When you are ready to send the document, press the home button, if necessary, and select Fax Box.
11. Select Stored Documents. 12. Select the stored fax job you want to send.
13. Select the Send icon. The selected fax is sent. Parent topic: Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel Related references Fax Sending Options Related topics Placing Originals on the Product Dialing Fax Numbers from a Connected Telephone If you have connected a telephone to the EXT port on your product, you can send a fax by dialing the fax number from the connected telephone. If the recipient's phone number and fax number are the same, you can speak to the recipient before sending the fax.
234

1. Place your original on the product for faxing. 2. Press the home button, if necessary. 3. Dial the fax number from the connected telephone. Speak to the recipient if necessary.
Note: If you are using a pre-paid calling card, enter the number and password required to use the card before entering the destination fax number. 4. Select Fax on the LCD screen. 5. Select Fax Settings and select any settings as necessary. Note: Your product now communicates with the recipient's fax machine. Do not hang up the telephone.
6. When you hear a fax tone, select the Send icon to start sending the fax. Note: If your recipient's fax machine does not print in color, your fax is automatically sent in blackand-white.
7. Hang up the telephone. Parent topic: Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel Related references Fax Sending Options Related topics Placing Originals on the Product
Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility - Windows
You can send a fax from a printing program in Windows. You can fax up to 100 pages at a time, including a cover sheet. 1. Open the file you want to fax and select the print command.
235

You see a window like this:
2. Select your product with the FAX option as the printer. 3. To change the Paper Size, Orientation, Color, Image Quality, or Character Density settings, click the
Preferences or Properties button. Note: If you see a Setup, Printer, or Options button, click it. Then click Preferences or Properties on the next screen. For more information about selecting fax print settings, click Help. 4. Select the Page Range as necessary. (Leave the Number of copies set to 1.) 5. Click Print or OK.
236

If you're faxing for the first time, you see a window like this one:
6. Enter your sender information so that recipients can identify the origin of the fax. Then click OK to save the sender information.
237

You see a window like this:
7. Enter the recipient's name and fax number or select a recipient from the phone book, then click Next. Note: For detailed instructions on using the Epson FAX Utility, click Help.
8. Select a cover sheet and enter a subject and message, then click Next. 9. Click Send to transmit your fax. Parent topic: Sending Faxes
Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility - Mac
You can send a fax from a Mac printing program using the FAX Utility. You can fax up to 100 pages at a time, including a cover sheet.
238

1. Open the file you want to fax. 2. Select the print command in your application.
Note: You may need to select a print icon on your screen, the Print option in the File menu, or another command. See your application's help utility for details.
Note: The print window may look different, depending on the Mac OS version and the application you are using. 3. Select your product FAX option as the Printer setting. 4. If necessary, click the arrow next to the Printer setting or the Show Details button to expand the print window. 5. Select the number of pages you are faxing as the Pages setting. Note: Leave the Copies setting set to 1. 6. Select Recipient Settings from the pop-up menu.
239

You see this window:
7. Do one of the following to choose your recipient: · Select a name or group from the Recipient List. · Enter a name, company, and fax number and click the + button. · Click the icon and select a recipient from your address book.
8. Select Fax Settings from the pop-up menu.
240

You see this window:
9. Select the Color and Image Quality settings you want to use for your fax. 10. Click Fax. Parent topic: Sending Faxes
Receiving Faxes
See these sections to receive faxes with your product. Fax Reception Receiving Faxes Automatically Receiving Faxes Manually Forwarding Received Faxes Receiving a Fax by Polling Parent topic: Faxing
Fax Reception
If you connected a telephone to your product so you can use the same phone line for faxes and voice calls, you can also set your product to receive faxes manually. This allows you to check for a fax tone using the telephone and press a button on your product to receive the fax. Make sure to load paper in your product and select your fax settings before receiving a fax.
241

Note: If you run out of paper during fax printing, load more paper and press the button indicated on your product's LCD screen to continue.
Parent topic: Receiving Faxes
Receiving Faxes Automatically
To receive faxes automatically, make sure Receive Mode is set to Auto (the default setting for the product). To change the Receive Mode if necessary, select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Receive Mode. If an answering machine is connected, make sure the product's Rings to Answer setting is set higher than the number of rings your answering machine is set to answer a call. For example, if the answering machine is set to pick up on the fourth ring, set the product to pick up on the fifth ring or later. Parent topic: Receiving Faxes Related references Basic Settings - Fax Related tasks Receiving Faxes Manually
Receiving Faxes Manually
You can set up your product to receive faxes manually by setting the Receive Mode to Manual. This lets you check for a fax tone on the connected telephone before receiving a fax. 1. To change the Receive Mode, select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic
Settings > Receive Mode and select Manual. 2. When the connected telephone rings, answer the call. 3. If you hear a fax tone, select Fax on the LCD display. 4. Select Send/Receive. 5. Select Receive.
6. Select the Receive icon to start receiving the fax. 7. Hang up the telephone. Parent topic: Receiving Faxes
242

Related references Basic Settings - Fax Related tasks Receiving Faxes Automatically
Forwarding Received Faxes
You can forward received faxes to another fax machine, or convert the faxes into PDF documents and forward them to a shared folder on the network or to an email address. Forwarded faxes are deleted from the product's memory. Before using this feature, make sure the date and time are set correctly, the forwarding destination is set up in the contact list, and the email server settings are configured. 1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings
> Unconditional Save/Foward > Forward > Yes.
Note: If you want to print the fax automatically before forwarding it, select Yes and Print.
3. Select Add Entry and select the forwarding destinations from the contacts list. 4. When you are finished selecting your forwarding destinations, select Close. 5. Confirm the displayed forwarding destinations and select Close. 6. Select an Options When Forwarding Failed option to choose whether you want to print the faxes
or save them in the printer's inbox if forwarding received faxes fails. Parent topic: Receiving Faxes
Receiving a Fax by Polling
You can use polling to receive a fax from another fax machine (such as a fax information service).
Note: You cannot use polling to receive a fax from a fax information service that uses audio guidance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Fax.
3. Select the icon. 4. Select Extended Fax.
243

5. Set Polling Receive to On. 6. Select Close. 7. Select Close. 8. Enter the fax number you expect to receive the fax from.
9. Select the Polling icon to start receiving the fax. Parent topic: Receiving Faxes
Checking Fax Status
You can check the status of current fax jobs, or faxes that have been received or sent on the product control panel. 1. Press the Job/Status button. Select the Job/Status tab if necessary. 2. Do one of the following:
· To check the status of current fax jobs, select the fax job you want to check. · To check the history of faxes that have been sent, received, or saved, select Log and select the
job you want to check.
Note: If you see a numbered icon above the icon on your product's LCD screen or the Received Fax light is flashing, received faxes have been temporarily saved to the product's
memory.
Parent topic: Faxing
Viewing a Fax on the LCD Screen (Using the Fax Box)
You can save received faxes in your product's memory and view them on the LCD screen.
Note: The Inbox can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access the Inbox, contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings
> Unconditional Save/Forward. 3. Set Save to Inbox to On.
244

4. Press the home button. 5. Select Fax Box. 6. Do one of the following:
· Select Inbox/Confidential to view received documents. · Select Stored Documents to view saved documents that have not been sent when Store Fax
Data is set to On. · Select Polling Send/Board to view documents that are stored for fax polling. 7. Select the fax you want to view. You see the fax displayed on the screen.
8. Select the icon. 9. Select one of the printing or deleting options, and follow the on-screen instructions.
Note: Delete faxes after you print or view them to prevent the product's memory from filling up. When the memory is full, you can only forward or print incoming faxes.
Parent topic: Faxing
Printing Fax Reports
You can print several types of fax reports whenever necessary. You can also print the fax log printed automatically by turning on Fax Log Auto Print. 1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Fax.
3. Select the icon. 4. Select Fax Report. 5. Select the fax report you want to print. Fax Report Options Parent topic: Faxing
Fax Report Options
Select the fax report or list you want to print.
245

Last Transmission Print a report on the previous fax that was sent or received through polling.
Fax Log View or print a report on recent fax transmissions.
Stored Fax Documents Print a list of the fax jobs currently stored in the product's memory.
Fax Settings List Print a list of the current fax communication settings.
Conditional Save/Forward List Print a list of the current conditional save/forward settings.
Protocol Trace Print a detailed report for the previous sent or received fax.
Parent topic: Printing Fax Reports
246

Using External USB Devices with Your Product
Follow the instructions here to work with an external USB device connected to your product. Connecting a USB Device Disconnecting a USB Device Viewing and Printing from the LCD Screen Transferring Files on a USB Device
Connecting a USB Device
Connect a USB device or its USB cable to the USB port on the front of the product.
Note: Epson cannot guarantee the compatibility of your device. Make sure the files on the device are compatible with the product. Parent topic: Using External USB Devices with Your Product Related references External USB Device Specifications Related tasks Disconnecting a USB Device
Disconnecting a USB Device
After you finish working with a USB device, follow these steps to remove it.
247

1. If your product is connected to your computer using a USB cable, do one of the following: · Windows: Open the My Computer, Computer, This PC, or Windows Explorer utility. Then right-click the name of your USB device (listed as a removable disk) and select Eject. · Mac: Drag the removable disk icon for your USB device from the desktop into the trash.
Caution: Do not remove a USB device before completing the procedure above or you may lose data from the flash drive.
2. Pull the USB device or cable out of the USB port on the front of the product. Parent topic: Using External USB Devices with Your Product
Viewing and Printing from the LCD Screen
See these sections to view and print photos or other files displayed on your product's LCD screen. Printing JPEG Photos Printing TIFF and PDF Files Parent topic: Using External USB Devices with Your Product
Printing JPEG Photos
You can select JPEG photos for printing as you view them on the LCD screen. 1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Memory Device. 3. Select JPEG.
Note: If you have more than 999 JPEG images on your device, the images are divided into groups, and you must first select the group you want to display.
4. Do one of the following to select your photos: · In Tile View, select the thumbnail images of the photos you want to print. · In Single View, select the thumbnail image of the photo you want to print, then press the left or right arrow buttons to scroll through and select additional photos, or select Tile View to return to the thumbnail image view and select additional photos.
· To select all photos, select the menu icon and select Select All Images.
248

5. Select Proceed to Print.
6. To change the print settings, select Basic Settings and select the necessary settings.
7. To adjust the photos (adjustments modify only your printed copies, not the original files), select Advanced and make the necessary adjustments.
8. Use the numeric keypad on the control panel or select Copies on the LCD screen and use the numeric keypad on the screen to select the number of copies (up to 99).

9. When you are ready to print, select the Print icon.

Note: To cancel printing, select the cancel button or select Cancel on the LCD screen, then select Cancel again to confirm.

Print Setting Options - JPEG Mode Parent topic: Viewing and Printing from the LCD Screen Print Setting Options - JPEG Mode Select the print settings you want to use when printing a JPEG from a USB device.

Note: Not all options or settings may be available, depending on the file format.

Basic Settings

Print settings Paper Setting
B&W Color

Available options
Various paper size and type settings
--
--

Description Select the paper source that you want to use.
Prints a color photo in black and white. Prints a color photo in its original colors.

Advanced settings

Print settings Layout

Available options 1-up 20-up Index

Description Print one photo per page. Print 20 photos per page. Print numbered photo thumbnails with date information.

249

Print settings Fit Frame
Quality Date Fix Photo
Fix Red-Eye

Available options On
Off Standard Best Various date formats
Various settings
Enhance Off Off On

Description
Automatically crops the photo to fit into the selected photo layout.
Turns off automatic cropping.
Provides good quality for most prints.
Provides the highest quality for special prints.
Prints the date the photo was taken on the photo in the format you select.
Automatically adjusts the brightness, contrast, and saturation of the photo based on the setting that is selected.
Turns off automatic adjustments.
Automatically fixes the red-eye effect in photos; see Note below.

Note: Fix Red-Eye makes corrections to printouts, not the original photo files. Depending on the type of photo, parts of the image other than the eyes may be corrected.
Parent topic: Printing JPEG Photos
Printing TIFF and PDF Files
You can select and print TIFF or PDF files from a USB flash drive. 1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Memory Device. 3. Select TIFF or PDF .
You see a list of the available files. 4. Select the file you want to print.
You see information about the file. 5. Do the following as necessary:
· To print more than one copy, use the numeric keypad on the control panel or select Copies on the LCD screen and use the numeric keypad on the screen to select the number of copies (up to 99).

250

· To change the print settings, select Basic Settings or Advanced and select the necessary settings.

6. When you are ready to print, select the Print icon.

Note: To cancel printing, select the cancel button or select Cancel on the LCD screen, then select Cancel again to confirm.

Print Setting Options - TIFF Mode Print Setting Options - PDF Mode Parent topic: Viewing and Printing from the LCD Screen Print Setting Options - TIFF Mode Select the print settings you want to use when printing a TIFF from a USB device.

Note: Not all options or settings may be available, depending on the file format.

Basic Settings

Print settings Paper Setting
B&W Color

Available options
Various paper size and type settings
--
--

Description Select the paper source that you want to use.
Prints a color photo in black and white. Prints a color photo in its original colors.

Advanced settings

Print settings Layout
Fit Frame

Available options 1-up 20-up Index On
Off

Description Print one photo per page. Print 20 photos per page. Print numbered photo thumbnails with date information. Automatically crops the photo to fit into the selected photo layout. Turns off automatic cropping.

251

Print settings Quality
Print Order
Date

Available options Standard Best Last Page on Top First Page on Top Various date formats

Description Provides good quality for most prints. Provides the highest quality for special prints. Select the printing order for multi-page documents.
Prints the date the photo was taken on the photo in the format you select.

Parent topic: Printing TIFF and PDF Files Print Setting Options - PDF Mode
Select the print settings you want to use when printing a PDF from a USB device.

Note: Not all options or settings may be available, depending on the file format.

Basic Settings

Print settings Paper Setting
B&W Color

Available options
Various paper size and type settings
--
--

Description Select the paper source that you want to use.
Prints a color photo in black and white. Prints a color photo in its original colors.

Advanced settings

Print settings 2-Sided
Print Order

Available options Off On Binding (Copy) Last Page on Top First Page on Top

Description Two-sided printing is off. Two-sided printing is on. Select the binding position for the document. Select the printing order for multi-page documents.

Parent topic: Printing TIFF and PDF Files

252

Transferring Files on a USB Device
You can transfer files to and from a USB device inserted into the USB port on the front of your product. Setting Up File Sharing for File Transfers from Your Computer Transferring Files from a USB Device to Your Computer Parent topic: Using External USB Devices with Your Product
Setting Up File Sharing for File Transfers from Your Computer
Before you transfer files from a computer to a USB device inserted into the USB port on the front of your product, you may need to set up your product's file sharing settings. Caution: Remove the USB device before you change this setting or you may lose data from the device. Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access these settings, contact your administrator for assistance. 1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Memory Device Interface.
You see a screen like this:
3. Select Memory Device and make sure it is set to Enable. 253

4. Select File Sharing. 5. Select the way your computer is connected to the product: either USB or Network. Parent topic: Transferring Files on a USB Device Related tasks Disconnecting a USB Device
Transferring Files from a USB Device to Your Computer
You can transfer files to and from a USB device inserted into the USB port on the front of your product and a computer connected to your product.
Note: Do not transfer files to and from a USB device while you are printing from the device.
1. Make sure your product is connected to a computer. 2. Insert a USB device or its USB cable into the USB port on the front of your product. 3. Do one of the following to access your USB device files from your computer:
· Windows: Open the My Computer, Computer, This PC, or Windows Explorer utility, then select the removable disk icon.
· Mac with a USB connection: Look for the removable disk icon on your desktop, then select it. · Mac with a network connection: Select the hard drive icon on your desktop or select Computer
from the Go menu, select your product in the SHARED section of the sidebar (you may need to widen the sidebar to see the name), and select the USBSTORAGE icon. 4. Select the folder that contains your files. 5. Drag the files you want to transfer to the desired folder on your computer or on your USB device.
Note: Your product's LCD screen does not update to display new information about your USB device after you copy files to it or delete files from it. Remove and insert the USB device to update the information.
Parent topic: Transferring Files on a USB Device Related tasks Connecting a USB Device
254

Replacing the Ink Supply Unit (Ink Pack), Maintenance Box, and Cassette Rollers
When the ink pack is expended, or the maintenance box and cassette rollers are at the end of their service life, you need to replace them. The maintenance box stores ink that gets flushed from the system during print head cleaning.
Note: Please dispose of your used Epson branded ink packs and maintenance boxes responsibly and in accordance with local requirements. If you would like to return your used ink packs and maintenance boxes to Epson for proper disposal, please go to epson.com/recycle for more information.
Ink Pack Safety Instructions Check Ink and Maintenance Box Status Purchase Epson Ink Packs and Maintenance Boxes Removing and Installing the Ink Pack Replacing the Maintenance Box Replacing the Paper Feed Rollers Resetting the Roller Counter on the LCD Screen
Ink Pack Safety Instructions
· Keep ink packs and maintenance boxes out of the reach of children and do not drink the ink. · Be careful when you handle used ink packs; there may be ink remaining around the ink supply port. If
ink gets on your skin, wash it off with soap and water. If it gets in your eyes, flush them immediately with water. If discomfort or vision problems continue after a thorough flushing, see a doctor immediately. If ink gets in your mouth, see a doctor right away. · Do not put your hand inside the product or touch the ink pack during printing. · Install a new ink pack immediately after removing the expended one. Leaving the ink pack uninstalled can dry out the print head and may prevent the product from printing. · If you need to remove an ink pack temporarily, make sure you protect the ink pack from dirt and dust. Store the ink pack in the same environment as the printer. Because the ink supply port is equipped with a valve designed to contain the release of excess ink, there is no need to supply your own covers or plugs. · Do not remove or tear the label on the ink pack; this can cause leakage.
255

· Do not remove the transparent seal from the ink supply area. This may cause the ink pack to become unusable.
· Do not touch the green IC chip on the side of the handle. This may prevent normal operation. · Do not shake ink packs too vigorously; otherwise ink may leak. · Do not drop or knock the ink pack against hard objects; otherwise ink may leak. · Use an ink pack before the date printed on its package. · Do not disassemble an ink pack or a maintenance box. Ink may get in your eyes or on your skin. · Store ink packs in a cool, dark place. · After bringing an ink pack inside from a cold storage site, allow it to warm up at room temperature for
at least 12 hours before using it. · Store ink packs with the bottom facing down. · To help protect your print head, a variable ink safety reserve remains in the ink supply unit when your
printer notifies you to replace the ink pack. The yields quoted for you do not include this reserve. · You cannot use the ink pack supplied with the product as a replacement ink pack. It must be used for
initial setup. Parent topic: Replacing the Ink Supply Unit (Ink Pack), Maintenance Box, and Cassette Rollers
Check Ink and Maintenance Box Status
Your product and its software will let you know when ink is low or expended, or when the maintenance box needs to be replaced.
Note: When using the PCL or PostScript (PS3) printer software with the product, you can check ink and maintenance box status by using the product buttons or the utilities included with the standard Epson printer software. To download the standard Epson printer software, visit epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America) and select your product.
Checking Ink Status on the LCD Screen Checking Ink and Maintenance Box Status - Windows Checking Ink and Maintenance Box Status - Mac Parent topic: Replacing the Ink Supply Unit (Ink Pack), Maintenance Box, and Cassette Rollers Related tasks Removing and Installing the Ink Pack Replacing the Maintenance Box
256

Checking Ink Status on the LCD Screen
When your ink pack is low or expended, you see a message on the LCD screen. Follow the steps on the LCD screen to replace the ink pack. You can also check the status of the ink pack and maintenance box from the product control panel. 1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select the icon.
The ink and maintenance box levels are displayed. Note: The displayed ink and maintenance box levels are approximate. Parent topic: Check Ink and Maintenance Box Status Related tasks Removing and Installing the Ink Pack Replacing the Maintenance Box
Checking Ink and Maintenance Box Status - Windows
A low ink reminder appears if you try to print when ink is low. You can also check your ink or maintenance box status at any time using a utility on your Windows computer. 1. To check your status, access the Windows Desktop and double-click the icon for your product in
the right side of the Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click . Then click Details.
257

You see this window:
2. Replace or reinstall the maintenance box or ink pack as indicated on the screen. Note: If the ink pack installed in the product is broken, incompatible with the product model, or improperly installed, Epson Status Monitor will not display an accurate ink status.
Parent topic: Check Ink and Maintenance Box Status Related tasks Removing and Installing the Ink Pack Replacing the Maintenance Box
258

Checking Ink and Maintenance Box Status - Mac
You can check the status of your ink and maintenance box using a utility on your Mac. 1. In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences. Select Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or
Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options & Supplies. Select Utility and select Open Printer Utility. 2. Select EPSON Status Monitor. You see this window:
3. Do the following as necessary: · You can update the ink and maintenance box status by clicking Update. 259

· Replace or reinstall the maintenance box or an ink pack as indicated on the screen.
Note: If an ink pack installed in the product is broken, incompatible with the product model, or improperly installed, Epson Status Monitor will not display an accurate ink status.
Parent topic: Check Ink and Maintenance Box Status Related tasks Removing and Installing the Ink Pack Replacing the Maintenance Box
Purchase Epson Ink Packs and Maintenance Boxes
U.S. and Canada: You can purchase genuine Epson ink, maintenance boxes, and paper at epson.com (U.S. sales) or epson.ca (Canadian sales). You can also purchase supplies from an Epson authorized reseller. To find the nearest one, call 800-GO-EPSON (800-463-7766) in the U.S. or 800-807-7766 in Canada. Latin America: You can purchase genuine Epson ink, maintenance boxes, and paper from an Epson authorized reseller. To find the nearest reseller, visit latin.epson.com or call your nearest Epson sales office.
Note: Your printer is designed to work only with genuine Epson-brand ink packs. Other brands of ink packs and ink supplies are not compatible and, even if described as compatible, may not function properly or at all. Epson periodically provides firmware updates to address issues of security, performance, minor bug fixes and ensure the printer functions as designed. These updates may affect the functionality of third-party ink. Non-Epson branded or altered Epson ink packs that functioned prior to a firmware update may not continue to function. The included initial ink pack is designed for reliable printer setup and cannot be used as a replacement ink pack or resold. After setup, the remaining ink is available for printing. Yields are based on ISO 24711 in default mode, printing continuously. Yields vary due to print images, settings, and temperatures. Printing infrequently reduces yields. Your ink pack must be installed with ink for printing and printer maintenance. For print quality, some ink remains in the replaced ink pack.
Ink Supply Unit (Ink Pack) and Maintenance Box Part Numbers Parent topic: Replacing the Ink Supply Unit (Ink Pack), Maintenance Box, and Cassette Rollers
260

Ink Supply Unit (Ink Pack) and Maintenance Box Part Numbers
Use these part numbers when you order or purchase new ink packs or a new maintenance box. U.S. and Canada

Ink color Black

Part number Standard-capacity
T12G120

High-capacity T12H120

Extra-high capacity
T12J120

Maintenance box part number: C9382 Latin America

Ink color Black

Part number Standard-capacity T12B120-AL

High-capacity T12C120-AL

Maintenance box part number: C9382 Parent topic: Purchase Epson Ink Packs and Maintenance Boxes
Removing and Installing the Ink Pack
If the ink pack is low or expended, a message appears on your product and on your computer screen. Make sure you have your replacement ink pack handy before you begin. You must install the new ink pack immediately after removing the old one.

Caution: Make sure you follow all safety precautions when handling the ink pack. See the link below for more information.

1. Select How To. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions to replace the expended ink pack. Parent topic: Replacing the Ink Supply Unit (Ink Pack), Maintenance Box, and Cassette Rollers Related concepts Purchase Epson Ink Packs and Maintenance Boxes

261

Replacing the Maintenance Box
If the maintenance box is full, a message appears on your product's LCD screen. Follow the steps on the LCD screen to replace the maintenance box. Make sure you have a new maintenance box before you begin.
Note: When the maintenance box is full, you cannot print or clean the print head until it is replaced. However, you can perform non-printing functions such as scanning.
Note: If necessary, select the icon on the LCD, then select How To > Replace Maintenance Box and press the OK button to view the instructions.
Note: In some print cycles a small amount of surplus ink may be collected in the maintenance box. To prevent ink leakage from the maintenance box, the product is designed to stop printing when the absorbing capacity of the maintenance box has reached its limit. Whether and how often this is required will vary according to the number of pages you print, the type of material you print on and the number of cleaning cycles that the printer performs.
Note the following precautions when replacing the maintenance box: · Do not remove the maintenance box or its cover except when replacing the maintenance box;
otherwise, ink may leak. · Do not touch the green chip on the side of the maintenance box. · Do not tilt the maintenance box after removing it or ink may leak. · Do not touch the openings in the maintenance box or you may get ink on you. · Do not drop the maintenance box or subject it to strong shocks. · If you cannot replace the cover, the maintenance box may not be installed correctly. Remove and
reinstall the maintenance box. · Do not store the maintenance box in high or freezing temperatures. · Do not replace the maintenance box during printing; otherwise, ink may leak. · Keep the maintenance box out of direct sunlight. Parent topic: Replacing the Ink Supply Unit (Ink Pack), Maintenance Box, and Cassette Rollers Related concepts Purchase Epson Ink Packs and Maintenance Boxes
262

Replacing the Paper Feed Rollers
When the paper feed rollers in the paper cassettes need to be replaced, you see a message on the LCD screen. (These are also referred to as "pickup rollers".) There are different paper feed rollers for the internal paper cassette (Paper Cassette 1) and the optional paper cassettes available for the printer. Make sure you install the correct paper feed rollers for the paper cassette. · For Paper Cassette 1, use the "Paper Feed Roller for Cassette A" (C12C938261) · For Paper Cassettes 2 through 4, use the "Paper Feed Roller for Cassette B" (C12C938281) Refer to the instructions in the paper feed roller packaging when replacing the paper feed rollers. There are also replacement videos available on your product's support page. Reset the maintenance roller counter for the paper cassette to keep track of roller usage. Parent topic: Replacing the Ink Supply Unit (Ink Pack), Maintenance Box, and Cassette Rollers Related tasks Resetting the Roller Counter on the LCD Screen
Resetting the Roller Counter on the LCD Screen
You must reset the roller counter after replacing the cassette rollers to clear the roller replacement message and to keep track of roller usage correctly. 1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Maintenance > Pickup roller information. 3. Select Reset Counter. 4. Select the paper cassette in which you replaced the rollers, if necessary. 5. Select Yes. 6. Select Yes again to confirm the reset. 7. If you want to feed a sheet of paper to check the roller installation, select Yes. (Otherwise, select
No.) 8. If you selected Yes, you can select Run to perform a Paper Guide Cleaning cycle, or select Finish
to exit. 9. Press the home button to exit. Parent topic: Replacing the Ink Supply Unit (Ink Pack), Maintenance Box, and Cassette Rollers
263

Related tasks Cleaning the Paper Guide
264

Adjusting Print Quality
If your print quality declines, you may need to run a utility to clean or align the print head.
Note: If you are using your Epson product with the Windows 10 S operating system, you cannot use the software described in this section. You also cannot download and install any Epson product software from the Epson website for use with Windows 10 S; you must obtain software only from the Windows Store.
Note: When using the PCL or PostScript (PS3) printer software with the product, you can clean and align the print head and run a nozzle check by using the printer buttons or the utilities included with the standard Epson printer software. To download the standard Epson printer software, visit epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America) and select your product.
If running these utilities does not solve the problem, you may need to replace the ink pack. Print Head Maintenance Cleaning the Paper Guide Cleaning the Translucent Film Checking the Number of Sheets on the LCD Screen
Print Head Maintenance
If your printouts become too light, or you see dark or light bands across them, you may need to clean the print head nozzles. Cleaning uses ink, so clean the nozzles only if print quality declines. You can check for clogged nozzles before you clean them so you don't clean them unnecessarily.
Note: You cannot clean the print head if ink is expended, and may not be able to clean it when ink is low.
Print Head Nozzle Check Print Head Cleaning Print Head Alignment Parent topic: Adjusting Print Quality
Print Head Nozzle Check
You can print a nozzle check pattern to check for clogged nozzles.
265

Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel Checking the Nozzles Using a Computer Utility Parent topic: Print Head Maintenance Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel You can check the print head nozzles using the control panel on your product. 1. Make sure there are no errors on the LCD screen. 2. Load a few sheets of plain paper in the product. 3. Press the home button, if necessary. 4. Select Maintenance >Print Head Nozzle Check . 5. Select Print and press the OK button.
The nozzle pattern prints. 6. Check the printed pattern to see if there are gaps in the lines.
Print head is clean
Print head needs cleaning
266

7. Do one of the following: · If there are no gaps, select O. · If there are gaps or the pattern is faint, select X.
8. Follow the instructions on the screen to clean the print head, check the nozzles, and repeat the process as necessary.
Caution: Never turn off the product or open the front cover during a cleaning cycle or you may not be able to print.
If you don't see any improvement after cleaning the print head up to 3 times, wait at least 12 hours without printing. Then try cleaning the print head again. If quality still does not improve, contact Epson support. Parent topic: Print Head Nozzle Check Related tasks Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel Loading Paper in the Paper Cassettes and Rear Paper Tray Checking the Nozzles Using a Computer Utility You can check the print head nozzles using a utility on your Windows or Mac computer. 1. Make sure there are no errors on the LCD screen and the output tray is extended. 2. Load a few sheets of plain paper in the product. 3. Do one of the following:
· Windows: Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the icon for your product in the right side of the Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click .
· Mac: In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences or System Settings. Select Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options & Supplies. Select Utility and select Open Printer Utility.
4. Select Nozzle Check or Print Head Nozzle Check.
267

You see a window like this: 5. Click Print.
268

6. Check the printed pattern to see if there are gaps in the lines. Print head is clean
Print head needs cleaning
7. Do one of the following: · If there are no gaps, click Finish. · If there are gaps or the pattern is faint, clean the print head.
If you don't see any improvement after cleaning the print head up to 3 times, turn the product off and wait at least 12 hours. Then check the print head nozzles and try cleaning the print head again, if necessary. If quality still does not improve, contact Epson. Parent topic: Print Head Nozzle Check Related tasks Cleaning the Print Head Using a Computer Utility Loading Paper in the Paper Cassettes and Rear Paper Tray
269

Print Head Cleaning
If print quality has declined and the nozzle check pattern indicates clogged nozzles, you can clean the print head. Note: You cannot clean the print head if ink is expended, and may not be able to clean it when ink is low. You must replace the ink pack first. Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel Cleaning the Print Head Using a Computer Utility Parent topic: Print Head Maintenance Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel You can clean the print head using the control panel on your product. 1. Make sure there are no errors on the LCD screen. 2. Load a few sheets of plain paper in the product. 3. Press the home button, if necessary. 4. Select Maintenance > Print Head Cleaning. 5. Select Start to clean the print head.
When the cleaning cycle is finished, a nozzle check pattern is printed. Caution: Never turn off the product or open the front cover during a cleaning cycle or you may not be able to print.
270

6. Check the printed pattern to see if there are gaps in the lines. Print head is clean
Print head needs cleaning
7. Do one of the following: · If there are no gaps, select O . · If there are gaps or the pattern is faint, select X .
If you don't see any improvement after cleaning the print head up to 3 times, wait at least 12 hours without printing. Then try cleaning the print head again. If quality still does not improve, contact Epson. Parent topic: Print Head Cleaning Cleaning the Print Head Using a Computer Utility You can clean the print head using a utility on your Windows or Mac computer. 1. Make sure there are no errors on the LCD screen. 2. Load a few sheets of plain paper in the product.
271

3. Do one of the following: · Windows: Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the icon for your product in the right side of the Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click . · Mac: In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences or System Settings. Select Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options & Supplies. Select Utility and select Open Printer Utility.
4. Select Head Cleaning or Print Head Cleaning. You see a window like this:
5. Click Start to begin the cleaning cycle. The power light flashes throughout the cleaning cycle and stays on when the cleaning cycle is finished.
6. When the cleaning cycle is finished, you can check to see if the nozzles are clean; click Print Nozzle Check Pattern and click Print.
272

7. Check the printed pattern to see if there are gaps in the lines. Print head is clean
Print head needs cleaning
· If there are no gaps, click Finish. · If there are gaps or the pattern is faint, click Clean to clean the print head again. If you don't see any improvement after cleaning the print head up to 3 times, turn off the product and wait at least 12 hours. Then check the print head nozzles and try cleaning the print head again, if necessary. If quality still does not improve, contact Epson. Parent topic: Print Head Cleaning
Print Head Alignment
If your printouts become grainy or blurry, you notice misalignment of vertical lines, or you see dark or light horizontal bands, you may need to align the print head. Note: Banding may also occur if your print head nozzles need cleaning.
273

Aligning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel Adjusting the Print Quality Using the Product Control Panel Parent topic: Print Head Maintenance Aligning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel You can align the print head using the control panel on your product. 1. Make sure there are no errors on the LCD screen. 2. Load a few sheets of plain paper in the product. 3. Press the home button, if necessary. 4. Select Maintenance > Print Head Alignment. 5. Select one of the following options:
· Ruled Line Alignment if vertical lines in your printout are misaligned. · Horizontal Alignment if your printout contains horizontal banding. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions to print an alignment sheet. Note: Do not cancel printing while you are printing head alignment patterns. Parent topic: Print Head Alignment Adjusting the Print Quality Using the Product Control Panel You can adjust the print quality using the control panel on your product. 1. Make sure there are no errors on the LCD screen. 2. Load a few sheets of plain paper in the product. 3. Press the home button, if necessary. 4. Select Maintenance > Print Quality Adjustment. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to print a nozzle check pattern.
274

6. Check the printed pattern to see if there are gaps in the lines. Print head is clean
Print head needs cleaning
7. Do one of the following: · If there are no gaps, select O . · If there are gaps or the pattern is faint, select X.
8. Follow the on-screen instructions to print an alignment sheet. Note: Do not cancel printing while you are printing head alignment patterns.
9. Continue following the on-screen instructions to finish the print quality adjustment. Parent topic: Print Head Alignment Related tasks Loading Paper in the Paper Cassettes and Rear Paper Tray
275

Cleaning the Paper Guide
If you see ink on the back of a printout, you can clean the paper guide rollers to remove any excess ink. 1. If printouts are smeared or scuffed, load plain paper in the paper source that you want to clean in this
size: Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm]) or A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm]). 2. Press the home button, if necessary. 3. Select Maintenance > Paper Guide Cleaning. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions to clean the paper guide. 5. Repeat these steps as necessary until the paper comes out clean. Parent topic: Adjusting Print Quality Related tasks Loading Paper in the Paper Cassettes and Rear Paper Tray
Cleaning the Translucent Film
If the print quality has not improved after aligning the print head and cleaning the paper path, the translucent film inside the product may be smeared with ink. To clean the printer head path, use the following: · Several cotton swabs · ¼ cup (59 ml) water containing 2 to 3 drops of mild dish detergent · A small flashlight
Caution: Do not use any other liquid to clean the translucent film or you may damage your product.
1. Turn off the product. 2. Unplug the power cable. 3. Disconnect any connected cables.
276

4. Open the printer cover. 5. Using the flashlight, check the translucent film shown here for ink smears.
277

Translucent film

Print head rail

Caution: Do not touch the print head rail or you may not be able to print. Do not wipe off the grease on the rail.
6. Moisten a cotton swab with the water and detergent mixture and squeeze out any excess moisture, then lightly wipe the ink off the translucent film.

Caution: Do not press too hard on the film or you may dislocate the anchor springs and damage your product.
7. Use a new, dry cotton swab to dry the translucent film. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 as necessary to clean all ink smears. 9. When the translucent film is dry and free of any fibers, close the printer cover. 10. Reconnect any disconnected cables, plug in the power cord, and turn on the product. Parent topic: Adjusting Print Quality
Checking the Number of Sheets on the LCD Screen
You can view the number of sheets of paper that have fed through the product on the LCD screen. 1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Settings > Print Counter to view the number of prints printed since you purchased the
printer.
278

3. Select Print Sheet and follow the on-screen instructions to print a detailed sheet of the printer's usage history.
Parent topic: Adjusting Print Quality
279

Cleaning and Transporting Your Product
See these sections if you need to clean or transport your product. Cleaning Your Product Cleaning the Scanner Glass Cleaning the Automatic Document Feeder Transporting Your Product
Cleaning Your Product
To keep your product working at its best, you should clean it several times a year. Close the output tray and paper support when you are not using the product to protect it from dust.
Caution: Do not use a hard brush, alcohol, or paint thinner to clean the product or you may damage it. Do not use oil or other lubricants inside the product or let water get inside it.
1. Turn off the product. 2. Unplug the power cable. 3. Disconnect any connected cables. 4. Remove all the paper. 5. Clean the scanner glass with a soft, lint-free cloth (microfiber is recommended), moistened with a
little glass cleaner.
Caution: Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the glass and do not press the glass surface with any force.
6. Clean the outer case and control panel with a soft, dry cloth. Do not use liquid or chemical cleansers. Parent topic: Cleaning and Transporting Your Product
Cleaning the Scanner Glass
You can clean the scanner glass if your copies or scanned images are smeared.
Caution: Do not use a hard brush, alcohol, or paint thinner to clean the product or you may damage it. Do not use oil or other lubricants inside the product or let water get inside it.
280

Warning: Do not trap your fingers when opening or closing the document cover or you may be injured. 1. Open the document cover. 2. Use a soft, dry, clean cloth to clean the surface of the scanner glass.
Note: If the glass is stained with grease or dirt, use a small amount of glass cleaner on a soft, dry cloth to remove it. Wipe off all remaining liquid after removing the dirt. Caution: Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the glass and do not press the glass surface with any force. Be careful not to scratch or damage the glass; this can affect scan quality. 3. Close the document cover. Parent topic: Cleaning and Transporting Your Product
Cleaning the Automatic Document Feeder
You can clean the ADF if you see lines or streaks in your copies or scanned images. Caution: Do not use a hard brush, alcohol, or paint thinner to clean the product or you may damage it. Do not use oil or other lubricants inside the product or let water get inside it. 1. Open the ADF cover.
281

2. Use a soft, lint-free cloth (microfiber is recommended) moistened with a little water to clean the rollers and the interior of the ADF.
Caution: Do not use a dry cloth; you may damage the ADF rollers. Do not use the ADF until the rollers have dried.
282

3. Close the ADF cover and open the document cover. 4. Clean the areas indicated in the image:
283

Caution: Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the glass and do not press the glass surface with any force. Be careful not to scratch or damage the glass; this can affect scan quality. Note: If the glass is stained with grease or dirt, use a small amount of glass cleaner on a soft, dry cloth to remove it. Wipe off all remaining liquid after removing the dirt. If a black line appears when copying from the ADF, location B in the following image may be dirty. Place the marked copy (A) on the scanner glass and clean the portion of the glass that lines up with the black line. Clean the same location on the underside of the ADF as well.
Parent topic: Cleaning and Transporting Your Product
Transporting Your Product
If you need to store your product or transport it a long distance, prepare it for transportation as described here.
284

Caution: During transportation and storage, follow these guidelines: · Because the product is heavy, four or more people should lift and carry it using the hand positions
shown:
· Avoid tilting the product, positioning it vertically, or turning it upside down; otherwise ink may leak. · Leave the ink pack installed; otherwise the print head can dry out. · Leave the maintenance box installed; otherwise ink may leak. Note: Before storing your product for a long period, replace low, expended, or expired ink to help prevent the print head from drying out. Store your product in a cool, dry place. 1. Turn off the product. 2. Remove all the paper from the product. 3. Unplug the power cable. 4. Disconnect any connected cables.
285

5. Close the paper stopper on the output tray, if necessary, and push in the output tray. Lift and remove the output tray from the product. Store it separately.
6. Close the ink pack tray cover and lock it.
7. If the optional printer stand and paper cassettes are installed, uninstall and remove them before lifting the product.
8. Place the product in its original packing materials, if possible, or use equivalent materials with cushioning around the product. Make sure the box adequately protects the product control panel.
Keep the product level during transportation. Parent topic: Cleaning and Transporting Your Product
286

Related tasks Installing the Optional Paper Cassette Units
287

Administering Your Product
Follow the instructions in these sections to configure your product's administrator settings using the Web Config software.
Note: Before you can configure system administration settings, you must connect the product to a network.
Accessing the Web Config Utility Changing the Administrator Password in Web Config Configuring Product Settings Configuring Security Settings Using Your Product on a Secure Network Setting Up Universal Print (Microsoft) Using Epson Device Admin Configuration Software
Accessing the Web Config Utility
You can select your product's network settings and confirm its operating status using a web browser. You do this by accessing your product's built-in Web Config utility from a computer or other device that is connected to the same network as your product.
Note: You can also access the Web Config utility from the product information area in the Epson Smart Panel app.
1. Print a network status sheet. 2. Locate the IP address for your product that is listed on the network status sheet. 3. On a computer or other device connected to the same network as your product, open a web
browser. 4. Enter your product's IP address into the address bar.
Note: The printer uses a self-signed certificate when accessing HTTPS. This may cause a warning message when you access Web Config. This does not indicate a problem and can be ignored.
5. On the first visit to the Web Config utility, you will be prompted to set an administrator password. The administrator password is required to access the full capabilities of the Web Config utility.
288

You see the available Web Config utility options. Note: The administrator password is required to access the full capabilities of the Web Config utility. The default password is the product's serial number. Check the label on your product to locate the serial number.
Parent topic: Administering Your Product Related tasks Changing the Administrator Password in Web Config Printing a Network Status Sheet Using the Epson Smart Panel Mobile App
Changing the Administrator Password in Web Config
You can set an administrator password using your product's control panel, Web Config, or EpsonNet Config. You use the same administrator password in all cases. Note: If you forget your administrator password, contact Epson for support. 1. Access Web Config and select the Product Security tab. 2. Select Change Administrator Password. 3. Enter a user name, if necessary.
289

4. Do one of the following: · If you have set an administrator password before, enter the current password, then enter and confirm the new password in the fields provided. · If you have not set an administrator password before, enter a new password and confirm it in the fields provided.
5. Click OK.
Note: To restore the administrator password to the default value, select Restore Default Settings on the Change Administrator Password screen.
Parent topic: Administering Your Product Related tasks Accessing the Web Config Utility
Configuring Product Settings
Follow the instructions in these sections to configure your product's control panel settings using the Web Config software. Checking Status Information Managing the Network Connection Setting Control Panel Options Configuring an Email Server Sending Email Notifications Adjusting Power Saving Settings Importing and Exporting Product Settings Updating Firmware Using Web Config Synchronizing the Date and Time with a Time Server Clearing the Internal Memory Enabling Periodic Cleaning Powering Off or Rebooting the Product Remotely Restoring Default Product Settings Parent topic: Administering Your Product
290

Checking Status Information
You can check information about the printer using the Web Config interface.
Note: Depending on the features of your product, not all of the options below may be available. Some options are not available unless you are logged in to the Web Config interface.
1. Enter the IP address of the printer to access Web Config and log in as an administrator, if necessary. 2. Select the Status tab and choose one of the following options:
· Select Product Status to view information such as ink level and maintenance box status. · Select Network Status to view network information such as the IP address and network
connection status. · Select Usage Status to view information about the number of prints and historical information
about the product. · Select Hardware Status to view information about the product functions. · Select Panel Snapshot to view a image of the current LCD screen. Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings Related tasks Accessing the Web Config Utility
Managing the Network Connection
You can check or update the network information for your product using the Web Config interface. 1. Enter the IP address of the product in a web browser and log in as an administrator. 2. Select the Network tab, then select Basic. 3. Check or update the settings as necessary. 4. Select Next to see a summary of the network settings. 5. Select OK to accept the changes.
Note: The network connection will be temporarily interrupted to enable the new settings.
6. Select the other network options as necessary: · Wi-Fi: Displays the current wireless network connection information. Select Setup to run the wireless setup again or Disable Wi-Fi to turn off Wi-Fi.
291

· Wired LAN: Displays the current settings for the wired connection. Change the settings as necessary and then select Next to view the changes. Confirm the information and select OK to apply the changes.
· Wi-Fi Direct: Displays the current settings for the Wi-Fi Direct network. Adjust the settings as necessary and select Next to view the changes. Confirm the information and select OK to apply the changes.
Network Settings
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
Related tasks Accessing the Web Config Utility
Network Settings
The following network settings are available under the Network tab in the Web Config interface.
Basic

Setting Device Name Location Obtain IP Address Set using BOOTP Set using Automatic Private IP Addressing (APIPA) IP Address
Subnet Mask

Description
Displays the Device Name. You can enter a new name to change the name of the device.
Displays a user-entered location for the printer
Sets the IP Address; if set to Manual, enter the information in the appropriate fields
Enables IP addressing using BOOTP
Enables IP addressing using APIPA
Displays the IP address. If you are manually entering the IP address, enter it in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (where xxx is a number between 0 and 255). Make sure the address is unique and does not conflict with any other device on your network.
Displays the subnet mask. If you are manually entering the subnet mask, enter it in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (where xxx is a number between 0 and 255).

292

Setting Default Gateway
DNS Server Setting Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server DNS Host Name Setting DNS Host Name DNS Domain Name Setting DNS Domain Name
Register the network interface address to DNS Proxy Server Setting Proxy Server Proxy Server Port Number

Description
Displays the default gateway address. If you are manually setting the default gateway, enter it in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (where xxx is a number between 0 and 255).
Selects the DNS server setting. If the Obtain IP Address setting is set to Manual, this setting is also set to Manual.
Enter the address of the primary DNS server in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (where xxx is a number between 0 and 255).
Enter the address of the secondary DNS server in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (where xxx is a number between 0 and 255).
Sets the DNS Host Name selection method.
Displays the current DNS Host Name.
Sets the DNS Domain Name selection method
Specifies the DNS domain name. The name must conform to the following format: · Enter between 2 and 249 characters using only the
characters "A-Z", "a-z", "0-9", hyphen "-", and a period "." · The first character cannot be a "0-9", hyphen "-", or a
period "." · The last character cannot be a hyphen "-" or a period "." · Each label in the domain name must be between 1 and 63
characters and separated by a period. · The total number of characters in the host and domain
name must not exceed 251.
Allows you to register the host and domain names through a DHCP server that supports Dynamic DNS
Enables the use of a proxy server
Specifies the name of the proxy server in either IPv4 or FQDN format
Specifies the port number for the proxy server (between 1 and 65535)
293

Setting Proxy Server User Name Proxy Server Password IPv6 Setting IPv6 Privacy Extension IPv6 DHCP Server Setting IPv6 Address
IPv6 Address Default Gateway
IPv6 Link-Local Address IPv6 Stateful Address IPv6 Stateless Address 1 IPv6 Stateless Address 2 IPv6 Stateless Address 3

Description
Specifies the user name for the proxy server (0-255 ASCII characters [0x20-0x7E])
Specifies the password for the proxy server (0-255 ASCII characters [0x20-0x7E])
Enables the use of IPv6 addressing
Enables the use of private IPv6 addresses
Enables the use of a IPv6 DHCP server
Specifies the IPv6 address. The address must conform to the following format:
· xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx / prefix
· xxxx is a hexadecimal number from 1 to 4 digits, and the prefix is a decimal number from 1 to 128.
· If there are consecutive blocks where xxxx is all zeros, it can be omitted as ::. (Only one block can be omitted.)
Specifies the IPv6 address of the default gateway. The address must conform to the following format:
· xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx
· xxxx is a hexadecimal number from 1 to 4 digits
· If there are consecutive blocks where xxxx is all zeros, it can be omitted as ::. (Only one block can be omitted.)
Displays the valid IPv6 Link-Local Address
Displays the valid IPv6 Stateful Address
Displays the valid IPv6 Stateless Address 1
Displays the valid IPv6 Stateless Address 2
Displays the valid IPv6 Stateless Address 3

294

Setting IPv6 Primary DNS Server
IPv6 Secondary DNS Server
IEEE802.11k/v IEEE802.11r Wired LAN Setting Link Speed and Duplex IEEE 802.3az Wi-Fi Direct Setting Wi-Fi Direct SSID Password

Description Specifies the address for the IPv6 primary DNS server. The address must conform to the following format: · xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx · xxxx is a hexadecimal number from 1 to 4 digits · If there are consecutive blocks where xxxx is all zeros, it
can be omitted as ::. (Only one block can be omitted) Specifies the address for the IPv6 secondary DNS server. The address must conform to the following format: · xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx · xxxx is a hexadecimal number from 1 to 4 digits · If there are consecutive blocks where xxxx is all zeros, it
can be omitted as ::. (Only one block can be omitted.) Enables the use of IEEE802.11k/v network environments Enables the use of IEEE802.11r network environments
Description Selects the communication mode for the wired connection Enables the use of IEEE 802.3az network environments
Description Enables the product's Wi-Fi Direct network You can change part of the SSID for the product. Specifies the password for the Wi-Fi Direct network.
Note: Changing the password will disconnect any devices currently connected to the network.
295

Setting Frequency Range
IP Address

Description
Selects the frequency range used by the Wi-Fi Direct network.
Specifies the IP address for the Wi-Fi Direct network. If set to Manual, enter the IP address in the provided fields.

Parent topic: Managing the Network Connection Related tasks Modifying the Wi-Fi Direct Network Name or Password
Setting Control Panel Options
You can configure the behavior of the product control panel using the Web Config interface or the menus on the control panel. 1. Enter the IP address of the product in a web browser and log into Web Config as an administrator. 2. Select and set the following items as necessary:
· Language: Sets the display language · Panel Lock: Requires an administrator login to access some menu settings on the control panel.
The administrator password must be set to enable this feature. · Operation Timeout: Cancels operations and automatically logs out users after a selected time
period. You can select a time period between 10 seconds and 240 minutes. Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings Related tasks Accessing the Web Config Utility
Configuring an Email Server
You can configure an email server using Web Config. 1. Access Web Config and select the Network tab. 2. Select Email Server > Basic. 3. Select the email server settings. 4. Click OK. Email Server Settings

296

Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings Related tasks Accessing the Web Config Utility Email Server Settings You can configure these email server settings in Web Config.

Setting Authentication Method Authenticated Account Authenticated Password
Sender's Email Address
SMTP Server Address SMTP Server Port Number POP3 Server Address POP3 Server Port Number

Options/Description
Select the authentication method that matches your email server
Enter the authenticated account name from 1 to 255 characters long in ASCII
Enter the authenticated password from 1 to 20 characters long in ASCII using A-Z, a-z, 0-9, and these characters:
! # $ % ' * + - . / = ? ^ _ { ! } ~ @
Enter the sender's email address from 1 to 255 characters long in ASCII; do not use a period (.) as the first character or use these characters: ( ) < > [ ] ;
Enter the SMTP server address from 1 to 255 characters long using A-Z, a-z, 0-9, and "-" in IPv4 or FQDN format
Enter the SMTP server port number between 1 and 65535
Enter the POP server address from 1 to 255 characters long using A-Z, a-z, 0-9, and "-" in IPv4 or FQDN format
Enter the POP server port number between 1 and 65535

Parent topic: Configuring an Email Server
Sending Email Notifications
You can set up email notifications that will be sent when an event occurs on the product. You can register up to five destinations.

Note: You must have configured a mail server before setting up notifications.

1. Enter the IP address of the product in a web browser and log into Web Config as an administrator.

297

2. Select the Device Management tab, then select Email Notification. 3. Set the contents of the email subject line by selecting items from the drop-down menus.
Note: You cannot select the same item in both menus. If the Location setting is longer than 32 bytes, it will be truncated in the Subject line.
4. Enter up to five email addresses to receive the notification emails, and select the language of the notification email.
5. In the Notification Settings area, select one or more email addresses to receive a notification for each event.
6. Click OK to apply the settings.
Note: To clear the email notification settings, select Restore Default Settings. This clears all email notification settings, not just the changes made in the current session.
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings Related tasks Accessing the Web Config Utility
Adjusting Power Saving Settings
The product can automatically enter sleep mode or turn off after it has not been used for a while. You can set the delay before the product enters sleep mode or turns off. 1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator. 2. Select the Device Management tab, then select the Power Saving setting. 3. Set Sleep Timer to the number of minutes before the product enters a low-power mode. 4. Select Power Off Timer to set the amount to time of inactivity before the product turns off.
Note: If you are using a printer with the fax feature enabled, select None.
Note: You can also configure the power saving settings using the control panel by selecting Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings and selecting the feature you want to change.
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
298

Related tasks Accessing the Web Config Utility Changing the Sleep Timer Settings Changing the Power Off Timer Settings
Importing and Exporting Product Settings
Follow the instructions in these sections to import and export your product's settings using the Web Config software. Exporting Settings Using Web Config Importing Settings Using Web Config Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings Related tasks Accessing the Web Config Utility Exporting Settings Using Web Config You can export your product's settings and optionally encrypt the settings file with a password. 1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator. 2. Select the Device Management tab, then select Export and Import Setting Value. 3. Select Export. 4. Select the settings you want to export.
Note: If you select a parent category, the child categories are also selected. By default, items that are unique on the network, such as IP address, cannot be selected. If you want to export these items, select Enable to select the individual settings of device. It is recommended that you export only unique items when replacing a product on the network, otherwise you may encounter conflicts on the network.
5. Enter an encryption password, if desired. 6. Click Export and save the file. Parent topic: Importing and Exporting Product Settings Importing Settings Using Web Config You can import settings to your product that you have exported previously. If encryption was used when the settings were exported, obtain the necessary password before you import.
299

1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator. 2. Select the Device Management tab, then select Export and Import Setting Value. 3. Select Import. 4. Click Browse and select the exported settings file. 5. If necessary, enter the decryption password. 6. Click Next. 7. Select the settings to import and click Next. 8. Click OK. The selected settings are imported to the product. Parent topic: Importing and Exporting Product Settings
Updating Firmware Using Web Config
If your product is connected to the Internet, you can update the product firmware using Web Config. 1. Access Web Config and select Device Management > Firmware Update. 2. Click Start to check for the latest firmware. 3. If there is a firmware update, click Start to begin the update.
Note: Make sure the product is not in use and clear any errors on the LCD screen before starting the update. You can also schedule a firmware update by selecting Automatic Firmware Update from the menu.
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings Related tasks Accessing the Web Config Utility
Synchronizing the Date and Time with a Time Server
You can synchronize the product with an NTP time server to set the date and time on the product.
Note: If you are using a CA certificate or Kerberos authentication, it is recommended to use a time server to set the date and time.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
300

2. Select the Device Management tab, then select the Date and Time > Time Server setting. 3. Set Use Time Server to Use. 4. Enter the time server address in Time Server Address. You can use the IPv4, IPv6, or FQDN
format for the address. You are limited to 252 characters. 5. Enter an update interval (up to 10080 minutes) in Update Interval (min). 6. Click OK to update the settings. Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings Related tasks Accessing the Web Config Utility
Clearing the Internal Memory
You can delete the contents of the product's internal memory, such as password-protected print jobs and downloaded PCL fonts and macros using the Web Config interface. You cannot select individual items to delete. 1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator. 2. Select the Device Management tab, then select the Clear Internal Memory Data setting. 3. Select Delete and confirm your selection. Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings Related tasks Accessing the Web Config Utility
Enabling Periodic Cleaning
You can set a schedule to clean the print head using the Web Config interface. 1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator. 2. Select the Device Management tab, then select the Periodic Cleaning setting. 3. Select one of the following options:
· To clean the print head after a print job, select After Printing. · To run a cleaning cycle at a specific time, select Schedule and choose a time from the drop-down
list. Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
301

Related concepts Print Head Cleaning Related tasks Accessing the Web Config Utility
Powering Off or Rebooting the Product Remotely
You can power off or reboot the product using the Web Config interface. 1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator. 2. Select the Device Management tab, then select the Power setting. 3. Select a power option from the drop down menu and select Execute.
Note: After turning off the product, you cannot access Web Config until the product is turned on again.
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings Related tasks Accessing the Web Config Utility
Restoring Default Product Settings
You can reset the product to the default settings using the Web Config interface. 1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator. 2. Select the Device Management tab, then select the Restore Default Settings setting. 3. Select an option from the drop-down list. You can either restore network settings or all data and
settings. 4. Select Execute and confirm your selection to restore the product settings. Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings Related tasks Accessing the Web Config Utility
Configuring Security Settings
Follow the instructions in these sections to configure internal security features for your product using the Web Config software. Connecting an Authentication Device
302

Restricting Features Available for Users Disabling the External Interface Setting Up Password Encryption Working with Audit Logs Restricting PDL File Operations Enabling Program Verification on Start Up Parent topic: Administering Your Product
Connecting an Authentication Device
You can connect an authentication device such as an IC card reader using a USB cable, and check the functionality of the reader using the Web Config interface. 1. Remove the sticker covering the service port on the rear of the product.
303

2. Connect the card reader's USB cable to the service port on the product.
3. Access Web Config and log in using the administrator name and password. 4. Select Device Management > Card Reader. 5. Set the card reader parameters as necessary. 6. Select Check to verify the connection status of the authentication device.
Note: To confirm that the authentication device can recognize an authentication card, hold the card over the reader while you select Check. 7. Click Next. 8. Click OK to confirm the settings. Parent topic: Configuring Security Settings
Restricting Features Available for Users
Follow the instructions in these sections to restrict users from using certain product features and create an administrator password to lock the restrictions using the Web Config software. User Feature Restriction Configuring User Feature Restrictions Parent topic: Configuring Security Settings
304

User Feature Restriction You can restrict available product features for individual users, with different features available to each user. This requires users to log into the product control panel with their user name and password before they can use control panel features. With Windows, you can also restrict printing and scanning from the product software. This requires users to log into the printing or scanning software, and allows the software to authenticate the users before printing or scanning proceeds. For instructions on setting up software restrictions, see the help utility in the printing or scanning software. Parent topic: Restricting Features Available for Users
Configuring User Feature Restrictions You can create up to 10 user accounts and restrict access to control panel features separately for each one.
Note: If you are using an authentication system, it uses the number one user account. If you create other user accounts, use the number two to number 10 user accounts.
1. Access Web Config and select the Product Security tab. 2. Select the Enables Access Control checkbox. 3. If you have configured the product for an LDAP server or IEEE 802.1x network, you can deselect the
Allows printing and scanning without authentication information from a computer checkbox to prevent the product from receiving jobs sent from these sources: · The default operating system driver · A PCL or PostScript printer driver · Web services such as Epson Connect · Smartphones and other mobile devices 4. Click OK. 5. Select User Settings. 6. Click Add. 7. Enter a name for a user in the User Name field following the guidelines on the screen. Use ASCII (0x20-0x7E) characters. 8. Enter a password for the user in the Password field following the guidelines on the screen.
Note: If you need to reset a password, leave the password field blank.
305

9. Select the checkbox for each function you want the user to be able to perform, and deselect the checkbox for each function you want to restrict access to.
10. Click Apply.
Note: When you edit a completed user account, you see a Delete option. Click it to delete a user, if necessary.
Note: You can import and export a list of user features using EpsonNet Config. See the help utility in the software for instructions.
Parent topic: Restricting Features Available for Users
Disabling the External Interface
You can restrict the ability to connect from a computer using a USB connection or accessing a connected USB device or memory card.
Note: Depending on your product features, not all of the options listed below may be available.
1. Access Web Config and select Product Security > External Interface. 2. Select Memory Device and do one of the following:
· Select Disable to prevent access to a USB device or memory card. · Select Enable to allow access to a USB device or memory card. 3. Select PC Connection via USB and do one of the following: · Select Disable to prevent a computer from connecting to the product over a USB connection. · Select Enable to allow a computer to connect to the product over a USB connection. 4. Click OK to save your setting. Parent topic: Configuring Security Settings Related topics Using External USB Devices with Your Product
Setting Up Password Encryption
You can set up password encryption to protect confidential information stored in the product. 1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
306

2. Select the Product Security tab and select Password Encryption. 3. Select On and select OK.
A message appears about restarting the product. Select OK. 4. Turn the product off and then on again to apply the password encryption setting.
Note: The product may take longer than usual to turn on. This is normal.
Parent topic: Configuring Security Settings
Working with Audit Logs
You can enable the Audit Log feature or export audit log data using the Web Config interface. Audit logs can be used to track security issues or identify improper usage. 1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator. 2. Select the Product Security tab, then select the Audit Log setting. 3. Select ON to enable the audit log feature. 4. Select Export to export the audit log data to a CSV file, or select Delete to delete all audit logs. Parent topic: Configuring Security Settings
Restricting PDL File Operations
You can protect files from unauthorized PDL operations using the Web Config interface. 1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator. 2. Select the Product Security tab, then select the File Operations from PDL setting. 3. Select Allowed or Not Allowed to enable or disable PDL file operations and select OK to apply your
setting. Parent topic: Configuring Security Settings
Enabling Program Verification on Start Up
You can check whether unauthorized third parties have tampered with the program when the product starts up using the Web Config interface. 1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator. 2. Select the Product Security tab, then select the Program Verification on Start Up setting. 3. Select ON and then select OK to apply the setting.
307

Parent topic: Configuring Security Settings

Using Your Product on a Secure Network
Follow the instructions in these sections to configure security features for your product on the network using the Web Config software.
Configuring Protocols and Services in Web Config Configuring SSL/TLS Communication Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering Connecting the Product to an IEEE 802.1X Network Using a Digital Certificate
Parent topic: Administering Your Product

Configuring Protocols and Services in Web Config
You can enable or disable protocols using Web Config. 1. Access Web Config, select Network Security, and select Protocol. 2. Select or deselect the checkbox next to the service name to enable or disable a protocol. 3. Configure any other available protocol settings. 4. Click Next. 5. Click OK. 6. Select and configure services and protocol settings as necessary. After the protocols restart, the changes are applied. Protocol Settings Parent topic: Using Your Product on a Secure Network Protocol Settings

Protocols

Name Bonjour iBeacon

Description
Bonjour is used to search for devices and AirPrint
Enable the iBeacon setting to search for the product from iBeacon-enabled devices

308

Name SLP
WSD LLTD LLMNR
LPR RAW(Port9100) IPP FTP SNMPv1/v2c SNMPv3
Bonjour Settings
Setting Use Bonjour Bonjour Name Bonjour Service Name Location Top Priority Protocol Wide-Area Bonjour
iBeacon Settings
Setting Enable iBeacon Transmission

Description SLP is used for push-scanning and network searching in EpsonNet Config Add WSD devices, or print and scan from the WSD port Displays the product on the Windows network map Use name resolution without NetBIOS even if you cannot use DNS Print from to the LPR port Print from the RAW port (Port 9100) Print over the Internet, including AirPrint Print over FTP Remotely set up and monitor your product Remotely set up and monitor your product with the SNMPv3 protocol
Options/Description Search for or use devices through Bonjour Displays the Bonjour name Displays the Bonjour service name Displays the Bonjour location name Selects the protocol that is the top priority for Bonjour printing Enables the Wide-Area Bonjour protocol; register all products on the DNS server to locate them over the segment
Options/Description Enable the iBeacon transmission function

309

SLP Settings Setting Enable SLP
WSD Settings Setting Enable WSD
Printing Timeout (sec)
Scanning Timeout (sec)
Device Name Location LLTD Settings Setting Enable LLTD
Device Name LLMNR Settings Setting Enable LLMNR

Options/Description Enable the SLP function to use the Push Scan function and network searching in EpsonNet Config
Options/Description Enable adding devices using WSD, and printing and scanning from the WSD port Enter the communication timeout value for WSD printing between 3 and 3,600 seconds Enter the communication timeout value for WSD scanning between 3 and 3,600 seconds Displays the WSD device name Displays the WSD location name
Options/Description Enable LLTD to display the product in the Windows network map Displays the LLTD device name
Options/Description Enable LLMNR to use name resolution without NetBIOS, even if you cannot use DNS

310

LPR Settings
Setting Allow LPR Port Printing Printing Timeout (sec)

Options/Description
Allow printing from the LPR port
Enter the timeout value for LPR printing between 0 and 3,600 seconds

RAW (Port9100) Settings
Setting Allow RAW (Port9100) Printing Printing Timeout (sec)

Options/Description
Allow printing from the RAW port (Port 9100)
Enter the timeout value for RAW port (Port 9100) printing between 0 and 3,600 seconds

RAW (Custom Port) Settings

Setting Allow RAW (Custom Port) Printing Port Number
Printing Timeout (sec)

Options/Description
Allow printing from the RAW port (custom port)
Enter the port number for RAW printing between 1024 and 65535 (except 9100, 1865, and 2968)
Enter the timeout value for RAW port (custom port) printing between 0 and 3,600 seconds

IPP Settings

Setting Enable IPP
Allow Non-secure Communication
Communication Timeout (sec)

Options/Description
Enable IPP communication for products that support IPP are displayed (you cannot use AirPrint if disabled)
Allow the printer to communicate without any security measures (IPP)
Enter the timeout value for IPP printing between 0 and 3,600 seconds

311

Setting URL(Network)
URL(Wi-Fi Direct)
Printer Name Location FTP Settings Setting Enable FTP Server Communication Timeout (sec)
SNMPv1/v2c Settings Setting Enable SNMPv1/v2c Access Authority Community Name (Read Only) Community Name (Read/Write) Allow access from Epson tools
SNMPv3 Settings Setting Enable SNMPv3

Options/Description Displays IPP URLs (http and https) when the product is connected using wired LAN or Wi-Fi (the URL is a combined value of the product's IP address, Port number, and IPP printer name) Displays IPP URLs (http and https) when the product is connected using Wi-Fi Direct (the URL is a combined value of the product's IP address, Port number, and IPP printer name) Displays the IPP printer name Displays the IPP location
Options/Description Enable FTP printing for products that support FTP printing Enter the timeout value for FTP communication between 0 and 3,600 seconds
Options/Description Enable SNMPv1/v2c for products that support SNMPv3 Set the access authority when SNMPv1/v2c is enabled to Read Only or Read/Write Enter 0 to 32 ASCII characters Enter 0 to 32 ASCII characters Allow information to be written from Epson tools such as Epson Device Admin
Options/Description Enable SNMPv3 for products that support SNMPv3
312

Setting User Name Authentication Settings Encryption Settings Context Name

Options/Description Enter 1 to 32 characters Select an algorithm and set a password for authentication Select an algorithm and set a password for encryption Enter 1 to 32 characters in Unicode (UTF-8)

Parent topic: Configuring Protocols and Services in Web Config
Configuring SSL/TLS Communication
Follow the instructions in these sections to configure SSL/TLS communication using Web Config. Configuring SSL/TLS Settings Configuring a Server Certificate for the Product Parent topic: Using Your Product on a Secure Network Configuring SSL/TLS Settings If your product supports HTTPS, you can configure SSL/TLS to encrypt communications with your product. 1. Access Web Config and select Network Security tab. 2. Select SSL/TLS and select Basic. 3. Select one of the options for the Encryption Strength setting. 4. Select Enable or Disable for the Redirect HTTP to HTTPS setting as necessary. 5. If necessary, enable a TLS version. 6. Click Next.
You see a confirmation message. 7. Click OK. Parent topic: Configuring SSL/TLS Communication Configuring a Server Certificate for the Product You can configure a server certificate for your product. 1. Access Web Config and select the Network Security tab. 2. Under SSL/TLS, select Certificate.

313

3. Select one of the following options: · CA-signed Certificate: Select Import if you have obtained a CA-signed certificate. Choose the file to import and click OK. · Self-signed Certificate: Select Update if you have not obtained a CA (Certificate Authority)signed certificate and want the product to generate a self-signed certificate.
4. Click Next. You see a confirmation message.
5. Click OK. Parent topic: Configuring SSL/TLS Communication
Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering
Follow the instructions in these sections to configure IPsec/IP traffic filtering using Web Config. About IPsec/IP Filtering Configuring the Default IPsec/IP Filtering Policy Configuring the Group IPsec/IP Filtering Policies IPsec/IP Filtering Policy Settings IPsec/IP Filtering Configuration Examples Configuring an IPsec/IP Filtering Certificate Parent topic: Using Your Product on a Secure Network About IPsec/IP Filtering You can filter traffic to the product over the network based on IP address, service, and port by configuring a default policy that applies to every user or group connecting to the product. For control of individual users or user groups, you can configure group policies.
Note: IPsec is supported only by computers running Windows Vista or later, or Windows Server 2008 or later.
Parent topic: Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering Configuring the Default IPsec/IP Filtering Policy
You can configure the default policy for IPsec/IP traffic filtering using Web Config. 1. Access Web Config and select the Network Security tab. 2. Under IPsec/IP Filtering, select Basic.
314

3. Select Enable to enable IPsec/IP filtering. 4. Select the filtering options you want to use for the default policy. 5. Click Next.
You see a confirmation message. 6. Click OK. Parent topic: Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering Configuring the Group IPsec/IP Filtering Policies You can configure group policies for IPsec/IP traffic filtering using Web Config. 1. Access Web Config and select the Network Security tab. 2. Under IPsec/IP Filtering, select Basic. 3. Click a tab number for the policy number you want to configure. 4. Select the Enable this Group Policy checkbox. 5. Select the filtering options you want to use for this group policy. 6. Click Next.
You see a confirmation message. 7. Click OK. 8. If you want to configure additional group policies, click the next tab number and repeat the
configuration steps as necessary. Parent topic: Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering IPsec/IP Filtering Policy Settings

Default Policy Settings

Setting Access Control
IKE Version

315

Setting Authentication Method Pre-Shared Key Confirm Pre-Shared Key ID Type ID Encapsulation
Remote Gateway(Tunnel Mode) Security Protocol
Algorithm Settings

Options/Description
Select an authentication method, or select Certificate if you have imported a CA-signed certificate
If necessary, enter a pre-shared key between 1 and 127 characters long
Confirm the pre-shared key you entered
If you selected IKEv2 as the IKE Version setting, select the ID type from the list.
If you selected IKEv2 as the IKE Version setting, enter the necessary ID information
If you selected IPsec as the Access Control option, select one of these encapsulation modes:
Transport Mode: if you are using the product on the same LAN; IP packets of layer 4 or later are encrypted
Tunnel Mode: if you are using the product on an Internetcapable network, such as IPsec-VPN; the header and data of IP packets are encrypted
If you selected Tunnel Mode as the Encapsulation option, enter a gateway address between 1 and 39 characters long
If you selected IPsec as the Access Control option, select one of these security protocols:
ESP: to ensure the integrity of authentication and data, and encrypt data
AH: to ensure the integrity of authentication and data; if data encryption is prohibited, you can use IPsec
Select the encryption algorithm settings for the security protocol you selected

316

Group Policy Settings Setting Access Control
Local Address(Printer) Remote Address(Host)
Method of Choosing Port Service Name Transport Protocol
Local Port

Options/Description
Permit Access to permit IP packets to pass through
Refuse Access to prevent IP packets from passing through
IPsec to permit IPsec packets to pass through
Select an IPv4 or IPv6 address that matches your network environment; if the IP address is assigned automatically, select Use auto-obtained IPv4 address
Enter the device's IP address (between 0 and 43 characters long) to control access, or leave blank to control all addresses; if the IP address is assigned automatically, such as by DHCP, the connection may be unavailable, so configure a static address instead
Select the method you want to used for specifying ports
If you selected Service Name as the Method of Choosing Port option, select a service name option here; see the next table for more information
If you selected Port Number as the Method of Choosing Port option, select one of these encapsulation modes:
Any Protocol
TCP
UDP
ICMPv4
See the Group Policy Guidelines table for more information.
If you selected Port Number as the Method of Choosing Port option, and TCP or UDP for the Transport Protocol option, enter the port numbers that control receiving packets (up to 10 ports), separated by commas, for example 25,80,143,5220; leave this setting blank to control all ports; see the next table for more information
317

Setting Remote Port
IKE Version Authentication Method Pre-Shared Key ID Type ID Encapsulation
Remote Gateway(Tunnel Mode)

Options/Description
If you selected Port Number as the Method of Choosing Port option, and TCP or UDP for the Transport Protocol option, enter the port numbers that control sending packets (up to 10 ports), separated by commas, for example 25,80,143,5220; leave this setting blank to control all ports; see the next table for more information
Select IKEv1 or IKEv2 depending on the device that the product is connected to
If you selected IPsec as the Access Control option, select an authentication method here
If you selected Pre-Shared Key as the Authentication Method option, enter a pre-shared key between 1 and 127 characters long here and in the Confirm Pre-Shared Key field
If you selected IKEv2 as the IKE Version setting, select the ID type from the list
If you selected IKEv2 as the IKE Version setting, enter the necessary ID information
If you selected IPsec as the Access Control option, select one of these encapsulation modes:
Transport Mode: if you are using the product on the same LAN; IP packets of layer 4 or later are encrypted
Tunnel Mode: if you are using the product on an Internetcapable network, such as IPsec-VPN; the header and data of IP packets are encrypted
If you selected Tunnel Mode as the Encapsulation option, enter a gateway address between 1 and 39 characters long

318

Setting Security Protocol
Algorithm Settings

Options/Description
If you selected IPsec as the Access Control option, select one of these security protocols:
ESP: to ensure the integrity of authentication and data, and encrypt data
AH: to ensure the integrity of authentication and data; if data encryption is prohibited, you can use IPsec
Select the encryption algorithm settings for the security protocol you selected

Combinations of Local Address (Printer) and Remote Address (Host) on Group Policy

Setting of Remote Address (Host)
IPv4*1 IPv6*1 *2 Blank

Settng of Local Address (Printer)

IPv4 Yes -- Yes

IPv6*2 -- Yes Yes

Any addresses*3 Yes Yes Yes

*1: If you selected IPsec as the Access Control option, you cannot specify a prefix length *2: If you selected IPsec as the Access Control option, you can select a link-local address (fe80::), but the group policy will be disabled. *3: You cannot use IPv6 link-local addresses.
Group Policy Guidelines

Service name
Any ENPC

Protocol type Local/Remote port number

UDP

3289/Any port

Controls these operations
All services Searching for a product from applications such as printer or scanner drivers, or EpsonNet Config

319

Service name SNMP

Protocol type Local/Remote port number

UDP

161/Any port

LPR RAW (Port9100) IPP/IPPS

TCP TCP TCP

WSD WS-Discovery Network Scan

TCP UDP TCP

Network Push Scan TCP

515/Any port 9100/any port 631/Any port
Any port/5357 3702/Any port 1865/Any port
Any port/2968

Network Push Scan UDP Discovery
FTP Data (Local) TCP
FTP Control (Local) TCP
FTP Data (Remote) TCP

2968/Any port
20/Any port 21/Any port Any port/20

FTP Control (Remote) CIFS (Local)*
CIFS (Remote)*

TCP TCP TCP

Any port/21 445/Any port Any port/445
320

Controls these operations
Acquiring and configuring MIB from applications such as printer or scanner drivers, or EpsonNet Config
Forwarding LPR data
Forwarding RAW data
Forwarding AirPrint data (IPP/IPPS printing)
Controlling WSD
Searching for a product from WSD
Forwarding scan data from Document Capture Pro
Acquiring job information on push scanning from Document Capture Pro
Searching for a computer during push scanning from Document Capture Pro
Forwarding FTP printing data to FTP server
Controlling FTP printing to FTP server
Forwarding scan data and received fax data to FTP client; controls only an FTP server that uses remote port 20
Forwarding scan data and received fax data to FTP client
Sharing a network folder on CIFS server
Forwarding scan data and received fax data to a folder on CIFS server

Service name
NetBIOS Name Service (Local)
NetBIOS Datagram Service (Local)
NetBIOS Session Service (Local)
NetBIOS Name Service (Remote)
NetBIOS Datagram (Remote)
NetBIOS Session Service (Remote)
HTTP (Local)
HTTPS (Local)
HTTP (Remote)
HTTPS (Remote)

Protocol type UDP UDP TCP UDP UDP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP

Local/Remote port number 137/Any port
138/Any port
139/Any port
Any port/137
Any port/138
Any port/139
80/Any port 443/Any port Any port/80 Any port/443

Controls these operations Sharing a network folder on CIFS server
Forwarding scan data and received fax data to a folder on CIFS server
Forwarding Web Config and WSD data to a HTTP or HTTPS server Communicating with Epson Connect, firmware update, and root certificate update on a HTTP or HTTPS client

* To control forwarding of scan and received fax data, share a network folder, or receive fax data from PC-Fax, select Port Number as the Method of Choosing Port option and specify the port numbers for CIFS and NetBIOS. Parent topic: Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering IPsec/IP Filtering Configuration Examples You can configure IPsec and IP filtering in a variety of ways, as shown in the examples here.
Receiving IPsec Packets Only Use this example only for configuring a default policy. · IPsec/IP Filtering: Enable · Access Control: IPsec · Authentication Method: Pre-Shared Key

321

· Pre-Shared Key: Enter a key up to 127 characters long
Receiving Printing Data and Printer Settings Use this example to allow communication of printing data and printer settings from specified services. Default policy: · IPsec/IP Filtering: Enable · Access Control: Refuse Access Group policy: · Access Control: Permit Access · Remote Address(Host): Client IP address · Method of Choosing Port: Service Name · Service Name: Select ENPC, SNMP, HTTP (Local), HTTPS (Local), and RAW (Port9100)
Receiving Access from Only a Specified Address for Product Access In these examples, the client will be able to access and configure the product in any policy configuration. Default policy: · IPsec/IP Filtering: Enable · Access Control: Refuse Access Group policy: · Access Control: Permit Access · Remote Address (Host): Administrator's client IP address Parent topic: Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering Configuring an IPsec/IP Filtering Certificate You can configure a certificate for IPsec/IP traffic filtering using Web Config. 1. Access Web Config and select the Network Security tab. 2. Under IPsec/IP Filtering, select Client Certificate. 3. Click Import to add a new client certificate and enter any necessary settings. 4. Click OK. Parent topic: Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering
322

Connecting the Product to an IEEE 802.1X Network
Follow the instructions in these sections to connect the product to an IEEE 802.1X network using Web Config. Configuring an IEEE 802.1X Network IEEE 802.1X Network Settings Configuring a Certificate for an IEEE 802.1X Network IEEE 802.1X Network Status Parent topic: Using Your Product on a Secure Network
Configuring an IEEE 802.1X Network If your product supports IEEE 802.1X, you can use it on a network with authentication provided by a RADIUS server with a hub as an authenticator using Web Config. 1. Access Web Config and select the Network Security tab. 2. Under IEEE802.1X, select Basic. 3. Select Enable as the IEEE802.1X (Wired LAN) setting. 4. To use the product on a Wi-Fi network, enable your product's Wi-Fi settings. The status of the connection is shown as the IEEE802.1X (Wi-Fi) setting.

Note: You can share the network settings for Ethernet and Wi-Fi networking.

5. Select the IEEE 802.1X setting options you want to use. 6. Click Next.
You see a confirmation message. 7. Click OK. Parent topic: Connecting the Product to an IEEE 802.1X Network IEEE 802.1X Network Settings You can configure these IEEE 802.1X network settings in Web Config.

Setting IEEE802.1X (Wired LAN) IEEE802.1X (Wi-Fi)

Options/Description Enable or disable settings (IEEE802.1X > Basic) Displays the IEEE802.1X (Wi-Fi) connection status

323

Setting Connection Method EAP Type
User ID Password Confirm Password Server ID
Certificate Validation Anonymous Name
Encryption Strength

Options/Description
Displays the current network connection method
Select one of these authentication methods for connections between the product and a RADIUS server:
EAP-TLS or PEAP-TLS: You must obtain and import a CAsigned certificate
PEAP/MSCHAPv2 or EAP-TTLS: You must configure a password
Enter an ID between 1 and 128 ASCII characters for authentication on a RADIUS server
Enter a password between 1 and 128 ASCII characters for authentication of the product. If you are using Windows as a RADIUS server, enter up to 127 ASCII characters.
Enter the authentication password again
Enter a server ID between 1 and 128 ASCII characters for authentication on a specified RADIUS server; server ID is verified in the subject/subjectAltName field of a server certificate sent from the RADIUS server
Select a valid certificate regardless of the authentication method; import the certificate using the CA Certificate option
If you selected EAP-TTLS, PEAP-TLS or PEAP/MSCHAPv2 as the Authentication Method setting, you can configure an anonymous name between 1 and 128 ASCII characters instead of a user ID for phase 1 of a PEAP authentication
Select one of the following encryption strengths:
High for AES256/3DES
Middle for AES256/3DES/AES128/RC4

Parent topic: Connecting the Product to an IEEE 802.1X Network Configuring a Certificate for an IEEE 802.1X Network
If your product supports IEEE 802.1X, you can configure a certificate for the network using Web Config. 1. Access Web Config and select the Network Security tab.

324

2. Under IEEE802.1X, select Client Certificate. 3. Click Import to add a new client certificate. 4. Click OK. Parent topic: Connecting the Product to an IEEE 802.1X Network IEEE 802.1X Network Status You can check the status of the IEEE 802.1X network settings by printing a status sheet from your product. The network status sheet displays the information in this table for IEEE 802.1X networks.

Status ID Disable EAP Success
Authenticating Config Error Client Certificate Error Timeout Error
User ID Error
Server ID Error
Server Certificate Error
CA Certificate Error
EAP Failure

Status description
IEEE 802.1X is disabled
IEEE 802.1X authentication is confirmed and the network connection is available
IEEE 802.1X authentication in progress
Authentication failed because the user ID was not set
Authentication failed because the client certificate is out of date
Authentication failed because there is no answer from the RADIUS server and/or authenticator
Authentication failed because the product's user ID and/or certificate protocol is incorrect
Authentication failed because the server ID on the server certificate and the server's ID do not match
Authentication failed because the server certificate is out of date or the chain of the server certificate is incorrect
Authentication failed because the CA certificate is incorrect, not imported, or out of date
Authentication failed because the client certificate is incorrect (EAP-TLS or PEAP-TLS), or the user ID or password is incorrect (PEAP/MSCHAPv2)

Parent topic: Connecting the Product to an IEEE 802.1X Network

325

Using a Digital Certificate
Follow the instructions in these sections to configure and use digital certificates using Web Config.
About Digital Certification Obtaining and Importing a CA-signed Certificate CSR Setup Settings CSR Import Settings Deleting a CA-signed Certificate Updating a Self-signed Certificate Importing a CA Certificate Deleting a CA Certificate
Parent topic: Using Your Product on a Secure Network
About Digital Certification
You can configure the following digital certificates for your network using Web Config:
CA-signed Certificate You can ensure secure communications using a CA-signed certificate for each security feature. The certificates must be signed by and obtained from a CA (Certificate Authority).
CA Certificate A CA certificate indicates that a third party has verified the identity of a server. You need to obtain a CA certificate for server authentication from a CA that issues it.
Self-signed Certificate A self-signed certificate is issued and signed by the product itself. You can use the certificate for only SSL/TLS communication, however security is unreliable and you may see a security alert in the browser during use.
Parent topic: Using a Digital Certificate
Obtaining and Importing a CA-signed Certificate
You can obtain a CA-signed certificate by creating a CSR (Certificate Signing Request) using Web Config and submitting it to a certificate authority. The CSR created in Web Config is in PEM/DER format. You can import one CSR created from Web Config at a time.
1. Access Web Config and select Network Security.
2. Select one of the available network security options and select a certificate option.
3. In the CSR section, select Generate.
4. Select the CSR setting options you want to use.
326

5. Click OK. You see a completion message.
6. Select Network Security, select your network security option, and select Certificate again. 7. In the CSR section, click the Download option that matches the format specified by your certificate
authority to download the CSR.
Caution: Do not generate another CSR or you may not be able to import a CA-signed certificate.
8. Submit the CSR to the certificate authority following the format guidelines provided by that authority. 9. Save the issued CA-signed certificate to a computer connected to the product.
Before proceeding, make sure the time and date settings are correct on your product. 10. In the CA Certificate section, click Import. 11. Select the format of the certificate as the Server Certificate setting. 12. Select the certificate import settings as necessary for the format and the source from which you
obtained it. 13. Click OK.
You see a confirmation message. 14. Click Confirm to verify the certificate information. Parent topic: Using a Digital Certificate Related references CSR Setup Settings CSR Import Settings CSR Setup Settings You can select these settings when setting up a CSR in Web Config.
Note: The available key length and abbreviations vary by certificate authority, so follow the rules of that authority when entering information in the CSR.

Setting Key Length

Options/Description Select a key length for the CSR

327

Setting Common Name
Organization, Organizational Unit, Locality, State/Province Country Sender's Email Address

Options/Description
Enter a name or static IP address from 1 to 128 characters long; for example, Reception printer or https://10.152.12.225
Enter information in each field as necessary, from 0 to 64 characters long in ASCII; separate any multiple names with commas
Enter a two-digit country code number as specified by the ISO-3166 standard
Enter the sender's email address for the mail server setting

Parent topic: Using a Digital Certificate CSR Import Settings
You can configure these settings when importing a CSR in Web Config.
Note: The import setting requirements vary by certificate format and how you obtained the certificate.

Certificate format PEM/DER format obtained from Web Config
PEM/DER format obtained from a computer PKCS#12 format obtained from a computer

Setting descriptions Private Key: Do not configure because the product contains a private key Password: Do not configure CA Certificate 1/CA Certificate 2: Optional Private Key: Configure a private key Password: Do not configure CA Certificate 1/CA Certificate 2: Optional Private Key: Do not configure Password: Optional CA Certificate 1/CA Certificate 2: Do not configure

CA-signed Certificate Import Settings

328

Setting Server Certificate or Client Certificate

Description
Select the certificate format.
For an SSL/TLS connection, the Server Certificate is displayed.
For an IPsec/IP Filtering, IEEE802.1x, or S/MIME connection, the Client Certificate is displayed.

Private Key Password CA Certificate 1
CA Certificate 2

Note: Depending on your product, not all connection types may be available.
If you obtain a certificate of the PEM/DER format by using a CSR created from a computer, specify a private key file that matches the certificate.
If the file format is Certificate with Private Key (PKCS#12), enter the password for encrypting the private key that is set when you obtain the certificate.
If your certificate's format is Certificate (PEM/DER), import a certificate from a certificate authority that issues a CA-signed Certificate to be used as the server certificate. Specify a file if necessary.
If your certificate's format is Certificate (PEM/DER), import a certificate from the same certificate authority that issued CA Certificate 1. Specify a file if necessary.

Parent topic: Using a Digital Certificate
Deleting a CA-signed Certificate
You can delete an imported CA-signed certificate with Web Config when the certificate expires or if you have no more need for an encrypted connection.

Note: If you obtained a CA-signed certificate from Web Config, you cannot import a deleted certificate; you must obtain and import a new certificate.

1. Access Web Config and select Network Security.

329

2. Select one of the following network security options and corresponding certificate: · SSL/TLS and select Certificate · IPsec/IP Filtering and select Client Certificate · IEEE802.1X and select Client Certificate
3. Click Delete. You see a completion message.
4. Click OK. Parent topic: Using a Digital Certificate Updating a Self-signed Certificate If your product supports the HTTPS server feature, you can update a self-signed certificate using Web Config. 1. Access Web Config and select Network Security, select SSL/TLS, and select Certificate. 2. Click Update. 3. Enter an identifier for your product from 1 to 128 characters long in the Common Name field.
Note: You can add up to 5 IPv4 addresses, IPv6 addresses, host names, or FQDNs; separated by commas. The first value is assigned to the Common Name field, and the rest are added to the Alias field of the certificate subject. You cannot enter a space before or after a comma.
4. Select a validity period for the certificate as the Certificate Validity (year) setting. 5. Click Next.
You see a completion message. 6. Click OK. 7. Click Confirm to verify the certificate information. Parent topic: Using a Digital Certificate Importing a CA Certificate You can import a CA certificate using Web Config. 1. Access Web Config and select Network Security. 2. Select CA Certificate. 3. Select Import.
330

4. Select the CA certificate you want to import. 5. Click OK. When you see the CA Certificate page and the imported certificate is displayed, the import is finished. Parent topic: Using a Digital Certificate Deleting a CA Certificate You can delete an imported CA certificate with Web Config when the certificate expires or if you have no more need for an encrypted connection. 1. Access Web Config and select Network Security Settings. 2. Select CA Certificate. 3. Locate the certificate you want to remove and click the Delete button next to it. 4. Click OK to confirm the deletion. 5. Click Reboot Network, and then check that the deleted CA Certificate is not listed on the updated
screen. Parent topic: Using a Digital Certificate
Setting Up Universal Print (Microsoft)
You can set up your product for use with Universal Print if you are using Microsoft 365 and Azure Active Directory.
Note: This feature is supported on Windows 10 2004 (20H1) or later. Visit the Microsoft website for more information.
1. Access Web Config and select the Network tab. 2. Select Universal Print. 3. Select Register. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions to register your product. Parent topic: Administering Your Product
Using Epson Device Admin Configuration Software
With Windows, you can discover and monitor remote devices, and configure network settings in a batch operation. See the Epson Device Admin help for instructions.
331

To install Epson Device Admin, download the software from the support page at epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America) and follow the on-screen instructions. Parent topic: Administering Your Product
332

Solving Problems
Check these sections for solutions to problems you may have using your product. Viewing the Help Screen Product Status Messages Job Status Error Codes Running a Product Check Resetting Control Panel Defaults Solving Setup Problems Solving Network Problems Solving Network Security Problems Solving Copying Problems Solving Copy Quality Problems Solving Paper Problems Solving Problems Printing from a Computer Solving Page Layout and Content Problems Solving Print Quality Problems Solving Scanning Problems Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems Solving Faxing Problems Solving USB Device Problems Uninstall Your Product Software Where to Get Help (U.S. and Canada) Where to Get Help (Latin America)
Viewing the Help Screen
You can view troubleshooting or how-to topics on the LCD screen at any time. 1. Select the help icon.
333

You see this screen:
2. Select Troubleshooting or How To to view instructional images or animations. Parent topic: Solving Problems
Product Status Messages
You can often diagnose problems with your product by checking the messages and status icons on its LCD screen. You can also check for errors by pressing the Job/Status button and selecting Printer Status. Note: If the screen is dark, press the screen to wake the product from sleep mode.
334

LCD screen message

Condition/solution

Printer error. Turn the power off and on again. If the problem persists, contact Epson support.

Turn the product off and then back on again. If the error persists, check for and remove any jammed paper or protective materials from the product. If the error still persists, contact Epson for support.

If you see any of the following error codes, make sure you have not exceeded the loading capacity for any paper source:

· 000181

· 000184

Printer error. Contact Epson support. The product may be damaged, but features such as scanning Non-printing features are available. are still available. Contact Epson for support.

Printer error. For details, see your documentation.

The product may be damaged. Contact Epson for support.

Paper out in XX. Load Paper. Paper Load the size and type of paper in the paper source indicated. Size: XX/Paper Type: XX

Too many paper cassette units are installed. Turn the power off and uninstall the extra units. See your documentation for details.

You can install up to three optional paper cassette units. Remove any extra units.

Unsupported Paper Cassette Units have been installed. Turn the power off and uninstall. For details, see your documentation.

Unsupported optional paper cassette units are installed. Remove the unsupported units.

Cannot print because XX is out of order. You can print from another cassette.

Turn the product off and then back on again. Reinsert the indicated paper cassette. If the error persists, contact Epson for support.

The pickup roller in XX is nearing the The paper cassette rollers need to be replaced periodically for

end of its service life.

optimal performance. (Paper may not feed correctly from the

paper cassette when the roller is near the end of its service life.)

Contact Epson for support.

The pickup roller in XX has reached the end of its service life. Replace it and reset the maintenance roller counter.

Replace the paper cassette roller indicated and reset the counter. Contact Epson for support.

335

LCD screen message

Condition/solution

You need to replace Ink Supply Unit(s).

Replace the indicated ink packs.

Paper Setup Auto Display is set to Off. Some features may not be available. For details, see your documentation.

AirPrint is not available when the Paper Setup Auto Display setting is disabled. Change Paper Setup Auto Display to On.

No dial tone is detected.

Make sure the phone cable is connected correctly and the phone line works. If you connected the product to a PBX (Private Branch Exchange) phone line or Terminal Adapter, change the Line Type setting to PBX. If you still cannot send a fax, turn off the Dial Tone Detection setting. (Turning off the Dial Tone Detection setting may cause the product to drop the first digit of a fax number.)

Failed to receive faxes because the Press the Job/Status button and select Printer Status and

fax data capacity is full. Touch the resolve any printer errors that prevented faxes from printing.

Job/Status at the bottom of the Home Make sure the product is connected to a computer or that a USB

Screen for details.

device is connected to the product.

The combination of the IP address There is a problem with the network connection to your product. and the subnet mask is invalid. See Set up your product on the network again. your documentation for more details.

To use cloud services, update the root certificate from the Epson Web Config utility.

Access the Web Config utility and update the cloud service root certificate.

Check that the printer driver is installed on the computer and that the port settings for the printer are correct.

Make sure the printer port is correctly configured. In Windows, make sure the port is set to a USBXXX setting for a USB connection or EpsonNet Print Port for a network connection.

Paper feed error. Remove C1, make sure there is no jammed paper remaining in the printer, and reload the paper.

Even if you cannot feed the paper, check the position of the pickup roller lock. If the position is wrong, push the pickup roller lock with your finger to correct the position. See the pickup roller replacement videos on the Epson support site for instructions.

Recovery Mode Update Firmware

An error has occurred during firmware updating. Connect your product using a USB cable and try downloading the Firmware Update from the Epson support site. If you still need help, contact Epson for support.

336

Parent topic: Solving Problems
Related references Paper Source Settings Options
Related tasks Loading Paper in the Paper Cassettes and Rear Paper Tray Installing the Optional Paper Cassette Units Replacing the Paper Feed Rollers Removing and Installing the Ink Pack Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine
Related topics Wi-Fi or Wired Networking Using a Digital Certificate

Job Status Error Codes
If a job does not complete successfully, you can check the error code for the reason. Press the Job/Status button, select the Job/Status tab, and select Log. Select the incomplete job to display the
error code and additional information.

Code 001 101 102
103
104

Condition/solution
The product was turned off by a power failure.
Memory is full. Reduce the size of the print job.
Collated printing has failed due to a lack of available memory. Clear fonts and macros from the product's memory using the PDL Font, Macro option on the Settings > General Settings > System Administration > Clear Internal Memory Data menu, reduce the size of the print job, or print one copy at a time.
Print quality was decreased due to a lack of available memory. If the quality of the printout is unacceptable, try simplifying the page by reducing the number of graphics or the number and size of the fonts.
Reverse printing has failed due to a lack of available memory. Clear fonts and macros from the product's memory using the PDL Font, Macro option on the Settings > General Settings > System Administration > Clear Internal Memory Data menu or reduce the data size of the print job.

337

Code 106 107 108 109 110 111 120 201 202 203
204 205 206 207 208
301 401

Condition/solution
Cannot print from the computer due to access control settings. Contact your product administrator.
User authentication failed and the job has been canceled. Contact your product administrator.
Confidential job data was deleted when the product was turned off.
The received fax was already deleted.
The job was printed 1-sided because the loaded paper does not support 2-sided printing.
Available memory is running low. Reduce the size of the print job.
Cannot communicate with a server using an open platform. Check the server or network for errors.
The product's memory is full. You can send pages individually, or print received faxes and delete them to free up memory space.
The line was disconnected by the recipient's fax machine. Wait a moment, then try again.
The product cannot detect a dial tone.
Make sure the phone cable is connected correctly and the phone line works. If you connected the product to a PBX (Private Branch Exchange) phone line or Terminal Adapter, change the Line Type setting to PBX. If you still cannot send a fax, turn off the Dial Tone Detection setting. (Turning off the Dial Tone Detection setting may cause the product to drop the first digit of a fax number.)
The recipient's fax machine is busy. Wait a moment, then try again.
The recipient's fax machine does not answer. Wait a moment, then try again.
The phone cable is incorrectly connected to the product's LINE and EXT ports. Connect the phone cable correctly.
The phone cable is not connected. Connect the phone cable.
The fax could not be sent to some of the specified recipients.
Print a fax log to check which recipients failed to receive the fax. If the Save Failure Data setting is turned on, you can resend a fax from Job Status in the Job/Status menu.
There is not enough storage space available to save the data in the external memory device. Clear space on the device or use a different device.

338

Code 302 402 303
304 404 305 405 306 311 321 411 421 312 412 313 413 314
315 327 316
317
322 323

Condition/solution The external memory device is write-protected. Disable write protection.
No folder is available for saving the scanned file. Create a folder or use a different memory device. The external memory device has been removed. Reinsert the device.
An error occurred while saving data to an external memory device. Reinsert the memory device or use a different device. The product's memory is full. Wait until current jobs are finished processing. A DNS error has occurred. Check the DNS settings for the server, computer, or access point. DNS settings for the server can be checked from the DNS Server option in the Setup menu.
An authentication error has occurred. Check the Server Settings in the Settings menu.
A communication error has occurred. Check the network connection or Server Settings in the Settings menu. The data size exceeds the maximum size for the attached files. Increase the Attached File Max Size setting in the scan settings or lower the file size of the scanned image. The memory is full. Retry after other ongoing jobs have finished.
A mail encryption error occurred. Make sure the encryption certificate setting and the product's time setting are correct. Contact your product administrator. A mail signature error occurred. Make sure the signing certificate setting and the product's time setting are correct. Contact your product administrator. An authentication error occurred. Check the Location settings. A communication error has occurred. Check the Location settings or the network connection.
339

Code 324 325 326 328 330
331 332 333 334 341
350
422 423

Condition/solution
A file with the same name already exists in the specified folder. Delete the duplicate file or change the file name prefix in File Settings.
There is not enough storage space available in the specified folder. Increase the storage space in the specified folder, delete unnecessary files, or lower the file size of the scanned image.
The destination was wrong or the destination does not exist. Check the Location settings.
An FTPS/FTPS secure connection error occurred. Check the location in the destination settings. Run Epson Web Config and update the root certificate or the CA certificate. Contact your product administrator.
A communication error occurred while acquiring the destination list. Make sure the product is connected to the network correctly.
There is not enough space available for saving the scanned files in the specified folder. Delete unnecessary files from the specified folder.
The destination could not be found because the destination information was uploaded to the server before sending the scanned data. Select the destination again.
An error occurred while sending the scanned data.
A communication error has occurred. Make sure the product is connected to the computer or network correctly. Make sure you have installed Document Capture Pro or Document Capture. Make sure the Event Manager program is not being blocked by your firewall or security software.
An FTPS/HTTPS certificate error occurred. Check the product's date and time settings are correct. Run Epson Web Config and update the root certificate or the CA certificate. Contact your product administrator.
An authentication error has occurred. Make sure the settings are correct for the folder selected in Save/Forward Settings in the Settings menu.
A communication error has occurred. It is also possible that a file with the same name is open or the file is a read-only file.
Check the network connection, make sure the settings are correct for the folder selected in the in Save/Forward Settings in the Settings menu, close the duplicate file, or disable read-only protection.

340

Code 425
428

Condition/solution
There is not enough storage space available in the forwarding destination folder. Increase the storage space in the destination folder.
The destination was wrong or the destination does not exist. Make sure the settings are correct for the folder selected in Save/Forward Settings in the Settings menu.

Parent topic: Solving Problems Related references Double-sided Printing Capacity Related tasks Clearing the Internal Memory Connecting an Authentication Device Related topics Restricting Features Available for Users Setting Up and Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server
Running a Product Check
Running a product check helps you determine if your product is operating properly. 1. Disconnect any interface cables connected to your product. 2. Load plain paper in the product. 3. Press the home button, if necessary. 4. Select Settings > Maintenance > Print Head Nozzle Check.

341

You see a screen like this:
5. Select Start. The nozzle pattern prints.
6. Do one of the following, depending on the results of the product check: · If the page prints and the nozzle check pattern is complete, the product is operating properly. Any operation problem you may have could be caused by your computer, cable, software, or selected settings. Check the other solutions in this book or try uninstalling and reinstalling your printer software. · If the page prints but the nozzle check pattern has gaps, clean the print head. · If the page does not print, the product may have a problem. Check the other solutions in this manual. If they do not work, contact Epson.
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Resetting Control Panel Defaults
If you have a problem with settings on the product control panel, you can reset them to their factory defaults. You can choose which settings to reset or reset them all. Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting, contact your administrator for assistance.
342

1. Press the home button, if necessary. 2. Select Settings > General Settings > System Administration > Restore Default Settings.
Note: You may need to enter the administrator password. You see a screen like this:
3. Select one of these options: · Network Settings: Resets all network settings · Copy Settings: Resets all settings for copying · Scan Settings: Resets all settings for scanning · Fax Settings: Resets all settings for faxing · Clear All Data and Settings: Resets all control panel settings including the contacts list You see a confirmation screen.
4. Select Yes to reset the selected settings. (Select No if you want to cancel the operation.) Parent topic: Solving Problems
Solving Setup Problems
Check these sections if you have problems while setting up your product. 343

Product Does Not Turn On or Off Noise After Ink Installation Software Installation Problems Cannot Read the Authentication Card Parent topic: Solving Problems
Product Does Not Turn On or Off
If you cannot turn the product on or off, try these solutions: · If you cannot turn on your product, make sure the power cord is securely connected and hold down
the power button a little longer. · If you cannot turn off your product, hold down the power button a little longer. If you still cannot turn off
your product, unplug the power cord, plug the power cord back in, then turn your product on and off again using the power button. Parent topic: Solving Setup Problems
Noise After Ink Installation
If you hear noises from your product after installing ink, check the following: · The first time you install the ink pack, the product must charge its print head. Wait until charging
finishes before you turn off the product, or it may charge improperly and use excess ink the next time you turn it on. · If the product's print head stops moving or making noise, and the charging process has not finished after approximately 5 minutes, turn off your product. Turn it back on and check to see if charging is still in progress. If it is still in progress, contact Epson for help. Parent topic: Solving Setup Problems
Software Installation Problems
If you have problems while installing your product software, try these solutions: · Make sure your product is turned on and any necessary cables are securely connected at both ends. If
you still have problems installing software, disconnect the cable and carefully follow the instructions on the Start Here sheet. Also make sure your system meets the requirements for your operating system. · Close any other programs, including screen savers and virus protection software, and install your product software again. · In Windows, make sure your product is selected as the default printer and the correct port is shown in the printer properties.
344

· For Mac, make sure your product is shown in the printer list. Click System Preferences or System Settings > Printers & Scanners or Print & Fax. If the printer name is not displayed, add the printer.
· If you see any error message or your software does not install correctly in Windows, you may not have software installation privileges. Contact your system administrator.
· If you are printing over a network, make sure your product is set up properly on the network. · If the USB cable is not recognized, try using a different USB cable. Parent topic: Solving Setup Problems Related concepts Uninstall Your Product Software
Cannot Read the Authentication Card
If the IC card reader cannot read the authentication card, try these solutions: · Make sure the card reader is securely connected to the external USB port on the back of the product. · Make sure both the card reader and the authentication card are supported. Parent topic: Solving Setup Problems Related tasks Connecting an Authentication Device
Solving Network Problems
Check these solutions if you have problems setting up or using your product on a network.
Note: Breakdown or repair of this product may cause loss of fax and network data and settings. Epson is not responsible for backing up or recovering data and settings during or after the warranty period. We recommend that you make your own backup or print out your fax and network data and settings.
Product Cannot Connect to a Wireless Router or Access Point Network Software Cannot Find Product on a Network Wireless Network Connection is Unstable on a Mac USB 3.0 Connection is Unstable When Using a USB 2.0 Cable Product Does Not Appear in Mac Printer Window Cannot Print Over a Network Cannot Scan Over a Network Parent topic: Solving Problems
345

Product Cannot Connect to a Wireless Router or Access Point
If your product has trouble finding or connecting to a wireless router or access point, try these solutions: · If you are connecting the product via Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) and the Wi-Fi icon on your
product's LCD screen is not lit or does not appear, make sure you select one of the WPS options from the product control panel within 2 minutes of pressing the WPS button on your router. · Make sure to place your product within contact range of your 2.4 GHz router or access point. Avoid placing your product near a microwave oven, 2.4 GHz cordless phone, or large metal object, such as a filing cabinet.
Note: If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router, set the router to operate in dual band (2.4 GHz and 5 GHz) mode. If your router uses a single network name (SSID) for both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz band, give each band its own network name (SSID) instead, such as Home Network 2.4 GHz and Home Network 5 GHz. See your router documentation or contact your internet service provider for instructions.
· Make sure to place your product within contact range of your router or access point. Avoid placing your product near a microwave oven, cordless phone, or large metal object, such as a filing cabinet.
Note for Latin America: If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router, set the router to operate in dual band (2.4 GHz and 5 GHz) mode. If your router uses a single network name (SSID) for both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz band, give each band its own network name (SSID) instead, such as Home Network 2.4 GHz and Home Network 5 GHz. See your router documentation or contact your internet service provider for instructions.
· Verify that your router or access point is operating correctly by connecting to it from your computer or another device.
· Print a network connection report and check the codes and messages on the report to help determine the cause of the problem.
· You may need to disable the firewall and any anti-virus software on your wireless router or access point.
· Try restarting your router following the instructions in your router documentation.
Note: If you are reading these instructions online, you will lose your Internet connection when you restart your router.
· Check to see if access restrictions, such as MAC address filtering, are set on the router or access point. If access restrictions are set, add your product's MAC address to your router's address list. To
346

obtain your product's MAC address, print a network status sheet. Then follow the instructions in your router or access point documentation to add the address to the list.
· If your router or access point does not broadcast its network name (SSID), follow the instructions that came with your product to enter your wireless network name manually.
· If your router or access point has security enabled, determine the kind of security it is using and any required password or passphrase for connection. Then make sure to enter the exact WEP key or WPA passphrase correctly.
· Check if your computer is restricting the available wireless channels. If so, verify that your wireless access point is using one of the usable channels and change to a usable channel, if necessary.
· If the IP address assigned to the product is 169.254.XXX.XXX and the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, the IP address may not be assigned correctly. Check the IP address and the subnet mask assigned to the product. Restart the wireless router or reset the network settings for the product.
· If you cannot connect your product to a device using Wi-Fi Direct, you may have exceeded the maximum number of devices connected to your product (8). Print a network status sheet or access Web Config on the browser for your device and check the number of connected devices. If 8 devices are already connected, disconnect a device by deleting the product's SSID from the Wi-Fi screen of that device. If fewer than 8 devices are connected, check the accuracy of your other network settings, move your device closer to your product, and try connecting again.
· If you are using a Wi-Fi Direct connection that suddenly disconnects, the Wi-Fi Direct password on your device may have been changed. If necessary, delete the existing DIRECT-xxxxxxxx connection settings from your device and enter a new password. See your device documentation for instructions.
Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
Related concepts Uninstall Your Product Software
Related tasks Printing a Network Connection Report Restoring Default Product Settings
Network Software Cannot Find Product on a Network
If EpsonNet Setup cannot find your product on a network, try these solutions:
· Make sure your product is turned on and connected to your network. Verify the connection using your product control panel.
· Check if your network name (SSID) contains non-ASCII characters. Your product cannot display nonASCII characters.
347

· Print a network connection report and check the codes and messages on the report to help determine the cause of the problem.
· Make sure your product is not connected to a guest network. · If necessary, reinstall your product software and try running EpsonNet Setup again:
1. Reset your product's network settings to their factory defaults. 2. Windows only: Uninstall your product software. 3. Restart your router following the instructions in your router documentation.
Note: If you are reading these instructions online, you will lose your Internet connection when you restart your router, so note the next step before restarting it.
4. Download your product software from the Epson website using the instructions on the Start Here sheet.
· If you have replaced your router, reinstall your product software to connect to the new router.
Note: If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router, set the router to operate in dual band (2.4 GHz and 5 GHz) mode. If your router uses a single network name (SSID) for both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz band, give each band its own network name (SSID) instead, such as Home Network 2.4 GHz and Home Network 5 GHz. See your router documentation or contact your internet service provider for instructions.
· If you have replaced your router, reinstall your product software to connect to the new router.
Note for Latin America: If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router, set the router to operate in dual band (2.4 GHz and 5 GHz) mode. If your router uses a single network name (SSID) for both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz band, give each band its own network name (SSID) instead, such as Home Network 2.4 GHz and Home Network 5 GHz. See your router documentation or contact your internet service provider for instructions.
· Check to see if your wireless router or access point has an enabled Privacy Separator function that is preventing detection of your device over the network. See your router or access point documentation for instructions on disabling the Privacy Separator function.
Parent topic: Solving Network Problems Related concepts Uninstall Your Product Software
348

Related tasks Printing a Network Connection Report Restoring Default Product Settings
Wireless Network Connection is Unstable on a Mac
If you connected a device to a USB 3.0 port on your Mac, you may experience wireless network interference between your product and your Mac. If you cannot connect to your product over the wireless network or the connection becomes unstable, move the device connected to your Mac USB 3.0 port further away from your Mac. Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
USB 3.0 Connection is Unstable When Using a USB 2.0 Cable
If you receive a communication error or experience an unstable connection when using a SuperSpeed USB port on your computer with a USB 2.0 cable, try these solutions: · Use a USB 3.0 cable. · Connect to a Hi-Speed USB port on your computer, if available. · Connect to another SuperSpeed USB port on your computer, if available. Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
Product Does Not Appear in Mac Printer Window
If your product does not appear in the Mac printer window, try these solutions: · Turn your product off, wait 30 seconds, then turn it back on again. · If you are connecting the product via Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) and the Wi-Fi icon on your
product's LCD screen is not lit, make sure you select one of the WPS options from the product control panel within 2 minutes of pressing the WPS button on your router. Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
Cannot Print Over a Network
If you cannot print over a network, try these solutions: · Make sure that your product is turned on. · Make sure you install your product's network software as described in your product documentation.
349

· Print a network status sheet and verify that the network settings are correct. If the network status is Disconnected, check any cable connections and turn your product off and then on again.
· Print a network connection report and check the codes and messages on the report to help determine the cause of the problem.
· If you are using TCP/IP, make sure the product's IP address is set correctly for your network. If your network does not assign IP addresses using DHCP, set the IP address manually. If the IP address assigned to the printer is 169.254.xxx.xxx and the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, the IP address may not be assigned correctly. Restart your wireless router or reset the printer's network settings.
· Make sure your computer and product are both using the same wireless network.
· If network printing is slow, print a network status sheet and check the signal strength. If it is poor, place your product closer to your router or access point. Avoid placing your product near a microwave oven, cordless phone, or large metal object, such as a filing cabinet.
Note for Latin America: If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router, set the router to operate in dual band (2.4 GHz and 5 GHz) mode. If your router uses a single network name (SSID) for both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz band, give each band its own network name (SSID) instead, such as Home Network 2.4 GHz and Home Network 5 GHz. See your router documentation or contact your internet service provider for instructions.
· Try restarting your router following the instructions in your router documentation.
Note: If you are reading these instructions online, you will lose your Internet connection when you restart your router.
· Check if there are any paused print jobs.
· Check if the selected printer port is correct.
· Check to see if your wireless router or access point has an enabled Privacy Separator function that is preventing printing from a device over the network. See your router or access point documentation for instructions on disabling the Privacy Separator function.
· If you are connecting the product via Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) and the Wi-Fi icon on your product's LCD screen is not lit, make sure you select one of the WPS options from the product control panel within 2 minutes of pressing the WPS button on your router.
· Check your wired LAN router or access point to see if the LED for the port to which your product is connected is on or flashing. If the link LED is off, try the following:
· Make sure the Ethernet cable is securely connected to your product and to your router, access point, switch, or hub.
350

· Try connecting your product to a different port or a different router, access point, switch, or hub. · Try connecting with a different Ethernet cable. · Try printing to your product from another computer on the network. · If you are connecting the product via EpsonNet Setup and the Wi-Fi icon does not appear lit on the LCD screen, make sure your product software was installed correctly. If necessary, reinstall your software. Parent topic: Solving Network Problems Related concepts Uninstall Your Product Software Related tasks Printing a Network Status Sheet Printing a Network Connection Report
Cannot Scan Over a Network
If you have problems scanning over a network, try these solutions: · If you cannot scan from your product control panel, make sure you restarted your computer after
installing the product software. Make sure the Event Manager program is not being blocked by your firewall or security software.
Note for Latin America: If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router, set the router to operate in dual band (2.4 GHz and 5 GHz) mode. If your router uses a single network name (SSID) for both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz band, give each band its own network name (SSID) instead, such as Home Network 2.4 GHz and Home Network 5 GHz. See your router documentation or contact your internet service provider for instructions.
· If you are scanning a large original at a high resolution, a network communication error may occur. Try scanning again at a lower resolution.
· If network communication was interrupted while starting Epson Scan 2, exit Epson Scan 2, wait a few seconds, and restart it. If Epson Scan 2 cannot restart, turn off your product, turn it back on, and try restarting Epson Scan 2 again.
· Check the scanner setting and reset the connection if necessary using Epson Scan 2 Utility:
Windows 11: Click , then search for Epson Scan 2 Utility and select it. Make sure your product is selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset.
351

Windows 10: Click and select EPSON > Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make sure your product is selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset. Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen, select EPSON, and select Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make sure your product is selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset.
Windows (other versions): Click or Start > All Programs or Programs > EPSON > Epson Scan 2 > Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make sure your product is selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset. Mac: Open the Applications folder, click Epson Software, and click Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make sure your product is selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset. · You may need to disable the firewall and any anti-virus software on your wireless router or access point. Parent topic: Solving Network Problems Related concepts Scan Resolution Guidelines
Solving Network Security Problems
Check these sections if you have problems using the network security features. Cannot Create the Secure IPP Printing Port Cannot Update a Certificate or Create a CSR Cannot Import a Digital Certificate Deleted a CA-signed Certificate Digital Certificate Warning Messages Parent topic: Solving Problems
Cannot Create the Secure IPP Printing Port
If you cannot create the secure IPP printing port, try these solutions: · Make sure you specified the correct server certificate for SSL/TLS communication using Web Config. · If you are using a CA certificate, make sure it is imported to the computer that is accessing the
product. Parent topic: Solving Network Security Problems Related tasks Importing a CA Certificate
352

Related topics Configuring SSL/TLS Communication
Cannot Update a Certificate or Create a CSR
If you cannot update a self-signed certificate or create a CSR for a CA-signed certificate, try these solutions: · Make sure that you entered a Common Name setting in Web Config. · Make sure the Common Name setting does not contain unsupported characters or is divided by a
comma. Correct the setting and update the certificate again. Parent topic: Solving Network Security Problems Related references CSR Setup Settings CSR Import Settings Related tasks Obtaining and Importing a CA-signed Certificate
Cannot Import a Digital Certificate
If you cannot import a digital certificate, try these solutions: · Make sure the CA-signed certificate and the CSR have the same information. If they do not match,
import the certificate to a device that matches the information or use the CSR to obtain the CA-signed certificate again. · Make sure the CA-signed certificate file size is 5KB or less. · Make sure you are entering the correct password. Parent topic: Solving Network Security Problems Related references CSR Setup Settings CSR Import Settings Related tasks Obtaining and Importing a CA-signed Certificate
353

Deleted a CA-signed Certificate
If you accidentally deleted a CA-signed certificate, try these solutions: · If you retained a backup file, import the CA-signed certificate again. · If you obtained the certificate using a CSR created in Web Config, you cannot import a deleted
certificate. Create a new CSR and obtain a new certificate. Parent topic: Solving Network Security Problems
Related references CSR Setup Settings CSR Import Settings
Related tasks Obtaining and Importing a CA-signed Certificate

Digital Certificate Warning Messages
If you see a warning message when using a digital certificate, check for solutions in this table.

Message Enter a Server Certificate. CA Certificate 1 is not entered. Invalid value below. Invalid date and time.
Invalid password

Solution
Select a certificate file and click Import.
Import CA certificate 1 before importing additional certificates.
Remove any unsupported characters in the file path and password.
Set the date and time on the product using Web Config, EpsonNet Config, or the product control panel.
Enter the password that matches the password set for the CA certificate.

354

Message

Solution

Invalid file

Try the following:

· Import only certificate files in X509 format sent by a trusted certificate authority.

· Make sure the file size is 5KB or less and is not corrupted or fabricated.

· Make sure the chain in the certificate is valid; check the certificate authority's website.

Cannot use the Server Certificates that include more than three CA certificates.

Import certificate files in PKCS#12 format that contains one or two CA certificates, or convert each certificate to PRM format and import them again.

The certificate has expired. Check if the certificate Make sure the product time and date are set is valid, or check the date and time on your printer. correctly and, if the certificate is out of date, obtain
and import a new certificate.

Private key is required.

Do one of the following to pair a private key with the certificate:

· For PEM/DER format certificates obtained from a CSR using a computer, specify the private key file.

· For PKCS#12 format certificates obtained from a CSR using a computer, create a file containing the private key.

If you re-imported a PEM/DER format certificate obtained from a CSR using Web Config, you can only import it once. You must obtain and import a new certificate.

Setup failed.

Make sure the computer and product are connected, and the certificate file is not corrupted, then import the certificate file again.

Parent topic: Solving Network Security Problems
Related tasks Obtaining and Importing a CA-signed Certificate

355

Synchronizing the Date and Time with a Time Server Selecting the Date and Time
Solving Copying Problems
Check these solutions if you have problems copying with your product. Product Makes Noise, But Nothing Copies Product Makes Noise When It Sits for a While Parent topic: Solving Problems
Product Makes Noise, But Nothing Copies
If your product makes a noise, but nothing copies, try these solutions: · Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary. · If the nozzle check page does not print, but the product's power is on, make sure your product
software is installed correctly. · Make sure your product is level (not tilted). Parent topic: Solving Copying Problems Related concepts Uninstall Your Product Software Print Head Nozzle Check
Product Makes Noise When It Sits for a While
Your product is performing routine maintenance. This is normal. Parent topic: Solving Copying Problems
Solving Copy Quality Problems
Check these sections if your copies have a quality problem. Copies Have Incorrect or Faint Colors Position, Size, or Margins of Copies are Incorrect Parent topic: Solving Problems
356

Copies Have Incorrect or Faint Colors
If your copies have incorrect, uneven, smeared, or faint colors, try these solutions: · Run a print head nozzle check to see if any of the nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary. · Do not press too hard on the original when you copy from the scanner glass. · Clean the scanner glass with a soft, dry, lint-free cloth or use a small amount of glass cleaner on the
cloth, if necessary. Paper towels are not recommended.
Caution: Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the scanner glass.
· Clean the ADF. · Wipe any dirt or dust off of your originals. · Make sure your paper is not curled. · When copying on thick paper, select a Thick Paper setting from the control panel (Settings >
General Settings > Printer Settings > Thick Paper). When this setting is enabled, copy quality may decline and copy speed may decrease. · If the back of the original appears in your printout, place a piece of black paper on the back of the original and copy it again. You can also try lowering the Density setting. Parent topic: Solving Copy Quality Problems Related concepts Print Head Nozzle Check Related tasks Cleaning the Scanner Glass Cleaning the Automatic Document Feeder Loading Paper in the Paper Cassettes and Rear Paper Tray
Position, Size, or Margins of Copies are Incorrect
If the position, size, or margins of your copies are incorrect, try these solutions: · When placing originals in the ADF, make sure the edge guides are against the edges of the paper. · When placing originals on the scanner glass, make sure the original is placed correctly for scanning.
Align the corner of the original with the corner indicated by the symbol on the scanner glass. If necessary, move the original away from the edges of the scanner glass slightly.
357

· If the original is folded or wrinkled, use the scanner glass. Flatten any folds or wrinkles in the original and try using another sheet or card to keep the original in contact with the scanner glass.
· Clean the scanner glass and ADF. · Make sure the paper is loaded in the correct direction. · Select the appropriate copy size and paper size settings on the LCD screen. Parent topic: Solving Copy Quality Problems Related tasks Cleaning the Scanner Glass Cleaning the Automatic Document Feeder Placing Originals on the Scanner Glass Copying Documents or Photos
Solving Paper Problems
Check these sections if you have problems using paper with your product. Paper Feeding Problems Originals Do Not Feed From the Automatic Document Feeder Paper Jams Inside the Product Paper Ejection Problems Parent topic: Solving Problems
Paper Feeding Problems
If you have problems feeding paper, try these solutions: · If paper does not feed for printing, remove it from the paper tray or cassette. Reload it, then adjust the
edge guides. Make sure the paper stack is not above the tab on the edge guides inside the cassette or paper tray. · Place the product on a flat surface and operate it in the recommended environmental conditions. · Be sure to insert the paper cassette all the way into your product. · If multiple pages feed at once, remove the paper, fan the edges to separate the sheets, and reload it. · Do not load more than the recommended number of sheets. For plain paper, do not load paper above the arrow mark on the edge guides. · Make sure your paper meets the specifications for your product.
358

· If paper jams when you print on both sides of the paper, try loading fewer sheets. · Make sure the paper size and paper type settings are correct for the paper source. · Run the paper guide cleaning utility to clean the paper path. · If you installed an optional paper cassette unit, be sure to enable the cassette unit in the printing
software. · For best results, follow these guidelines:
· Use new, smooth, high-quality paper that is not curled, creased, old, too thin, or too thick. · Load paper in the cassette printable side down. · Load paper in the paper tray printable side up. · Do not load binder paper with holes in the cassette. · Follow any special loading instructions that came with the paper. Parent topic: Solving Paper Problems Related references Paper Specifications Related tasks Loading Paper in the Paper Cassettes and Rear Paper Tray Cleaning the Paper Guide Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - Windows Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - PostScript Printer Software - Windows Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - Mac Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - PostScript Printer Software - Mac
Originals Do Not Feed From the Automatic Document Feeder
If your originals do not feed when placed in the ADF, try these solutions: · Make sure the size, weight, and number of your originals are supported by the ADF. · Make sure the originals are loaded correctly. · Make sure the document is not curled or creased. · Try cleaning the inside of the ADF. Parent topic: Solving Paper Problems
359

Related references Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Specifications Related tasks Placing Originals in the Automatic Document Feeder
Paper Jams Inside the Product
If you see a message that paper has jammed in the product, follow the on-screen instructions to locate and remove the jammed paper. Take the following precautions when removing jammed paper from the product: · Remove the jammed paper carefully. Using too much force may damage the product. · Unless specifically instructed, avoid tilting the product, placing it on its side, or turning it upside down,
as ink may spill.
Warning: Never touch the buttons on the control panel while your hand is inside the product. If the product starts operating, it may cause an injury. Do not touch any protruding parts inside the product.
Parent topic: Solving Paper Problems
Paper Ejection Problems
If you have problems with paper ejecting properly, try these solutions: · If paper does not eject fully, you may have set the wrong paper size. Cancel printing to eject the paper.
Select the correct paper size when you reprint. · If paper is wrinkled when it ejects, it may be damp or too thin. Load new paper and be sure to select
the correct paper type setting when you reprint. · If you are using letterhead paper, select the appropriate paper type setting. · Clean the roller inside the printer to remove any dust on the paper path. Parent topic: Solving Paper Problems Related tasks Cleaning the Paper Guide Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source - Control Panel
Solving Problems Printing from a Computer
Check these sections if you have problems while printing from your computer.
360

Note: When printing using AirPrint, the available print settings are different from those covered in this manual. See the Apple website for details.
Note: For problems while printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver or PostScript (PS3) printer software, see the sections covering that software in this manual.
Nothing Prints Product Icon Does Not Appear in Windows Taskbar Printing is Slow Parent topic: Solving Problems
Nothing Prints
If you have sent a print job and nothing prints, try these solutions: · Make sure your product is turned on and connected to your computer. · Make sure any interface cables are connected securely at both ends. · Make sure the interface specifications match the specifications for the printer and the computer. · Make sure there are no errors or paper jams in the product. · There may a problem with the printer's status. Click EPSON Status Monitor 3 on the printer driver's
Maintenance tab, and then check the printer status. If EPSON Status Monitor 3 is disabled, click Extended Settings on the Maintenance tab, and then select Enable EPSON Status Monitor 3. · If you connected your product to a USB hub, make sure it is a first-tier hub. If it still does not print, connect your product directly to your computer instead of the hub. · If the printer cannot print using a USB connection, disconnect the USB cable from the computer, rightclick on the printer icon displayed on the computer, and select Remove Device. Then connect the USB cable to the computer and try a test print. · If your computer is connected using a USB cable, try a different USB port on your computer or a different cable. · Make sure the printer status is not offline or pending. · Make sure you are using the Epson printer driver for your product or the available functions are limited. · Run a product check to see if a test page prints. If the test page prints, check to see if your product software is installed correctly.
361

· Make sure your system meets the requirements for your operating system. If you are printing a highresolution image, you may need more than the minimum requirements. Print the image at a lower resolution or if necessary, increase your system's memory.
· In Windows, make sure your product is selected as the default printer and the printer port setting matches the printer connection port.
· In Windows, delete all jobs from the Windows Spooler. Click Print Queue on the Maintenance tab in the printer settings window, and cancel any stalled print jobs.
· In Windows, do one of the following to open the Epson Printer Connection Checker and follow the onscreen instructions to check the connection status:
· Windows 11: Click , then search for Epson Printer Connection Checker and select it.
· Windows 10: Click and select Epson Software > Epson Printer Connection Checker. · Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select the Epson Printer Connection Checker
icon.
· Windows 7: Click and select All Programs > Epson Software > Epson Printer Connection Checker.
· On a Mac, make sure the printer is added to the printer list and the printer is not paused. · Make sure your product is selected as the printer in your printing program. · In Windows, the product may not print if a large number of print jobs are sent. Try selecting Print
directly to the printer on the Advanced tab in the printer properties. · Make sure EPSON Status Monitor 3 is enabled to perform manual 2-sided printing (Windows). Manual
2-sided printing may not be available when the printer is accessed over a network or is used as a shared printer. · You can try to clear the problem by updating the product software to the latest version. If the problem persists, try uninstalling and reinstalling the printer driver. Parent topic: Solving Problems Printing from a Computer
Related references Windows System Requirements Mac System Requirements Interface Specifications
Related tasks Running a Product Check
362

Product Icon Does Not Appear in Windows Taskbar
If you do not see your product icon in the Windows taskbar, first try restarting your computer. If that does not work, try this solution: 1. Do one of the following:
· Windows 11: Click , search for Settings and select it. Select Bluetooth & devices > Printers & scanners. Select your product name and select Printing preferences.
· Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners. Select your product name and select Manage > Printing preferences.
· Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. Right-click your product name, select Printing Preferences, and select your product name again if necessary.
· Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click your product name, select Printing Preferences, and select your product name again if necessary.
2. Click the Maintenance tab. 3. Click the Extended Settings button. 4. Select Enable EPSON Status Monitor 3 and click OK. 5. Click the Monitoring Preferences button. 6. Click the checkbox for the option that adds the shortcut icon to the taskbar. 7. Click OK to close the open program windows. Parent topic: Solving Problems Printing from a Computer
Printing is Slow
If printing becomes slow, try these solutions: · Make sure your system meets the requirements for your operating system. If you are printing a high-
resolution image, you may need more than the minimum requirements. If necessary, increase your system's memory. · If you are using Windows 7, close the Devices and Printers window before you print. · On a Mac, make sure you download and install the Epson printer driver. · Make sure Quiet Mode is turned off. · Clear space on your hard drive or run a defragmentation utility to free up existing space.
363

· Close any programs you are not using when you print. · If your product is connected to a USB hub, connect it directly to your computer instead. · If printing becomes slower after printing continuously for a long time, the product may have
automatically slowed down to protect the print mechanism from overheating or becoming damaged. Let the product rest with the power on for 30 minutes, then try printing again. · If you are printing over a wireless network, factors such as interference, network traffic, or weak signal strength may affect your printing speed.
Note for Latin America: If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router, set the router to operate in dual band (2.4 GHz and 5 GHz) mode. If your router uses a single network name (SSID) for both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz band, give each band its own network name (SSID) instead, such as Home Network 2.4 GHz and Home Network 5 GHz. See your router documentation or contact your internet service provider for instructions.
· If you are using the Windows PostScript printer software, try selecting Fast as the Print Quality setting on the Advanced tab of the printer software.
For the fastest printing, select the following settings in your product software: · Make sure the paper type setting matches the type of paper you loaded. · Turn on any high speed settings in your product software. · Select a lower print quality setting. · Make sure the ink drying time has not been increased for double-sided printing. · Windows: Click the Maintenance or Utility tab, select Extended Settings or Speed and Progress,
and select the following settings: · Always Spool RAW Datatype · Page Rendering Mode · Print as Bitmap · Windows: Select Printing preferences, click the More Options tab, and make sure the Bidirectional printing setting is enabled. · Mac: Select System Preferences or System Settings, select Printers & Scanners, and select your product. Select Options & Supplies, select Options (or Driver), and enable the Bidirectional printing setting. · Enable the bidirectional setting on the product control panel.
364

If printing is still slow and you are using Windows 7 or Windows Vista, try the following:
1. Click and select Computer or My Computer. Double-click the C: drive and open these folders: ProgramData > EPSON > PRINTER.
Note: If you do not see the ProgramData folder, open the Organize menu and select Folder and search options. In the window that appears, click the View tab, select Show hidden files, folders, and drives in the Advanced settings list, and click OK.
2. Right-click the EPAUDF01.AUD file and select Delete. 3. Restart your computer and try printing again. Parent topic: Solving Problems Printing from a Computer Related references Windows System Requirements Mac System Requirements
Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
Check these sections if you have problems with the layout or content of your printed pages.
Note: When printing using AirPrint, the available print settings are different from those covered in this manual. See the Apple website for details.
Inverted Image Too Many Copies Print Blank Pages Print Incorrect Margins on Printout Incorrect Characters Print Incorrect Image Size or Position Slanted Printout Parent topic: Solving Problems
Inverted Image
If your printed image is inverted unexpectedly, try these solutions: · Turn off any mirror or inversion settings in your printing application.
365

· Turn off the Mirror Image, Flip horizontally, or Reverse page orientation settings in your printer software. (This option has different names, depending on your operating system version.)
Parent topic: Solving Page Layout and Content Problems Related tasks Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows Selecting Print Layout Options - Mac
Too Many Copies Print
Make sure that the Copies setting in your printing program or printer software is not set for multiple copies. Parent topic: Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
Blank Pages Print
If blank pages print unexpectedly, try these solutions: · Make sure you selected the correct paper size settings in your printing program and printer software. · If a blank page exists in a document you are printing and you want to skip printing it, select the Skip
Blank Page setting in your printer software, if available. · Run a print head nozzle check to see if any of the nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary. · Make sure your product is selected as the printer in your printing program. · Make sure your product is on a flat surface and operating in the recommended environmental
conditions or multiple sheets of paper may be fed at the same time. Parent topic: Solving Page Layout and Content Problems Related concepts Print Head Nozzle Check Print Head Cleaning Related references Environmental Specifications Related tasks Selecting Extended Settings - Windows Selecting Printing Preferences - Mac
366

Incorrect Margins on Printout
If your printed page has incorrect margins, try these solutions: · Make sure you selected the correct paper size settings in your printing program and printer software. · Make sure you selected the correct margins for your paper size in your printing program. · Make sure your paper is positioned correctly for feeding into the product. · Load paper in the correct direction and slide the edge guides against the edges of the paper. You can use the preview option in your printer software to check your margins before you print. Parent topic: Solving Page Layout and Content Problems Related tasks Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac Selecting Basic Print Settings - PCL Driver - Windows Selecting Basic Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows Loading Paper in the Paper Cassettes and Rear Paper Tray
Incorrect Characters Print
If incorrect characters appear in your prints, try these solutions before reprinting: · Make sure any cables are securely connected at both ends. · In Windows, delete all jobs from the Windows Spooler. Click Print Queue on the Maintenance tab in
the printer settings window, and cancel any stalled print jobs. · On a Mac, cancel any paused print jobs. · If your product is connected to a USB hub, connect it directly to your computer instead. · If incorrect characters still appear in your prints, try connecting your product using a different cable. · If your computer entered sleep mode the last time you printed, the next print job after your computer
exits sleep mode may contain garbled characters. Print your document again. · Make sure you are using the printer software for this product. Check the product name at the top of the
driver window. · If you are using the PostScript printer software, EPS files created in binary format may not print
correctly. Try creating the file in ASCII format instead.
367

· If you are using the Windows PostScript printer software, the product cannot print binary data if it is connected to the computer using a USB cable. Try selecting ASCII or TBCP as the Output Protocol setting on the Device Settings tab in the printer properties.
· If you are using the Windows PostScript printer software, select the appropriate substitution fonts on the Device Settings tab in the printer properties.
Parent topic: Solving Page Layout and Content Problems Related tasks Selecting Basic Print Settings - PCL Driver - Windows Selecting Basic Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows
Incorrect Image Size or Position
If your printed image is the wrong size or in the wrong position, try these solutions: · Make sure you selected the correct paper size and layout settings in your printing program and printer
software. · Make sure you selected the correct paper size on the control panel. · Make sure your paper is positioned correctly for feeding into the printer. · Slide the edge guides against the edges of the paper. · Clean the scanner glass and document cover. · If the edges of a copy are cropped, slightly move the original away from the edges of the scanner
glass. · Make sure you selected the correct margins for your paper size in your printing program. · Be sure to select the appropriate original size setting for your original in the copy settings. You can use the preview option in your printer software to check your margins before you print. Parent topic: Solving Page Layout and Content Problems Related references Copying Options Related tasks Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac Loading Paper in the Paper Cassettes and Rear Paper Tray Placing Originals on the Scanner Glass
368

Slanted Printout
If your printouts are slanted, try these solutions: · Make sure the paper is loaded in the correct direction. · Make sure your paper meets the specifications for your product. · Do not load more than the recommended number of sheets. · Slide the edge guides against the edges of the paper. · Make sure the paper type setting matches the type of paper you loaded. · Select a higher print quality setting in your printer software. · Turn off any high speed settings in your product software. · Align the print head. · Adjust the print quality. · If aligning the print head did not improve the quality, disable the Bidirectional Printing setting. · Make sure the product is not printing while tilted or at an angle. Parent topic: Solving Page Layout and Content Problems Related references Paper Specifications Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software Related tasks Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac Loading Paper in the Paper Cassettes and Rear Paper Tray Aligning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel Adjusting the Print Quality Using the Product Control Panel Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source - Control Panel
Solving Print Quality Problems
Check these sections if your printouts have problems with print quality, but your image looks fine on your computer screen.
Note: When printing using AirPrint, the available print settings are different from those covered in this manual. See the Apple website for details.
369

White or Dark Lines in Printout Blurry or Smeared Printout Faint Printout or Printout Has Gaps Grainy Printout Parent topic: Solving Problems
White or Dark Lines in Printout
If you notice white or dark lines in your prints (also called banding), try these solutions before you reprint: · Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary. · Make sure the paper type setting matches the type of paper you loaded. · Make sure you loaded the printable side of the paper correctly for your product. · Turn off any high speed settings in your product software. · Align the print head. If print quality does not improve after aligning the print head, disable the
bidirectional (high speed) setting. · Adjust the print quality in the product software. · If you are copying from the ADF, copy from the scanner glass instead or use a higher quality setting. · Clean any dust or dirt from your originals. · Clean the ADF. · When vertical banding appears or the paper is smeared, clean the paper path. · You may need to replace the ink pack. Parent topic: Solving Print Quality Problems Related concepts Print Head Nozzle Check Print Head Cleaning Related references Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software Related tasks Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source - Control Panel Aligning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel Placing Originals on the Scanner Glass
370

Cleaning the Scanner Glass Cleaning the Paper Guide Removing and Installing the Ink Pack
Blurry or Smeared Printout
If your printouts are blurry or smeared, try these solutions: · Make sure your paper is not damp, curled, old, or loaded incorrectly in your product. · Slide the edge guides to the edges of the paper. · Use a support sheet with special paper, or load special paper one sheet at a time. · Make sure your paper meets the specifications for your product. · Use Epson papers to ensure proper saturation and absorption of genuine Epson inks. · Do not load more than the recommended number of sheets. For plain paper, do not load above the
line indicated by the triangle symbol on the edge guide. · Make sure the paper type setting in your product software matches the type of paper you loaded. · Make sure you loaded the printable side of the paper correctly for your product. · If you are printing on thick paper or envelopes, turn on the Thick Paper setting from the control panel
or select Thick Paper and Envelopes in the Extended Settings of the printer software. (Turning this setting on will decrease print speed.) · When manually printing 2-sided, make sure the ink is completely dry before loading the paper. · Remove each sheet from the output tray as it is printed. · Avoid handling printouts on glossy paper right after printing to allow the ink to set. · Turn off any high speed settings in your product software. · When vertical banding appears or the paper is smeared, clean the paper path. · If you printed on the wrong side of photo paper, clean the paper path. · If you print on both sides of a sheet of paper, smudges may appear on the reverse side of heavily saturated or dark images. If one side of a sheet will contain a lighter image or text, print that side first. Adjust the density and/or ink drying time settings. · Lower the copy density setting on the product control panel. · Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if necessary. · Align the print head.
371

· Adjust the print quality in the product software. · Clean the paper path. · Clean the paper rollers. · Do not press too hard on the original or the document cover when you are scanning originals on the
scanner glass. · Clean the scanner glass. · If you are copying from the ADF, place your originals on the scanner glass instead. · Clean the ADF. · Clean the originals.
Note: Your product will not operate properly while tilted at an angle. Place it on a flat, stable surface that extends beyond the base of the product in all directions.
Parent topic: Solving Print Quality Problems Related references Paper Specifications Compatible Epson Papers Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software Related tasks Loading Paper in the Paper Cassettes and Rear Paper Tray Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source - Control Panel Cleaning the Scanner Glass Cleaning the Automatic Document Feeder Cleaning the Paper Guide
Faint Printout or Printout Has Gaps
If your printouts are faint or have gaps, try these solutions: · Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary. · The ink pack may be old or low on ink, and you may need to replace it. · Make sure the paper type setting matches the type of paper you loaded. · Make sure your paper is not damp, curled, old, or loaded incorrectly in your product.
372

· When copying, increase the Density setting on the product control panel. · Align the print head. · Adjust the print quality in the product software. · Clean the paper path. · Clean the paper rollers. Parent topic: Solving Print Quality Problems
Grainy Printout
If your printouts are grainy, try these solutions: · Make sure you loaded the printable side of the paper correctly for your product. · Select a higher print quality setting and turn off any high speed settings in your product software. · Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary. · Align the print head. · Adjust the print quality in the product software. · If a cross-hatch pattern appears in the copied image, change the Reduce/Enlarge setting. If a cross-
hatch pattern still appears, place the original at a slightly different angle. · You may need to increase the image resolution or print a smaller size; see your software
documentation.
Note: Images from the Internet may be low resolution and not result in a high quality printout.
· If you enlarged the image size in an image-editing program, you need to increase the image resolution setting to retain a high image quality. Increase the image resolution by the same amount you increase the image size. For example, if the image resolution is 300 dpi (dots per inch) and you will double the image size for printing, change the resolution setting to 600 dpi.
Note: Higher resolution settings result in larger file sizes, which take longer to process and print. Consider the limitations of your computer system when selecting a resolution, and select the lowest possible resolution that produces acceptable quality to keep file sizes manageable.
Parent topic: Solving Print Quality Problems
373

Solving Scanning Problems
Check these solutions if you have problems scanning with your product. Scanning Software Does Not Operate Correctly Cannot Start Epson Scan 2 Parent topic: Solving Problems
Scanning Software Does Not Operate Correctly
If your scanning software does not operate correctly, try these solutions: · Make sure your computer has adequate memory and meets the system requirements for your
operating system. · Make sure your computer is not running in a power-saving mode, such as sleep or standby. If so,
wake your system and restart your scanning software. · If you upgraded your operating system but did not reinstall your scanning software, try reinstalling it. · In Windows, make sure your product is listed as a valid device in the Scanners and Cameras control
panel. Parent topic: Solving Scanning Problems
Cannot Start Epson Scan 2
If you cannot start Epson Scan 2, try these solutions: · Make sure your product is turned on and any interface cables are securely connected at both ends. · If your product is connected to a USB hub, connect it directly to your computer instead. · If you are scanning with the ADF, check that the document cover and ADF cover are closed. · Make sure Epson Scan 2 is selected as your scanning program. · Make sure your computer is not running in a power-saving mode, such as sleep or standby. If so,
wake your system and restart Epson Scan 2. · Check the connection setting and test the connection using Epson Scan 2 Utility:
Windows 11: Click , search for Epson Scan 2 Utility and select it. Make sure the correct product is selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset.
Windows 10: Click and select EPSON > Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make sure the correct product is selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset.
374

Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make sure the correct product is selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset.
Windows (other versions): Click or Start > All Programs or Programs > EPSON > Epson Scan 2 > Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make sure the correct product is selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset. Mac: Open the Applications folder, click Epson Software, and click Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make sure the correct product is selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset. · Make sure you do not have multiple versions of Epson Scan 2 installed. If you do, uninstall both versions and install one version. · If you upgraded your operating system but did not reinstall Epson Scan 2, try reinstalling it. · If the user restriction feature (Access Control) is enabled, a user ID and password are required to scan. If you do not know the user ID or password, contact your administrator for assistance. Parent topic: Solving Scanning Problems Related tasks Checking for Software Updates Starting a Scan Using the Epson Scan 2 Icon
Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Check these sections if a scanned image on your computer screen has a quality problem. Image Consists of a Few Dots Only Line of Dots Appears in All Scanned Images Straight Lines in an Image Appear Crooked Scanned Image Quality Problems Image Colors are Patchy at the Edges Ripple Patterns Appear in an Image Scanned Image Edges are Cropped Parent topic: Solving Problems
Image Consists of a Few Dots Only
If your scanned image consists only of a few dots, try these solutions: · Make sure you placed your original for scanning facing the correct way. · If the Image Type setting is Black & White, adjust the Threshold and scan again.
375

· Remove any lint or dirt from your original. · Clean the scanner glass. · Do not press on the original or the document cover with too much force. Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems Related tasks Cleaning the Scanner Glass
Line of Dots Appears in All Scanned Images
If a line of dots appears in all your scanned images, try these solutions: · Clean the scanner glass with a soft, dry, lint-free cloth or use a small amount of glass cleaner on the
cloth, if necessary. Paper towels are not recommended.
Caution: Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the scanner glass.
· Make sure any interface cables are securely connected at both ends. · Remove any dust or dirt that may have adhered to your original. If you are scanning from the ADF, make sure the ADF edge guides fit against the loaded originals. You can also try cleaning the ADF and scanning again. Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems Related tasks Cleaning the Scanner Glass Cleaning the Automatic Document Feeder
Straight Lines in an Image Appear Crooked
If straight lines in an original appear crooked in a scanned image, make sure to place your original straight when you scan it. Clean the scanner glass with a soft, dry, lint-free cloth or use a small amount of glass cleaner on the cloth, if necessary. Paper towels are not recommended. If you are scanning from the ADF, make sure the ADF edge guides fit against the loaded originals. You can also try cleaning the ADF and scanning again. Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
376

Related tasks Cleaning the Scanner Glass Cleaning the Automatic Document Feeder Related topics Placing Originals on the Product
Scanned Image Quality Problems
If you encounter quality problems with your scanned image, try these solutions:
Image is Distorted or Blurry · Make sure your original is not wrinkled or warped. This may prevent the original from laying flat on the
scanner glass. · Do not move your original or your product during scanning. · Clean the scanner glass and the ADF and remove any dirt or dust on your originals. · Your product will not operate properly while tilted at an angle. Place your product on a flat, stable
surface that extends beyond its base in all directions. · Adjust these Epson Scan 2 settings (if available) and try scanning again:
· Make sure you select the correct Image Type for your original. · Increase the Resolution setting. · If the Image Type setting is Black & White, adjust the Threshold setting. · If the Image Type setting is Color or Grayscale, select the Unsharp Mask setting. · If the Image Type setting is Black & White, select Text Enhancement. If the Image Type setting is
Color or Grayscale, change the Text Enhancement setting to High.
Image is Too Dark · Make sure you select the correct Image Type for your original. · If the Image Type is set to Color or Grayscale, adjust the Brightness setting. · Check the brightness and contrast settings of your computer monitor.
Back of Original Image Appears in Scanned Image · Place a piece of black paper on the back of the original and scan it again. · Lower the copy density setting.
377

· Adjust these Epson Scan 2 settings (if available) and try scanning again: · Make sure you select the correct Image Type for your original. · Select the Advanced Settings tab and adjust the Brightness setting. · Select Text Enhancement.
Scanned Image Colors Do Not Match Original Colors Printed colors can never exactly match the colors on your computer monitor because printers and monitors use different color systems: monitors use RGB (red, green, and blue) and printers typically use CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black). Check the color matching and color management capabilities of your computer, display adapter, and the software you are using to see if they are affecting the palette of colors you see on your screen. Remove any dust or dirt from your originals and clean the scanner glass. Do not press with too much force on the original or document cover. To adjust the colors in your scanned image, adjust these Epson Scan 2 settings (if available) and try scanning again: · If the Image Type setting is Auto, Color or Grayscale, adjust the Contrast setting. · If the Image Type setting is Black & White or Grayscale, adjust the Color Enhance setting. Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems Related references Control Panel Scanning Options Related tasks Cleaning the Scanner Glass Cleaning the Automatic Document Feeder Related topics Placing Originals on the Product
Image Colors are Patchy at the Edges
If you are scanning a thick or warped original, cover its edges with paper to block external light as you scan it. Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
378

Ripple Patterns Appear in an Image
You may see a ripple pattern (called a moiré) in scanned images of printed documents. This is caused by interference from differing pitches in the scanner's screen and your original's halftone screen. To reduce this effect, adjust these Epson Scan 2 settings (if available) and try scanning again: · Select the Descreening setting on the Advanced Settings tab. · Select a lower Resolution setting. · Place the original at a slightly different angle. Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems Related references Additional Scanning Settings - Advanced Settings Tab Additional Scanning Settings - Main Settings Tab
Scanned Image Edges are Cropped
If the edges of a scanned image are cropped, make sure your original is placed correctly for scanning. If necessary, move your original away from the edges of the scanner glass slightly. In the Epson Scan 2 settings, set the Edge Fill setting to None. Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems Related references Additional Scanning Settings - Advanced Settings Tab Related topics Placing Originals on the Product
Solving Faxing Problems
Check these solutions if you have problems faxing with your product. Cannot Send or Receive Faxes Cannot Receive Faxes with a Telephone Connected to Your Product Fax Memory Full Error Appears Fax Quality is Poor Sent Fax is Received in an Incorrect Size Received Fax is Not Printed Parent topic: Solving Problems
379

Cannot Send or Receive Faxes
If you cannot send or receive faxes, try these solutions: · If an error code is displayed on the control panel, try the solutions suggested in the error code list. · If you are faxing from a computer, use the Epson FAX Utility to send your fax. · Make sure the recipient's fax machine is turned on and working. · Make sure the recipient's fax number is correct and entered correctly. · Make sure paper is loaded correctly in your product. · Make sure you have set up your header information and have not blocked your caller ID. Otherwise,
your faxes might be rejected by the recipient's fax machine. · If user restriction has been enabled, you may need to enter a user name and password. Contact your
administrator for assistance. · If you did not connect a telephone to your product, set the Receive Mode setting to Auto so you can
receive faxes automatically. · Check that the cable connecting your telephone wall jack to your product's LINE port is secure. · Print a fax connection report using your product control panel or fax software to help diagnose the
problem. · Verify that the telephone wall jack works by connecting a phone to it and testing it. · If there is no dial tone and you connected the product to a PBX (Private Branch Exchange) phone line
or Terminal Adapter, change the Line Type setting to PBX. If you still cannot send a fax, turn off the product's dial tone detection setting. (Turning off the dial tone setting may cause the product to drop the first digit of a fax number.) · Check the Line Type setting and set it to PBX. If your phone system requires an external access code to reach an outside line, register the code to the product and add a # (hash) to the beginning of the phone number when dialing. · If you connected your product to a DSL phone line, you must connect a DSL filter to the phone jack to enable faxing over the line. Contact your DSL provider for the necessary filter. · If you are connected to a DSL phone line, connect the product directly to a telephone wall jack and send a fax. If it works, the problem may be caused by the DSL filter. Contact your DSL provider. · If your telephone line has static, turn off your product's error correction mode fax communication setting and try faxing again. · Make sure you installed the FAX driver for your product and that it is not paused.
380

· The data being sent may be too large. Try faxing the originals in batches, by using a connected phone, or by selecting On Hook. If you are faxing in monochrome, enable the Direct Send setting (Fax > Fax Settings > Fax Send Settings).
· Try lowering your product's fax speed setting. · If a communication error occurs, change the Fax Speed setting to Slow(9,600bps) on the control
panel. · Make sure the error correction mode (ECM) setting is turned on if you are trying to send or receive a
color fax. · If your telephone line uses call waiting and you have trouble receiving faxes, turn off call waiting to
prevent disruption of incoming faxes. · If you have subscribed to a call forwarding service, the product may not be able to receive faxes.
Contact your service provider for assistance. · If the recipient fax machine does not answer your call within 50 seconds after the product has finished
dialing, add pauses after the fax number to send the fax. · When sending faxes using the subaddress feature, ask the recipient if their fax machine can receive
faxes using this feature. Check that the subaddress and password are correct, and that they match with the recipient subaddress and password. Check this when receiving faxes as well. · Check if the sender's fax number is registered to the Rejection Number List · If you cannot send faxes at a specified time, make sure the date and time are set correctly on the product. · If you are receiving faxes using the Epson FAX Utility, check that your product is registered as a fax product in your operating system: Windows: Make sure the product appears in Devices and Printers, Printer, or Printers and Other Hardware. If the product does not appear, uninstall and re-install the Epson FAX Utility. Mac: Select System Preferences or System Settings > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan or Print & Fax) and make sure your product appears. If your product does not appear, click + and add your product. If the product does appear, double-click it and make sure it is not paused.
Note: Do not turn the product off while it is receiving a fax. Otherwise, the fax transmission will be lost.
Note: If your product is connected to a VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) phone line, keep in mind that fax machines are designed to work over analog phone lines. Epson cannot guarantee that fax transmission will work when using VoIP.
381

If your phone line includes voice mail answering services, calls or faxes may be inadvertently received by your voice mail service.
Parent topic: Solving Faxing Problems Related references Basic Settings - Fax Related tasks Receiving Faxes Automatically Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility - Windows Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility - Mac Sending a Fax at a Specified Time Printing Fax Reports Loading Paper in the Paper Cassettes and Rear Paper Tray
Cannot Receive Faxes with a Telephone Connected to Your Product
If you cannot receive faxes when a telephone is connected to your product, try these solutions: · Make sure your telephone is connected to your product's EXT port. · Make sure the Receive Mode is set to Manual.
Note: When answering a call that is a fax, wait until the product's LCD screen displays a message that a connection has been made before you hang up.
Parent topic: Solving Faxing Problems Related tasks Receiving Faxes Manually Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine
Fax Memory Full Error Appears
If you see an error message telling you that the product's fax memory is full, try these solutions: · If you set the product to save received faxes in the product's memory or inbox, delete any faxes you
have already read.
Note: Your product can store up to 200 faxes before its inbox is full.
382

· If you set the product to save received faxes on a computer, turn on the selected computer. Once the faxes are saved on the computer, they are deleted from the product's memory.
· If you set the product to save received faxes on a USB device, connect the selected USB device containing the save fax folder to the product. Once the faxes are saved on the USB device, they are deleted from the product's memory.
Note: Make sure the USB device has enough available memory and is not write protected.
· If the memory is full, try the following: · Send a monochrome fax using the direct sending feature · Send your fax using the on hook feature · Send your faxes in smaller batches
· If the product cannot print a received fax due to a product error, such as a paper jam, the memory full error may appear. Clear any product errors, then ask the sender to resend the fax.
Parent topic: Solving Faxing Problems Related references Fax Sending Options Related tasks Forwarding Received Faxes
Fax Quality is Poor
If you receive a poor quality fax, try these solutions: · Try enabling the error correction mode (ECM) setting. · Contact the fax sender and ask them to send the fax in a higher resolution. · Try reprinting the received fax. If the sent fax quality is poor, try these solutions: · Clean the scanner glass. · Clean the ADF. · Try changing the resolution or density setting on the control panel. · Do not press on the document cover or the original with too much force. · Remove any dust or dirt from the originals.
383

· Try changing the original type setting on the control panel. · If you are sending a monochrome fax to a single recipient, try sending the fax using the Direct Send
feature.
Note: If you send a high-resolution monochrome fax without using the Direct Send feature, the product may automatically lower the resolution.
· Try enabling the error correction mode (ECM) setting. · If the back of the original appears in your sent fax, place a piece of black paper on the back of the
original and fax it again. Parent topic: Solving Faxing Problems Related references Fax Sending Options Basic Settings - Fax Related tasks Cleaning the Scanner Glass Cleaning the Automatic Document Feeder
Sent Fax is Received in an Incorrect Size
If your recipient receives a fax in an incorrect size, try these solutions: · Make sure the original is placed correctly against the alignment marks. · If the edge of the scanned image is missing, move the original away from the edge of the scanner
glass. · Clean any dust or dirt from the originals. · If you are sending a fax using the scanner glass, make sure your original is placed correctly and that
the correct paper size is selected on the control panel. · Clean the scanner glass and document cover. Parent topic: Solving Faxing Problems Related topics Placing Originals on the Product
384

Received Fax is Not Printed
If a received fax is not printed, try these solutions: · Make sure the product is free of errors. The product cannot print received faxes if an error has
occurred with the product, such as a paper jam. · If the product has been set to save received faxes in the product's memory or inbox, received faxes
are not automatically printed. Check the Fax Output setting on the product control panel and change it, if necessary. · If the product has been set to save received faxes in the product's memory or inbox, received faxes are not automatically printed. Check the Receive Settings options on the product control panel and change them, if necessary. Parent topic: Solving Faxing Problems Related references Receive Settings - Fax
Solving USB Device Problems
Check these solutions if you have problems using USB devices with your product. Cannot View or Print from a USB Device Cannot Save Files on a USB Device Cannot Transfer Files To or From a USB Device Parent topic: Solving Problems
Cannot View or Print from a USB Device
If you cannot view or print photos or documents from a USB device connected to your product, try these solutions: · Make sure memory devices are enabled on the product. · Make sure your device is compatible with the product. · Make sure the files on your device are in the correct format. Parent topic: Solving USB Device Problems Related references External USB Device Specifications
385

Related tasks Disabling the External Interface
Cannot Save Files on a USB Device
If you cannot save files on a USB device connected to your product, try these solutions: · To save faxes on a USB device, create a folder in the Fax Output settings on the product control
panel. · To save faxes on a USB device, create a folder using the unconditional save/forward settings on the
product control panel. · Make sure the device is not write-protected. · Make sure the device has enough available space. · Make sure memory devices are enabled on your product. · Make sure the device is compatible with the product. Parent topic: Solving USB Device Problems Related references External USB Device Specifications Related tasks Disabling the External Interface
Cannot Transfer Files To or From a USB Device
If you have problems transferring files to or from a USB device connected to your product, try these solutions: · Make sure your device is compatible with the product. · Make sure the device is not write-protected. · Make sure there is enough free space on the device. · Make sure your product is securely connected to your computer. · Make sure that the file sharing setting for your product is enabled. Parent topic: Solving USB Device Problems Related references External USB Device Specifications
386

Related tasks Disabling the External Interface
Uninstall Your Product Software
If you have a problem that requires you to uninstall and re-install your software, follow the instructions for your operating system. Uninstalling Product Software - Windows Uninstalling Product Software - Mac Parent topic: Solving Problems
Uninstalling Product Software - Windows
You can uninstall and then re-install your product software to solve certain problems. 1. Turn off the product. 2. Disconnect any interface cables. 3. Do one of the following:
· Windows 11: Click , then search for Settings and select it. Select Apps or System > Apps & features. Then select the program you want to uninstall and select Uninstall.
· Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Apps or System > Apps & features. Then select the program you want to uninstall and select Uninstall.
· Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Programs > Programs and Features. Select the uninstall option for your Epson product, then select Uninstall/Change.
Note: If you see a User Account Control window, click Yes or Continue.
Select your product again, if necessary, then select OK, and click Yes to confirm the uninstallation.
· Windows (other versions): Click or Start, and select All Programs or Programs. Select EPSON, select your product, then click EPSON Printer Software Uninstall.
Note: If you see a User Account Control window, click Yes or Continue.
In the next window, select your product and click OK. Then follow any on-screen instructions.
387

4. Do one of the following to uninstall Epson Scan 2, then follow any on-screen instructions: · Windows 11/Windows 10: Select Epson Scan 2 and click Uninstall. · Windows 8.x/Windows 7/Windows Vista: Select Epson Scan and click Uninstall/Change.
5. Restart your computer, then see the Start Here sheet to re-install your software.
Note: If you find that re-installing your product software does not solve a problem, contact Epson.
Parent topic: Uninstall Your Product Software
Uninstalling Product Software - Mac
In most cases, you do not need to uninstall your product software before re-installing it. However, you can download the Uninstaller utility from the Epson support website to uninstall your product software as described here.
Note: If you find that re-installing your product software does not solve a problem, contact Epson.
1. To download the Uninstaller utility, visit epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America) and select your product.
2. Click Downloads. 3. Select your operating system, click Utilities, locate the Uninstaller utility, and click Download. 4. Run the file you downloaded. 5. Double-click the Uninstaller icon. 6. In the Epson Uninstaller screen, select the checkbox for each software program you want to
uninstall. 7. Click Uninstall. 8. Follow the on-screen instructions to uninstall the software. 9. Reinstall your product software.
Note: If you uninstall the printer driver and your product name remains in the Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners window, select your product name and click the (remove) icon to remove it.
Parent topic: Uninstall Your Product Software
388

Where to Get Help (U.S. and Canada)
If you need to contact Epson for technical support services, use the following support options.
Internet Support Visit Epson's support website at epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America) and select your product for solutions to common problems. You can download drivers and documentation, get FAQs and troubleshooting advice, or e-mail Epson with your questions.
Speak to a Support Representative Before you call Epson for support, please have the following information ready: · Product name · Product serial number (located on a label on the product) · Proof of purchase (such as a store receipt) and date of purchase · Computer configuration · Description of the problem Then call: · U.S. and Canada (English): (800) 241-5786, 7 a.m. to 4 p.m., Pacific Time, Monday through Friday · Canada (French): (905) 709-3839, 7 a.m. to 4 p.m., Pacific Time, Monday through Friday Days and hours of support are subject to change without notice. Toll or long distance charges may apply.
Purchase Supplies and Accessories You can purchase genuine Epson ink and paper at epson.com (U.S. sales), epson.ca (Canadian sales), or latin.epson.com (Latin American sales). You can also purchase supplies from an Epson authorized reseller. To find the nearest one, call 800-GO-EPSON (800-463-7766) in the U.S. or 800-807-7766 in Canada. Parent topic: Solving Problems
Where to Get Help (Latin America)
If you need additional help with your Epson product, contact Epson. Epson provides these technical support services:
389

Internet Support Visit Epson's support website at latin.epson.com/support for solutions to common problems. You can download drivers and documentation, get FAQs and troubleshooting advice, or e-mail Epson with your questions.
Speak to a Support Representative Before you call Epson for support, please have the following information ready: · Product name · Product serial number (located on a label on the product) · Proof of purchase (such as a store receipt) and date of purchase · Computer configuration · Description of the problem Then call:

Country Argentina
Bolivia* Brazil Chile Colombia
Costa Rica Dominican Republic* Ecuador* El Salvador* Guatemala* Mexico

Telephone (54 11) 5167-0300 0800-288-37766 800-100-116 0800-007-5000 (56 2) 2484-3400 Bogota: (57 1) 602-4751 Other cities: 01-8000-915235 800-377-6627 1-888-760-0068 1-800-000-044 800-6570 1-800-835-0358 Mexico City: (52 55) 1323-2052 Other cities: 01-800-087-1080

390

Country Nicaragua* Panama* Paraguay Peru
Uruguay Venezuela

Telephone 00-1-800-226-0368 00-800-052-1376 009-800-521-0019 Lima: (51 1) 418-0210 Other cities: 0800-10126 00040-5210067 (58 212) 240-1111

* Contact your local phone company to call this toll-free number from a mobile phone. If your country does not appear in the list, contact the sales office in the nearest country. Toll or long distance charges may apply.
Purchase Supplies and Accessories You can purchase genuine Epson ink and paper from an Epson authorized reseller. To find the nearest reseller, visit latin.epson.com or call your nearest Epson sales office. Parent topic: Solving Problems

391

Technical Specifications
These sections list the technical specifications for your product.
Note: Epson offers a recycling program for end of life Epson products. Please go to this site (U.S.) or this site (Canada) for information on how to return your Epson products for proper disposal.
Windows System Requirements Mac System Requirements Paper Specifications Printable Area Specifications Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Specifications Scanning Specifications Fax Specifications Ink Pack Specifications Dimension Specifications Electrical Specifications Environmental Specifications Interface Specifications External USB Device Specifications Network Interface Specifications Safety and Approvals Specifications
Windows System Requirements
To use your product and its software, your computer should use one of these Microsoft operating systems: · Windows 11 · Windows 10 · Windows 8.x · Windows 7 · Windows Vista · Windows Server 2022
392

· Windows Server 2019 · Windows Server 2016 · Windows Server 2012 R2 · Windows Server 2012 · Windows Server 2008 R2 · Windows Server 2008 · Windows Server 2003 SP2 or later
Note: For the latest product software available for your operating system, visit the Epson support site at epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America), select your product, and select Downloads.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Mac System Requirements
To use your product and its software, your Mac should use one of these operating systems: · macOS 13.x · macOS 12.x · macOS 11.x · macOS 10.15.x · macOS 10.14.x · macOS 10.13.x · macOS 10.12.x · OS X 10.11.x · OS X 10.10.x · OX X 10.9.5.x Parent topic: Technical Specifications
393

Paper Specifications

Note: Since the quality of any particular brand or type of paper may be changed by the manufacturer at any time, Epson cannot guarantee the quality of any non-Epson brand or type of paper. Always test a sample of paper stock before purchasing large quantities or printing large jobs.

Single-sheets Size
Paper types

A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm]) A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm]) Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm]) Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm]) 8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm) Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches [184 × 267 mm]) Mexico-Oficio (8.5 × 13.4 inches [216 × 340 mm]) Oficio 9 (8.46 × 12.4 inches [215 × 315 mm]) 4 × 6 inches (102 × 152 mm) 5 × 7 inches (127 × 178 mm) 8 × 10 inches (203 × 254 mm) 16:9 wide (4 × 7.1 inches [102 × 181 mm]) Half Letter (5.5 × 8.5 inches [140 × 216 mm]) Plain paper

Weight

Note: Your product also supports compatible papers distributed by Epson. See the link at the end of this topic for a list of compatible Epson papers.
Plain paper: 17 lb (64 g/m2) to 24 lb (90 g/m2)
Thick paper: 25 lb (91 g/m2) to 68 lb (256 g/m2)

Envelopes Size

No. 10 (4.1 × 9.5 inches [105 × 241 mm])

394

Paper types Weight

Plain bond paper 20 lb (75 g/m2) to 27 lb (100 g/m2)

Parent topic: Technical Specifications Related references Compatible Epson Papers
Printable Area Specifications
Single sheets

1 Top/bottom/right/left: 0.12 inch (3 mm) minimum 2 Reduced print quality area/top: 1.85 inches (47 mm) minimum 3 Reduced print quality area/bottom: 1.77 inches (45 mm) minimum
395

Envelopes

1 Left/right: 0.12 inch (3 mm) minimum 2 Top/bottom: 0.12 inch (3 mm) minimum 3 Reduced print quality area/left: 0.71 inch (18 mm) minimum 4 Reduced print quality area/right: 1.85 inches (47 mm) minimum

Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Specifications

ADF type Paper size
Paper type Paper weight Sheet feeding capacity

Auto-duplex scanning
US letter, legal, or A4 size, A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm]), 8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm), Mexico-Oficio (8.5 × 13.4 inches [216 × 340 mm]), Oficio 9 (8.46 × 12.4 inches [215 × 315 mm])
Plain paper, high-quality plain paper, or recycled paper 17 lb (64 g/m2) to 24 lb (95 g/m2)
Total thickness: 0.22 inch (5.5 mm)
Approximately 50 sheets

Parent topic: Technical Specifications

396

Scanning Specifications

Scanner type Photoelectric device Effective pixels Document size Scanning resolution Output resolution Image data
Light source

Flatbed, color CIS 10200 × 14040 pixels at 1200 dpi Maximum: 8.5 × 11.7 inches (216 × 297 mm) Scanner glass: US letter or A4 1200 dpi (main scan) 2400 dpi (sub scan) 50 to 9600 dpi in 1 dpi increments Color: 48 bits per pixel (16 bits per pixel per color) internal 24 bits per pixel (8 bits per pixel per color) external Grayscale: 16 bits per pixel internal 8 bits per pixel external Black and white: 16 bits per pixel internal 1 bit per pixel external LED

Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Fax Specifications

Fax type Supported lines
Speed

Black-and-white and color fax capability (ITU-T Super Group 3) Standard analog phone lines PBX (Private Branch Exchange) telephone systems Up to 33.6 kbps

397

Resolution
Compression method Communication standards Sending paper size Transmission speed (Actual speed depends on the document, recipient's device, and phone line status) Contacts Page memory Redial Interface

Monochrome Standard: 203 pixels per inch × 98 lines per inch (8 pixels per mm × 3.85 lines per mm) Fine: 203 pixels per inch × 196 lines per inch (8 pixels per mm × 7.7 lines per mm) Super Fine: 203 pixels per inch × 392 lines per inch (8 pixels per mm × 15.4 lines per mm) Ultra Fine: 406 pixels per inch × 392 lines per inch (16 pixels per mm × 15.4 lines per mm) Color 200 × 200 dpi Monochrome: MH/MR/MMR Color: JPEG G3, Super G3 Scanner Glass: Letter, A4 ADF: Letter, A4, Legal Approx. 3 seconds (transmitting a standard A4 ITU-T chart No. 1 with Standard MMR encryption at a speed of 33.6 kbps)
Number of contacts: up to 200 Number of groups: up to 199 Up to 550 pages (when an ITU-T No. 1 chart is received in monochrome draft mode) 2 times (with 1 minute interval); may differ depending on your country or region RJ-11 Phone Line RJ-11 Telephone set connection

Parent topic: Technical Specifications

398

Ink Pack Specifications

Note: Your printer is designed to work only with genuine Epson-brand ink packs. Other brands of ink packs and ink supplies are not compatible and, even if described as compatible, may not function properly or at all. Epson periodically provides firmware updates to address issues of security, performance, minor bug fixes and ensure the printer functions as designed. These updates may affect the functionality of third-party ink. Non-Epson branded or altered Epson ink packs that functioned prior to a firmware update may not continue to function.
The included initial ink pack is designed for reliable printer setup and cannot be used as a replacement ink pack or resold. After setup, the remaining ink is available for printing. Yields are based on ISO 24711 in default mode, printing continuously. Yields vary due to print images, settings, and temperatures. Printing infrequently reduces yields. Your ink pack must be installed with ink for printing and printer maintenance. For print quality, some ink remains in the replaced ink pack.

Color Temperature

Black Storage: 22 to 104 °F (30 to 40 °C) 1 month at 104 °F (40 °C) Ink may freeze at 32 °F (0 °C) or lower) Ink thaws and is usable after 5 hours at 77 °F (25 °C)

Parent topic: Technical Specifications

399

Dimension Specifications

Height

Stored: 14.1 inches (357 mm)

Stored with 1 optional paper cassette installed: 18 inches (457 mm)

Stored with 2 optional paper cassettes installed: 21.9 inches (557 mm)

Stored with 3 optional paper cassettes installed: 25.9 inches (657 mm)

Printing: 17.7 inches (449 mm)

Printing with one optional paper cassette installed: 21.6 inches (549 mm)

Printing with two optional paper cassettes installed: 25.6 inches (649 mm)

Printing with three optional paper cassettes installed: 29.5 inches (749 mm)

Width

Stored: 16.7 inches (425 mm)

Printing: 16.7 inches (425 mm)

Depth

Stored: 21.1 inches (535 mm); with output tray installed

Printing: 22.8 inches (578 mm)

Weight

41.9 lb (19 kg)

(without ink packs or power cord) With one optional paper cassette installed: 51.8 lb (23.5 kg)

With two optional paper cassettes installed: 61.7 lb (28.0 kg)

With three optional paper cassettes installed: 71.7 lb (32.7 kg)

Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Electrical Specifications

Power supply rating Rated frequency range Rated current

100 to 240 V 50 to 60 Hz 1.0 to 0.6 A

400

Power consumption

Standalone copying: Approximately 30 W (ISO/IEC24712) Ready mode: Approximately 15.4 W Sleep mode: Approximately 1.2 W Power off mode: Approximately 0.2 W

Parent topic: Technical Specifications

Environmental Specifications

Temperature
Humidity (without condensation)

Operating: 50 to 95 °F (10 to 35 °C) Storage: 4 to 104 °F (20 to 40 °C) before initial ink charging 5 to 104 °F (15 to 40 °C) after initial ink charging 1 month at 104 °F (40 °C) Operating: 20 to 80% RH Storage: 5 to 85% RH

Parent topic: Technical Specifications

Interface Specifications

Interface type

Hi-Speed USB (Device Class for computers) Hi-Speed USB (for external USB device)

Note: Epson cannot guarantee the operation of externally connected devices. USB 3.0 cables are not supported.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
External USB Device Specifications
Do not use devices with the following requirements: · Dedicated driver · Security settings, such as password or encryption, etc.

401

USB memory device

2TB Formatted in FAT, FAT32, or exFAT

Note: Epson cannot guarantee the operation of externally connected devices.

You can use USB devices with your product containing files that meet these specifications.

File format
Image size File size Number of files

JPEGs (*.JPG) with the Exif Version 2.31 standard taken by digital cameras (DCF version 1.0 or 2.0* compliant) TIFF 6.0-compliant uncompressed images: RGB full-color or binary (not CCITT-encoded) PDF version 1.7 compliant data 80 × 80 pixels to 10200 × 10200 pixels Up to 2GB JPEG: Up to 9990** TIFF: Up to 999 PDF: Up to 999

* Files stored on digital cameras with built-in memory are not supported. ** If the number of files exceeds 999, the files are displayed in groups. Parent topic: Technical Specifications

Network Interface Specifications

Wi-Fi (U.S. and Canada)

Standard

IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n*1/ac/k/r/v

402

Security
Frequency band Channels
Connection modes
*1: Only available for the HT20 Wi-Fi (Latin America) Standard

WPA2-PSK (AES); complies with WPA2 standards with support for WPA/WPA2 Personal WPA3-SAE (AES) WPA2/WPA-3-Enterprise WEP (64/128 bit)
Note: Wi-Fi Direct only supports WPA2-PSK (AES) IEEE 802.11b/g/n: 2.4 GHz IEEE 802.11a/n/ac: 5 GHz 2.4 GHz: 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12/13 5 GHz: Wi-Fi: · W52 (36/40/44/48) · W53 (52/56/60/64) · W56 (100/104/108/112/116/132/136/140/144) · W58 (149/153/157/161/165) Wi-Fi Direct: · W52 (36/40/44/48) · W58 (149/153/157/161/165) Infrastructure mode Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP)
Note: Wi-Fi Direct Simple AP mode is available even if you connect the product to an Ethernet network. Wi-Fi Direct is not supported on IEEE 802.11b.
IEEE 802.11 b/g/n*1/k/r/v

403

Security

WPA2-PSK (AES); complies with WPA2 standards with support for WPA/WPA2 Personal
WPA3-SAE (AES)
WPA2/WPA-3-Enterprise
WEP (64/128 bit)

Frequency band Channels Coordination modes

Note: Wi-Fi Direct only supports WPA2-PSK (AES) 2.4 GHz 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12/13 Infrastructure mode Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP)

Note: Wi-Fi Direct Simple AP mode is available even if you connect the product to an Ethernet network. Wi-Fi Direct is not supported on IEEE 802.11b.

*1: Only available for the HT20 Ethernet

Standard
Communication mode Connector

IEEE802.3i (10BASE-T)*
IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX)
IEEE802.3ab (1000BASE-T)*
IEEE802.3az (Energy Efficient Ethernet); the connected device should be IEEE802.3az compliant
Auto, 10Mbps Full duplex, 10Mbps Half duplex, 100Mbps Full duplex, 100Mbps Half duplex
RJ-45

* Use a category 5e or higher STP (Shielded twisted pair) cable to prevent risk of radio interference.
Security IEEE802.1X; requires the connected device to comply with IEEE802.1X

404

IPsec/IP Filtering SSL/TLS; either HTTPS Server/Client or IPPS SMTPS (StartTLS, SSL/TLS) SNMPv3 Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Safety and Approvals Specifications

United States Canada

Safety: UL60950-1 EMC: FCC part 15 Subpart B Class B Safety: CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1 EMC: CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3 (B)

This equipment contains the following wireless module:
· Manufacturer: Seiko Epson Corporation
· Type: J26H005
This product conforms to Part 15 of FCC Rules and RSS-210 of the IC Rules. Epson cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification of the product. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing.
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment should be installed and operated so that the radiator is kept at least 7.9 inches (20 cm) or more away from a person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
Parent topic: Technical Specifications

405

Notices
Check these sections for important notices about your product.
Note: Epson offers a recycling program for end of life Epson products. Please go to this site (U.S.) or this site (Canada) for information on how to return your Epson products for proper disposal.
Important Safety Instructions FCC Compliance Statement Binding Arbitration and Class Waiver Trademarks Copyright Notice
Important Safety Instructions
Before using your Epson product, read and follow these safety instructions. General Printer Safety Instructions Wireless Connection Safety Instructions Telephone Equipment Safety Instructions LCD Screen Safety Instructions Parent topic: Notices
General Printer Safety Instructions
· Be sure to follow all warnings and instructions marked on the printer. · Use only the type of power source indicated on the printer's label. · Use only the power cord that comes with the printer. Use of another cord may cause fires or shock. Do
not use the cord with any other equipment. · Make sure the AC power cord meets the relevant local safety standard. · Place the printer near a wall outlet where the plug can be easily unplugged. · Avoid plugging the printer into an outlet on the same circuit as a photo copier or air control system that
regularly switches on and off, or on an outlet controlled by a wall switch or timer. · Do not let the power cord become damaged or frayed.
406

· If you use an extension cord with the printer, make sure the total ampere rating of the devices plugged into the extension cord does not exceed the cord's ampere rating. Also, make sure the total ampere rating of all devices plugged into the wall outlet does not exceed the wall outlet's ampere rating.
· Always turn off the printer using the power button, and wait until the power light stops flashing before unplugging the printer or cutting off power to the electrical outlet.
· Place the printer on a flat, stable surface that extends beyond its base in all directions. It will not operate properly if it is tilted or at an angle.
· Keep your product at least 8.7 inches (22 cm) away from cardiac pacemakers to prevent your product's radio waves from affecting the operation of the pacemaker.
· Leave enough space above the printer to fully raise the printer cover.
· Leave enough space in front of the printer for the paper to be fully ejected.
· Avoid locations that are subject to rapid changes in heat or humidity, shocks or vibrations, or dust.
· Do not place the printer near a radiator or heating vent or in direct sunlight.
· Leave enough room around the printer for sufficient ventilation. Do not block or cover openings in the case or insert objects through the slots.
· The power-supply cords should be placed to avoid abrasions, cuts, fraying, crimping, and kinking. Do not place objects on top of the power-supply cords and do not allow the power-supply cords to be stepped on or run over. Be particularly careful to keep all the power-supply cords straight at the ends.
· Keep the printer away from potential sources of electromagnetic interference, such as loudspeakers or the base units of cordless telephones.
· When connecting the printer to a computer or other device with a cable, ensure the correct orientation of the connectors. Each connector has only one correct orientation. Inserting a connector in the wrong orientation may damage both devices connected by the cable.
· Do not insert objects through the slots on the printer.
· Do not put your hand inside the printer while it is printing.
· Do not trap your fingers when closing the scanner unit.
· Do not touch the flat white cable inside the printer.
· Do not move the print head by hand; this may damage the printer.
· Do not spill liquid on the printer and do not handle the printer with wet hands.
· Do not use aerosol products that contain flammable gases inside or around the printer. Doing so may cause fire.
· Except as specifically explained in your documentation, do not attempt to service the printer yourself.
407

· Unplug the printer and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: if the power cord or plug is damaged; if liquid has entered the product; if the product has been dropped or the case damaged; if the product does not operate normally or exhibits a distinct change in performance. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions.
· If damage occurs to the plug, replace the cord set or consult a qualified electrician. If there are fuses in the plug, make sure you replace them with fuses of the correct size and rating.
· Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet if you are not going to use the printer for an extended period.
Parent topic: Important Safety Instructions
Wireless Connection Safety Instructions
Radio waves from this product may adversely affect the operation of medical equipment or automatically controlled devices, such as pacemakers, automatic doors or fire alarms. When using this product near such devices or inside a medical facility, follow the directions from authorized staff members at the facility, and follow all posted warnings and directions on the device to avoid causing an accident. Do not connect this product to the internet directly. Connect it to a network protected by a router or firewall. Parent topic: Important Safety Instructions
Telephone Equipment Safety Instructions
When using telephone equipment, you should always follow basic safety precautions to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and personal injury, including the following: · Do not use the Epson product near water. · Avoid using a telephone during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from
lightning. · Do not use a telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
Caution: To reduce the risk of fire, use only a No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord.
Parent topic: Important Safety Instructions
LCD Screen Safety Instructions
· Use only a dry, soft cloth to clean the LCD screen. Do not use liquid or chemical cleansers.
408

· If the LCD screen is damaged, contact Epson. If the liquid crystal solution gets on your hands, wash them thoroughly with soap and water. If the liquid crystal solution gets into your eyes, flush them immediately with water. If discomfort or vision problems remain after a thorough flushing, see a doctor immediately.
· Do not press too hard on the LCD screen or subject it to heavy impacts.
· Do not use a pointy or sharp object, such as a pen or your fingernail, to operate the LCD screen.
· If the LCD screen chips or cracks, do not touch or attempt to remove the broken pieces; contact Epson for support.
· Do not subject your product to sudden changes in temperature or humidity; this may cause condensation to develop inside the LCD screen and degrade its performance.
· The LCD screen may contain a few small bright or dark spots, and may display uneven brightness. These are normal and do not indicate that the screen is damaged in any way.
Parent topic: Important Safety Instructions
FCC Compliance Statement
For United States Users
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio or television reception. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference to radio and television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
· Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
· Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
· Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
· Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
WARNING
The connection of a non-shielded equipment interface cable to this equipment will invalidate the FCC Certification or Declaration of this device and may cause interference levels which exceed the limits established by the FCC for this equipment. It is the responsibility of the user to obtain and use a shielded equipment interface cable with this device. If this equipment has more than one interface connector, do
409

not leave cables connected to unused interfaces. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For Canadian Users
CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B)
Parent topic: Notices
Binding Arbitration and Class Waiver
1. DISPUTES, BINDING INDIVIDUAL ARBITRATION, AND WAIVER OF CLASS ACTIONS AND CLASS ARBITRATIONS
1.1 Disputes. The terms of this Section 1 shall apply to all Disputes between you and Epson. The term "Dispute" is meant to have the broadest meaning permissible under law and includes any dispute, claim, controversy or action between you and Epson arising out of or relating to this Agreement, Epson branded products (hardware and including any related software), or other transaction involving you and Epson, whether in contract, warranty, misrepresentation, fraud, tort, intentional tort, statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other legal or equitable basis. "DISPUTE" DOES NOT INCLUDE IP CLAIMS, or more specifically, a claim or cause of action for (a) trademark infringement or dilution, (b) patent infringement, (c) copyright infringement or misuse, or (d) trade secret misappropriation (an "IP Claim"). You and Epson also agree, notwithstanding Section 1.6,that a court, not an arbitrator, may decide if a claim or cause of action is for an IP Claim.
1.2 Binding Arbitration. You and Epson agree that all Disputes shall be resolved by binding arbitration according to this Agreement. ARBITRATION MEANS THAT YOU WAIVE YOUR RIGHT TO A JUDGE OR JURY IN A COURT PROCEEDING AND YOUR GROUNDS FOR APPEAL ARE LIMITED. Pursuant to this Agreement, binding arbitration shall be administered by JAMS, a nationally recognized arbitration authority, pursuant to its code of procedures then in effect for consumer related disputes, but excluding any rules that permit joinder or class actions in arbitration (for more detail on procedure, see Section 1.6 below). You and Epson understand and agree that (a) the Federal Arbitration Act (9 U.S.C. §1, et seq.) governs the interpretation and enforcement of this Section 1, (b) this Agreement memorializes a transaction in interstate commerce, and (c) this Section 1 shall survive termination of this Agreement.
1.3 Pre-Arbitration Steps and Notice. Before submitting a claim for arbitration, you and Epson agree to try, for sixty (60) days, to resolve any Dispute informally. If Epson and you do not reach an agreement to resolve the Dispute within the sixty (60) days), you or Epson may commence an arbitration. Notice to Epson must be addressed to: Epson America, Inc., ATTN: Legal Department, 3131 Katella Ave., Los Alamitos, CA 90720 (the "Epson Address"). The Dispute Notice to you will be sent to the most recent address Epson has in its records for you. For this reason, it is important to notify us if your address changes by emailing us at EAILegal@ea.epson.com or writing us at the Epson Address above. Notice of
410

the Dispute shall include the sender's name, address and contact information, the facts giving rise to the Dispute, and the relief requested (the "Dispute Notice"). Following receipt of the Dispute Notice, Epson and you agree to act in good faith to resolve the Dispute before commencing arbitration.
1.4 Small Claims Court. Notwithstanding the foregoing, you may bring an individual action in the small claims court of your state or municipality if the action is within that court's jurisdiction and is pending only in that court.
1.5 WAIVER OF CLASS ACTIONS AND CLASS ARBITRATIONS. YOU AND EPSON AGREE THAT EACH PARTY MAY BRING DISPUTES AGAINST THE OTHER PARTY ONLY IN AN INDIVIDUAL CAPACITY, AND NOT AS A PLAINTIFF OR CLASS MEMBER IN ANY CLASS OR REPRESENTATIVE PROCEEDING, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION FEDERAL OR STATE CLASS ACTIONS, OR CLASS ARBITRATIONS. CLASS ACTION LAWSUITS, CLASS-WIDE ARBITRATIONS, PRIVATE ATTORNEY-GENERAL ACTIONS, AND ANY OTHER PROCEEDING WHERE SOMEONE ACTS IN A REPRESENTATIVE CAPACITY ARE NOT ALLOWED. ACCORDINGLY, UNDER THE ARBITRATION PROCEDURES OUTLINED IN THIS SECTION, AN ARBITRATOR SHALL NOT COMBINE OR CONSOLIDATE MORE THAN ONE PARTY'S CLAIMS WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ALL AFFECTED PARTIES TO AN ARBITRATION PROCEEDING.
1.6 Arbitration Procedure. If you or Epson commences arbitration, the arbitration shall be governed by the rules of JAMS that are in effect when the arbitration is filed, excluding any rules that permit arbitration on a class or representative basis (the "JAMS Rules"), available at http://www.jamsadr.com or by calling 1-800-352-5267, and under the rules set forth in this Agreement. All Disputes shall be resolved by a single neutral arbitrator, and both parties shall have a reasonable opportunity to participate in the selection of the arbitrator. The arbitrator is bound by the terms of this Agreement. The arbitrator, and not any federal, state or local court or agency, shall have exclusive authority to resolve all disputes arising out of or relating to the interpretation, applicability, enforceability or formation of this Agreement, including any claim that all or any part of this Agreement is void or voidable. Notwithstanding this broad delegation of authority to the arbitrator, a court may determine the limited question of whether a claim or cause of action is for an IP Claim, which is excluded from the definition of "Disputes" in Section 1.1 above. The arbitrator shall be empowered to grant whatever relief would be available in a court under law or in equity. The arbitrator may award you the same damages as a court could, and may award declaratory or injunctive relief only in favor of the individual party seeking relief and only to the extent necessary to provide relief warranted by that party's individual claim. In some instances, the costs of arbitration can exceed the costs of litigation and the right to discovery may be more limited in arbitration than in court. The arbitrator's award is binding and may be entered as a judgment in any court of competent jurisdiction.
You may choose to engage in arbitration hearings by telephone. Arbitration hearings not conducted by telephone shall take place in a location reasonably accessible from your primary residence, or in Orange County, California, at your option.
411

a) Initiation of Arbitration Proceeding. If either you or Epson decides to arbitrate a Dispute, both parties agree to the following procedure:
(i) Write a Demand for Arbitration. The demand must include a description of the Dispute and the amount of damages sought to be recovered. You can find a copy of a Demand for Arbitration at http://www.jamsadr.com ("Demand for Arbitration").
(ii) Send three copies of the Demand for Arbitration, plus the appropriate filing fee, to: JAMS, 500 North State College Blvd., Suite 600 Orange, CA 92868, U.S.A.
(iii) Send one copy of the Demand for Arbitration to the other party (same address as the Dispute Notice), or as otherwise agreed by the parties.
b) Hearing Format. During the arbitration, the amount of any settlement offer made shall not be disclosed to the arbitrator until after the arbitrator determines the amount, if any, to which you or Epson is entitled. The discovery or exchange of non-privileged information relevant to the Dispute may be allowed during the arbitration.
c) Arbitration Fees. Epson shall pay, or (if applicable) reimburse you for, all JAMS filings and arbitrator fees for any arbitration commenced (by you or Epson) pursuant to provisions of this Agreement.
d) Award in Your Favor. For Disputes in which you or Epson seeks $75,000 or less in damages exclusive of attorney's fees and costs, if the arbitrator's decision results in an award to you in an amount greater than Epson's last written offer, if any, to settle the Dispute, Epson will: (i) pay you $1,000 or the amount of the award, whichever is greater; (ii) pay you twice the amount of your reasonable attorney's fees, if any; and (iii) reimburse you for any expenses (including expert witness fees and costs) that your attorney reasonably accrues for investigating, preparing, and pursuing the Dispute in arbitration. Except as agreed upon by you and Epson in writing, the arbitrator shall determine the amount of fees, costs, and expenses to be paid by Epson pursuant to this Section 1.6d).
e) Attorney's Fees. Epson will not seek its attorney's fees and expenses for any arbitration commenced involving a Dispute under this Agreement. Your right to attorney's fees and expenses under Section 1.6d) above does not limit your rights to attorney's fees and expenses under applicable law; notwithstanding the foregoing, the arbitrator may not award duplicative awards of attorney's fees and expenses.
1.7 Opt-out. You may elect to opt-out (exclude yourself) from the final, binding, individual arbitration procedure and waiver of class and representative proceedings specified in this Agreement by sending a written letter to the Epson Address within thirty (30) days of your assent to this Agreement (including without limitation the purchase, download, installation of the Software or other applicable use of Epson Hardware, products and services) that specifies (i) your name, (ii) your mailing address, and (iii) your request to be excluded from the final, binding individual arbitration procedure and waiver of class and representative proceedings specified in this Section 1. In the event that you opt-out consistent with the procedure set forth above, all other terms shall continue to apply, including the requirement to provide notice prior to litigation.
412

1.8 Amendments to Section 1. Notwithstanding any provision in this Agreement to the contrary, you and Epson agree that if Epson makes any future amendments to the dispute resolution procedure and class action waiver provisions (other than a change to Epson's address) in this Agreement, Epson will obtain your affirmative assent to the applicable amendment. If you do not affirmatively assent to the applicable amendment, you are agreeing that you will arbitrate any Dispute between the parties in accordance with the language of this Section 1 (or resolve disputes as provided for in Section 1.7, if you timely elected to opt-out when you first assented to this Agreement). 1.9 Severability. If any provision in this Section 1 is found to be unenforceable, that provision shall be severed with the remainder of this Agreement remaining in full force and effect. The foregoing shall not apply to the prohibition against class or representative actions as provided in Section 1.5. This means that if Section 1.5 is found to be unenforceable, the entire Section 1 (but only Section 1) shall be null and void. Parent topic: Notices
Trademarks
EPSON® is a registered trademark, the EPSON logo is a registered logomark, and Epson ConnectTM is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. Remote PrintTM is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Mac, macOS, OS X, AirPrint, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, and App Store are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Use of the Works with Apple badge means that an accessory has been designed to work specifically with the technology identified in the badge and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Google® is a registered trademark and AndroidTM, ChromebookTM, GmailTM, Google ChromeTM, and Google PlayTM are trademarks of Google LLC. Wi-Fi Direct® is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance®. PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company. General Notice: Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of their respective owners. Epson disclaims any and all rights in those marks.
Parent topic: Notices
413

Copyright Notice
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Seiko Epson Corporation. The information contained herein is designed only for use with this Epson product. Epson is not responsible for any use of this information as applied to other products. Neither Seiko Epson Corporation nor its affiliates shall be liable to the purchaser of this product or third parties for damages, losses, costs, or expenses incurred by purchaser or third parties as a result of: accident, misuse, or abuse of this product or unauthorized modifications, repairs, or alterations to this product, or (excluding the U.S.) failure to strictly comply with Seiko Epson Corporation's operating and maintenance instructions. Seiko Epson Corporation shall not be liable for any damages or problems arising from the use of any options or any consumable products other than those designated as Original Epson Products or Epson Approved Products by Seiko Epson Corporation. Seiko Epson Corporation shall not be held liable for any damage resulting from electromagnetic interference that occurs from the use of any interface cables other than those designated as Epson approved Products by Seiko Epson Corporation. This information is subject to change without notice. libTIFF Software Acknowledgment A Note Concerning Responsible Use of Copyrighted Materials Default Delay Times for Power Management for Epson Products Copyright Attribution Parent topic: Notices
libTIFF Software Acknowledgment
Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (I) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics.
414

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE, AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. Parent topic: Copyright Notice
A Note Concerning Responsible Use of Copyrighted Materials
Epson encourages each user to be responsible and respectful of the copyright laws when using any Epson product. While some countries' laws permit limited copying or reuse of copyrighted material in certain circumstances, those circumstances may not be as broad as some people assume. Contact your legal advisor for any questions regarding copyright law. Parent topic: Copyright Notice
Default Delay Times for Power Management for Epson Products
This product will enter sleep mode after a period of nonuse. This is to ensure that the product meets Energy Star standards of energy efficiency. More energy savings can be achieved by setting the time to sleep to a shorter interval. Parent topic: Copyright Notice
Copyright Attribution
© 2023 Epson America, Inc. 9/23 CPD-63499 Parent topic: Copyright Notice
415

References

OpenPDF-TKS 1.0.1